Expert Cut Reference Manual

CUT
REFERENCE
MANUAL
Copyright
The contents of this user manual and graphics are protected by Spanish law regarding the intellectual
and industrial property right of Lantek. The reproduction, distribution, public communication and
transformation of the information in this manual, totally or partially, without the express authorization of
Lantek is not permitted.
Disclaimer
The information in this manual is subject to change. While every effort has been taken to provide accurate
information, Lantek is not responsible for errors or damages resulting from the use of information
contained in this document. All product names used in this manual are the property of Lantek
Investigación y Desarrollo.
Lantek
Parque Tecnológico de Álava
Ferdinand Zepelin 2, Ed. Lantek
01510 Miñano - Álava (ESPAÑA)
www.lanteksms.com • info@lanteksms.com
2
Table of Contents
Copyright ....................................................................................................................................................... 2
Disclaimer...................................................................................................................................................... 2
Table of Contents .......................................................................................................................................... 3
Table of Figures .......................................................................................................................................... 15
INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................................................... 25
LANTEK EXPERT ................................................................................................................................... 25
What is Expert? ........................................................................................................................................... 25
Documentation Conventions ....................................................................................................................... 26
1 SYSTEM UNITS .................................................................................................................................. 27
1.1 Metric System.............................................................................................................................. 27

1.2 Anglo-Saxon System ................................................................................................................... 28
2 CONFIGURE CUTTING MACHINES & TOOLS ................................................................................. 29
2.1 Multitorch Data ............................................................................................................................ 29

2.2 Grid .............................................................................................................................................. 32
2.3 Sheet Clamps .............................................................................................................................. 35
2.3.1 Position ................................................................................................................................ 35
2.3.2 Clamp Zone ......................................................................................................................... 38
2.3.3 Auxiliar ................................................................................................................................. 39
2.4 Fixtures ........................................................................................................................................ 40

2.5 Extractions................................................................................................................................... 42
2.6 Lift/Grip ........................................................................................................................................ 42
2.7 Upload/Download Sheets ............................................................................................................ 46
2.8 Work Zone ................................................................................................................................... 46
2.9 From Point ................................................................................................................................... 47
2.10 Reposition ................................................................................................................................... 47
2.10.1 General ................................................................................................................................ 47
2.10.2 Advanced ............................................................................................................................ 48
2.10.3 Device ................................................................................................................................. 49

3
2.10.4 Strategy ............................................................................................................................... 49
2.11 Sheet Parameters ....................................................................................................................... 50

2.12 Sheet Turn Over .......................................................................................................................... 51
2.13 Head Chamfer Data .................................................................................................................... 52
2.13.1 Head Data ........................................................................................................................... 52
2.13.2 Chamfers Management ....................................................................................................... 53
2.14 General ........................................................................................................................................ 55
2.14.1 Geometry............................................................................................................................. 55
2.14.2 Part Changes ...................................................................................................................... 55
2.14.3 Auxiliar ................................................................................................................................. 56
2.14.4 Cut ....................................................................................................................................... 57
2.15 Startup ......................................................................................................................................... 57
2.15.1 General ................................................................................................................................ 57
2.15.2 Pre-initialization ................................................................................................................... 58
2.15.3 Feed Rates .......................................................................................................................... 58
2.16 CNC ............................................................................................................................................. 59

2.17 Sheet Remnants ......................................................................................................................... 59
2.18 Save Options ............................................................................................................................... 61
2.18.1 General ................................................................................................................................ 61
2.18.2 Subprograms ....................................................................................................................... 62
2.18.3 Part Saving .......................................................................................................................... 63
2.18.4 Execution Nesting Module .................................................................................................. 63
2.19 Material/Thickness Dependent Data ........................................................................................... 64
2.19.1 Cutting Parameters ............................................................................................................. 64
2.19.2 Sheets Parameters.............................................................................................................. 65
2.19.3 Automatic Technology ......................................................................................................... 66
2.19.4 Head Raising Test ............................................................................................................... 67
2.19.5 Machining Order .................................................................................................................. 67
2.19.6 Lead-in/Lead-out Values ..................................................................................................... 68
2.19.7 Automatic Lead-in/Lead-out Values .................................................................................... 69
4
2.19.8 Micro-joint Values ................................................................................................................ 71
2.19.9 Automatic Micro-joint Values ............................................................................................... 71
2.19.10 Loop Values .................................................................................................................... 72
2.19.11 Chamfer Values............................................................................................................... 73
2.19.12 Bridge Values .................................................................................................................. 74
2.19.13 Chamfers Management ................................................................................................... 74
2.19.14 Sheet Remnants.............................................................................................................. 74
2.20 Cutting Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 75
2.20.1 General ................................................................................................................................ 75
2.20.2 Auxiliar Parameters ............................................................................................................. 76
2.20.3 Contour Attributes ............................................................................................................... 77
2.20.4 Compensations by Quality .................................................................................................. 77
2.21 Common Cutting Parameters...................................................................................................... 78

2.22 Technology .................................................................................................................................. 80
2.22.1 Lead-in/Lead-out Values ..................................................................................................... 80
2.22.2 Automatic Lead-in/Lead-out Values .................................................................................... 81
2.22.3 Micro-joint Values ................................................................................................................ 85
2.22.4 Automatic Micro-joint Values ............................................................................................... 85
2.22.5 Loop Values ........................................................................................................................ 86
2.22.6 Chamfer Values................................................................................................................... 87
2.22.7 Bridge Values ...................................................................................................................... 87
2.22.8 Tables of Technology .......................................................................................................... 88
2.23 Automatic Nesting ....................................................................................................................... 90
2.23.1 General ................................................................................................................................ 90
2.23.2 Advanced ............................................................................................................................ 98
2.23.3 Unitary ............................................................................................................................... 103
2.24 Automatic Machining ................................................................................................................. 103
2.24.1 Cut ..................................................................................................................................... 103
2.24.2 Machining by Zones .......................................................................................................... 123
2.24.3 Component Removal ........................................................................................................ 126

5
2.25 Time Calculation ....................................................................................................................... 127
2.25.1 Cutting Parameters ........................................................................................................... 127
2.25.2 Reposition / Extractions .................................................................................................... 129
2.25.3 Rapid Accelerations .......................................................................................................... 129
2.25.4 Linear Cut Accelerations ................................................................................................... 129
2.25.5 Circular Cut Accelerations ................................................................................................. 130
2.25.6 No Cut ............................................................................................................................... 130
2.25.7 Upload/Download Sheets .................................................................................................. 130
2.26 Cost Calculation ........................................................................................................................ 131

2.27 Ink-Jet........................................................................................................................................ 132
2.28 Postprocessor ........................................................................................................................... 133
2.28.1 General .............................................................................................................................. 133
2.28.2 Block Numbering ............................................................................................................... 134
2.28.3 Free Tape .......................................................................................................................... 134
2.28.4 Specifics of Cut ................................................................................................................. 135
2.28.5 Reserved ........................................................................................................................... 136
3 JOBS ................................................................................................................................................. 137
3.1 Close ......................................................................................................................................... 137

3.2 Recents ..................................................................................................................................... 137
3.3 Jobs ........................................................................................................................................... 137
3.4 Kits ............................................................................................................................................ 140
3.5 Information ................................................................................................................................ 142
3.6 Help ........................................................................................................................................... 144
3.7 Print ........................................................................................................................................... 146
3.8 Configuration Options ............................................................................................................... 146
3.8.1 General .............................................................................................................................. 148
3.8.2 Draw and Nest ................................................................................................................... 149
3.8.3 Costs ................................................................................................................................. 171
3.8.4 Identifiers ........................................................................................................................... 173
3.8.5 Language .......................................................................................................................... 173
3.8.6 Interface ............................................................................................................................ 174
6
3.8.7 Print ................................................................................................................................... 179
3.8.8 Backup .............................................................................................................................. 187
3.8.9 Currencies and Tariffs ....................................................................................................... 187
3.9 Exit ............................................................................................................................................ 188
4 DRAWING MODULE ........................................................................................................................ 189
4.1 Drawing Window ....................................................................................................................... 189

4.2 Status Bar.................................................................................................................................. 189
4.3 Customize Quick Access Toolbar ............................................................................................. 190
4.4 Contextual Menu ....................................................................................................................... 191
4.5 Parts .......................................................................................................................................... 193
4.5.1 New ................................................................................................................................... 193
4.5.2 Open .................................................................................................................................. 193
4.5.3 Open Parts ........................................................................................................................ 194
4.5.4 Nesting and Machining ...................................................................................................... 194
4.5.5 Select Machine .................................................................................................................. 195
4.5.6 Save .................................................................................................................................. 195
4.5.7 Import ................................................................................................................................ 199
4.5.8 Machining Macros ............................................................................................................. 203
4.5.9 Lead-in/Lead-outs ............................................................................................................. 204
4.5.10 Remnants .......................................................................................................................... 204
4.5.11 Duct Holes ......................................................................................................................... 206
4.5.12 Parametrics ....................................................................................................................... 207
4.5.13 Mosaics ............................................................................................................................. 209
4.5.14 Help ................................................................................................................................... 212
4.5.15 Print ................................................................................................................................... 212
4.5.16 Configuration Options ....................................................................................................... 212
4.5.17 Exit .................................................................................................................................... 238
4.6 Home ......................................................................................................................................... 238
4.6.1 Draw .................................................................................................................................. 238
4.6.2 Modify ................................................................................................................................ 241
7
4.6.3 One Touch Figures............................................................................................................ 248
4.6.4 Transform .......................................................................................................................... 256
4.6.5 Review ............................................................................................................................... 272
4.6.6 Orthogonal ......................................................................................................................... 278
4.6.7 Macros ............................................................................................................................... 279
4.7 Technology ................................................................................................................................ 279
4.7.1 Lead-in/Lead-outs ............................................................................................................. 279
4.7.2 Micro-Joints ....................................................................................................................... 284
4.7.3 Loops ................................................................................................................................. 285
4.7.4 Chamfers ........................................................................................................................... 288
4.7.5 Cut Technology ................................................................................................................. 290
4.7.6 Text ................................................................................................................................... 295
4.8 Machining .................................................................................................................................. 298
4.8.1 Machining .......................................................................................................................... 298
4.8.2 Contours ............................................................................................................................ 300
4.8.3 Cycles ................................................................................................................................ 308
4.8.4 Modify ................................................................................................................................ 322
4.8.5 Options .............................................................................................................................. 333
4.8.7 View ................................................................................................................................... 347
4.9 View ........................................................................................................................................... 348
4.9.1 Display ............................................................................................................................... 348
4.9.2 Zoom ................................................................................................................................. 354
4.10 Simulation.................................................................................................................................. 357
4.10.1 Simulate ............................................................................................................................ 357
4.11 Notes ......................................................................................................................................... 360
4.11.1 Dimension Notes ............................................................................................................... 360
4.11.2 Text ................................................................................................................................... 367
4.11.3 View ................................................................................................................................... 368
8
4.12 Utilities ....................................................................................................................................... 369
4.12.1 Cut of Double or Triple Chamfers ..................................................................................... 369
4.12.2 Partial Cut or a Contour .................................................................................................... 369
4.12.3 Open Drafting .................................................................................................................... 371
4.12.4 Compare Geometries ........................................................................................................ 371
4.12.5 Bitmap ............................................................................................................................... 371
4.13 Dragging Options ...................................................................................................................... 372

4.14 Selection Options ...................................................................................................................... 373
5 NESTING AND MACHINING MODULE ........................................................................................... 374
5.1 Title bar ..................................................................................................................................... 374

5.2 Drawing Window ....................................................................................................................... 374
5.3 Status Bar.................................................................................................................................. 375
5.4 Customize Quick Access Toolbar ............................................................................................. 375
5.5 Contextual Menu ....................................................................................................................... 376
5.5.1 New ................................................................................................................................... 376
5.5.2 Open .................................................................................................................................. 376
5.5.3 Open Parts ........................................................................................................................ 376
5.5.4 Block .................................................................................................................................. 377
5.5.5 Delete ................................................................................................................................ 377
5.5.6 Import ................................................................................................................................ 377
5.5.7 Quantity ............................................................................................................................. 379
5.5.8 Priority ............................................................................................................................... 380
5.5.9 Information ........................................................................................................................ 380
5.5.10 Part Rotations .................................................................................................................... 381
5.5.11 Properties .......................................................................................................................... 381
5.5.12 Group ................................................................................................................................ 383
5.5.13 Order ................................................................................................................................. 383
5.5.14 View ................................................................................................................................... 384
5.5.15 Size ................................................................................................................................... 384
5.5.16 Cancel ............................................................................................................................... 384
9
5.6 Subjobs ..................................................................................................................................... 384
5.6.1 Open .................................................................................................................................. 384
5.6.2 Previous ............................................................................................................................ 385
5.6.3 Next ................................................................................................................................... 385
5.6.4 Save .................................................................................................................................. 385
5.6.5 Save All ............................................................................................................................. 385
5.6.6 Save As ............................................................................................................................. 386
5.6.7 Drawing ............................................................................................................................. 386
5.6.8 Import Stored Nesting ....................................................................................................... 386
5.6.9 Store Nesting..................................................................................................................... 390
5.6.10 Export Nestings to File ...................................................................................................... 390
5.6.11 Import ................................................................................................................................ 391
5.6.12 Help ................................................................................................................................... 393
5.6.13 Print ................................................................................................................................... 393
5.6.14 Configuration Options ....................................................................................................... 395
5.6.15 Exit .................................................................................................................................... 418
5.7 Home ......................................................................................................................................... 418
5.7.1 Sheets ............................................................................................................................... 418
5.7.2 Nesting .............................................................................................................................. 424
5.7.3 Transform .......................................................................................................................... 428
5.7.4 Remnants .......................................................................................................................... 433
5.7.5 Review ............................................................................................................................... 439
5.7.6 Orthogonal ......................................................................................................................... 446
5.7.7 Macros ............................................................................................................................... 446
5.8 Technology ................................................................................................................................ 447
5.8.1 Lead-in/Lead-outs ............................................................................................................. 447
5.8.2 Micro-Joints ....................................................................................................................... 455
5.8.3 Loops ................................................................................................................................. 459
5.8.4 Bridges .............................................................................................................................. 461
10
5.8.5 Cut Technology ................................................................................................................. 464
5.9 Machining .................................................................................................................................. 467
5.9.1 Machining .......................................................................................................................... 467
5.9.2 Contours ............................................................................................................................ 472
5.9.3 Cycles ................................................................................................................................ 487
5.9.4 Modify ................................................................................................................................ 494
5.9.5 Options .............................................................................................................................. 505
5.9.7 View ................................................................................................................................... 506
5.9.8 Sheet ................................................................................................................................. 509
5.10 View ........................................................................................................................................... 511
5.10.1 Display ............................................................................................................................... 511
5.10.2 Zoom ................................................................................................................................. 520
5.11 Simulation.................................................................................................................................. 522
5.11.1 Program ............................................................................................................................. 522
5.11.2 ISN Position....................................................................................................................... 522
5.11.3 Mouse Positioning ............................................................................................................. 522
5.11.4 Begin ................................................................................................................................. 523
5.11.5 Previous ............................................................................................................................ 523
5.11.6 Next ................................................................................................................................... 523
5.11.7 End .................................................................................................................................... 523
5.11.8 Run .................................................................................................................................... 523
5.11.9 Previous Tool .................................................................................................................... 523
5.11.10 Next Tool ....................................................................................................................... 523
5.11.11 Previous Reposition ...................................................................................................... 523
5.11.12 Next Reposition ............................................................................................................. 524
5.11.13 Previous Multitorch ........................................................................................................ 524
5.11.14 Next Multitorch .............................................................................................................. 524
5.11.15 Previous Chute .............................................................................................................. 524
11
5.11.16 Next Chute .................................................................................................................... 524
5.11.17 Simulate CNC ................................................................................................................ 524
5.12 Applications ............................................................................................................................... 525
5.12.1 Assign Palletization Suction Cups ..................................................................................... 525
5.12.2 Assign Download Point to Pallet ....................................................................................... 525
5.12.3 Machining of a Part with 2 Torches ................................................................................... 525
5.12.4 Machining of the Out of a Part with Multitorch .................................................................. 526
5.12.5 Common Cut with Multitorch ............................................................................................. 526
5.12.6 Linear Common Cut with Multitorch .................................................................................. 527
5.12.7 Parts Evacuation by Lift after Machining ........................................................................... 527
5.12.8 Evacuation of All the Parts by Lift after Machining ............................................................ 530
5.12.9 Remnant to Part ................................................................................................................ 531
5.13 Utilities ....................................................................................................................................... 531
5.13.1 Open Drafting .................................................................................................................... 531
5.14 Dragging Options ...................................................................................................................... 531

5.15 Selection Options ...................................................................................................................... 531
6 HOME ................................................................................................................................................ 532
6.1 Modules ..................................................................................................................................... 532

6.2 Import ........................................................................................................................................ 532
6.2.1 Parts from Database ......................................................................................................... 532
6.2.2 Duct Figures from Database ............................................................................................. 535
6.2.3 Kits from Database ............................................................................................................ 537
6.2.4 Rectangles ........................................................................................................................ 538
6.2.5 Import DXF Files ............................................................................................................... 539
6.2.6 Import DWG Files .............................................................................................................. 541
6.2.7 Import Parametric Parts .................................................................................................... 543
6.2.8 Import MEC Files............................................................................................................... 545
6.2.9 Importers Configuration ..................................................................................................... 545
6.3 Edit ............................................................................................................................................ 551
6.3.1 Search ............................................................................................................................... 551
12
6.3.2 Delete ................................................................................................................................ 551
6.3.3 Select All ........................................................................................................................... 552
6.3.4 Invert Selection.................................................................................................................. 552
6.4 Programs ................................................................................................................................... 552

6.5 Quotation ................................................................................................................................... 552
6.5.1 Accept Quotation ............................................................................................................... 552
6.6 Contextual Menu ....................................................................................................................... 552
6.6.1 Open .................................................................................................................................. 552
6.6.2 Export ................................................................................................................................ 553
6.6.3 Cut ..................................................................................................................................... 553
6.6.4 Copy .................................................................................................................................. 553
6.6.5 Delete ................................................................................................................................ 553
6.6.6 Change name .................................................................................................................... 553
6.6.7 Refresh .............................................................................................................................. 553
6.6.8 Properties .......................................................................................................................... 553
7 MANAGE ........................................................................................................................................... 554
7.1 Components .............................................................................................................................. 554
7.1.1 Machines ........................................................................................................................... 554
7.1.2 Parts .................................................................................................................................. 554
7.1.3 Figures .............................................................................................................................. 556
7.1.4 Sheets ............................................................................................................................... 559
7.1.5 Materials ............................................................................................................................ 560
7.1.6 Consumables .................................................................................................................... 561
7.2 Drills .......................................................................................................................................... 564
7.2.1 Drills .................................................................................................................................. 564
7.2.2 Assign Drills ....................................................................................................................... 571
7.2.3 Turrets ............................................................................................................................... 572
8 UTILITIES.......................................................................................................................................... 577
8.1 Export ........................................................................................................................................ 577

8.2 Nestings .................................................................................................................................... 578
13
8.2.1 Import ................................................................................................................................ 578
8.2.2 Export ................................................................................................................................ 579
8.3 Databases ................................................................................................................................. 581
8.3.1 New ................................................................................................................................... 581
8.3.2 Connect ............................................................................................................................. 582
8.3.3 Delete ................................................................................................................................ 582
8.3.4 Information ........................................................................................................................ 583
9 VIEW ................................................................................................................................................. 584
9.1 Job Explorer .............................................................................................................................. 584

9.2 Kit Explorer ................................................................................................................................ 584
9.3 Product List ............................................................................................................................... 585
9.4 Product View ............................................................................................................................. 585
9.5 Sheet List .................................................................................................................................. 585
9.6 Sheet View ................................................................................................................................ 585
10 ADD-INS........................................................................................................................................ 586
10.1 Processes.................................................................................................................................. 586

10.2 Parametric Editor ...................................................................................................................... 588
11 CUTTING PROCESS .................................................................................................................... 589
Conclusion................................................................................................................................................. 604
14
Table of Figures
Figure 1: Torches table .............................................................................................................................. 29

Figure 2: Torches positions dialog box ...................................................................................................... 31
Figure 3: Configure: Machine window ........................................................................................................ 34
Figure 4: Problematic holes example ......................................................................................................... 35
Figure 5: Sheet clamps position distance example .................................................................................... 37
Figure 6: Clamp zone simulation ................................................................................................................ 39
Figure 7: Fixtures dialog box ...................................................................................................................... 41
Figure 8: Lift dialog box .............................................................................................................................. 44
Figure 9: Offset between the parts and the remnant line example ............................................................ 60
Figure 10: Minimum width of hollows example .......................................................................................... 60
Figure 11: Automatic lead-in/lead-out zones.............................................................................................. 70
Figure 12: Lead-in/lead-out types .............................................................................................................. 70
Figure 13: Micro-joint types ........................................................................................................................ 72
Figure 14: Round angle contours ............................................................................................................... 73
Figure 15: Compensation mode ................................................................................................................. 75
Figure 16: Common cut execution mode ................................................................................................... 79
Figure 17: Only place on nesting direction example .................................................................................. 80
Figure 18: Lead-in/lead-out distances ........................................................................................................ 81
Figure 19: Automatic Lead-in/Lead-out zones and types .......................................................................... 82
Figure 20: Lead-in/Lead-out values dialog box .......................................................................................... 83
Figure 21: Micro-joint types ........................................................................................................................ 85
Figure 22: Tables of technology ................................................................................................................. 89
Figure 23: Level of optimization window .................................................................................................... 91
Figure 24: Precision bar ............................................................................................................................. 95
Figure 25: Modules window........................................................................................................................ 98
Figure 26: Rectangular nesting setup window ......................................................................................... 100
Figure 27: Nesting for kits window ........................................................................................................... 102
Figure 28: Order mode of the holes dialog box ........................................................................................ 104
Figure 29: Configure: Execution of fixed cycles dialog box ..................................................................... 105
Figure 30: Fast cut mode in holes (flying cut) dialog box ......................................................................... 107
Figure 31: Cut the remnant line dialog box .............................................................................................. 108
Figure 32: Test for parts inside others example ....................................................................................... 109
Figure 33: Cut the sheet framework dialog box ....................................................................................... 110
Figure 34: Destroy sheet holes dialog box ............................................................................................... 111
Figure 35: Rapid tracts example .............................................................................................................. 113
Figure 36: Machining order dialog box (None order mode of the holes) ................................................. 114
Figure 37: Cut small holes first dialog box ............................................................................................... 115
Figure 38: Machining order dialog box (By proximity order mode of the holes) ...................................... 115
Figure 39: Order mode of the holes (By direction) dialog box ................................................................. 116
15
Figure 40: Put in order by qualities dialog box ......................................................................................... 117
Figure 41: Zone position dialog box ......................................................................................................... 118
Figure 42: Milling cycles execution order options .................................................................................... 119
Figure 43: Order mode of the holes option .............................................................................................. 120
Figure 44: Offset example ........................................................................................................................ 122
Figure 45: Nesting by zones dialog box ................................................................................................... 123
Figure 46: Cut by zones dialog box .......................................................................................................... 125
Figure 47: Micro-joints dialog box ............................................................................................................ 126
Figure 48: Times of technology changes table ........................................................................................ 128
Figure 49: Times of quality changes table ............................................................................................... 129
Figure 50: Job dialog box ......................................................................................................................... 138
Figure 51: Jobs window............................................................................................................................ 139
Figure 52: Kit dialog box........................................................................................................................... 141
Figure 53: Kits dialog box ......................................................................................................................... 142
Figure 54: Database dialog box ............................................................................................................... 143
Figure 55: Subjob selection dialog box .................................................................................................... 144
Figure 56: Configuration options backstage page ................................................................................... 147
Figure 57: Configure: System window (Main module) ............................................................................. 148
Figure 58: Put together equal parts in the nesting and machining module dialog box ............................ 150
Figure 59: Machine files in network dialog box ........................................................................................ 151
Figure 60: Automatic sheet references format dialog box ....................................................................... 153
Figure 61: Contour Attributes dialog box .................................................................................................. 156
Figure 62: Auxiliary geometry window ..................................................................................................... 156
Figure 63: Prenesting dialog box ............................................................................................................. 161
Figure 64: Colors examples ..................................................................................................................... 163
Figure 65: Show remnant references on screen example ....................................................................... 163
Figure 66: Show part texts on the sheet example .................................................................................... 164
Figure 67: Show non cut contours on the sheet example ........................................................................ 164
Figure 68: Selection by window/capture/trap example ............................................................................ 165
Figure 69: Simulate selection when mouse is moved example ............................................................... 165
Figure 70: Show micro-joints example ..................................................................................................... 165
Figure 71: Display all clamp and work zones example ............................................................................ 165
Figure 72: Simulate the full remnants example ........................................................................................ 166
Figure 73: Display dimensions on the sheet example ............................................................................. 166
Figure 74: Postprocessor words dialog box ............................................................................................. 167
Figure 75: Move the “offset” of the part on the sheet example ................................................................ 168
Figure 76: Selection with multitorch example........................................................................................... 168
Figure 77: Selection by window/capture/trap without multitorch example ............................................... 168
Figure 78: Show part references on the screen example ........................................................................ 169
Figure 79: Show the direction of movements example ............................................................................ 169
Figure 80: Chamfer information setup dialog box .................................................................................... 170
Figure 81: Simulation dialog box .............................................................................................................. 171
Figure 82: Configure: Costs dialog box .................................................................................................... 172
Figure 83: Configurable identifiers ........................................................................................................... 173
Figure 84: Languages dialog box ............................................................................................................. 174
Figure 85: Customize Quick Access ........................................................................................................ 175
Figure 86: Customize Shortcut keys ........................................................................................................ 176
Figure 87: Customize Details ................................................................................................................... 177
16
Figure 88: Customize Ribbon ................................................................................................................... 178
Figure 89: Lists window ............................................................................................................................ 180
Figure 90: Backup dialog box ................................................................................................................... 187
Figure 91: Access to points menu ............................................................................................................ 192
Figure 92: Part selection dialog box ......................................................................................................... 193
Figure 93: Open parts dialog box ............................................................................................................. 194
Figure 94: Save by parts dialog box ......................................................................................................... 196
Figure 95: Text definition to access to part data ...................................................................................... 197
Figure 96: Part saving window ................................................................................................................. 198
Figure 97: Machine select dialog box ....................................................................................................... 199
Figure 98: Parametric parts dialog box .................................................................................................... 201
Figure 99: Select a remnant dialog box ................................................................................................... 205
Figure 100: Duct holes saving dialog box ................................................................................................ 207
Figure 101: Parametrics saving dialog box .............................................................................................. 208
Figure 102: Create mosaic dialog box ..................................................................................................... 209
Figure 103: Part saving dialog box ........................................................................................................... 210
Figure 104: Modify mosaics properties dialog box ................................................................................... 211
Figure 105: Configuration options (Drawing module) .............................................................................. 212
Figure 106: Contour Attributes dialog box ................................................................................................ 216
Figure 107: Configure: Draw and Nest (Auxiliar) window ........................................................................ 217
Figure 108: Prenesting dialog box ........................................................................................................... 221
Figure 109: Configure: Draw and Nest (Do All) window .......................................................................... 223
Figure 110: Configure: Draw and Nest (Print) window ............................................................................. 225
Figure 111: Colors examples ................................................................................................................... 226
Figure 112: Configure: Draw and Nest (Colors) window .......................................................................... 227
Figure 113: Postprocessor words dialog box ........................................................................................... 229
Figure 114: Chamfer information setup dialog box .................................................................................. 231
Figure 115: Simulation dialog box ............................................................................................................ 231
Figure 116: Configure: Draw and Nest (Display) window ........................................................................ 232
Figure 117: Customize Quick Access ...................................................................................................... 233
Figure 118: Customize Hide options ........................................................................................................ 235
Figure 119: Customize Shortcut keys ...................................................................................................... 236
Figure 120: Customize Ribbon ................................................................................................................. 237
Figure 121: Access to points options ....................................................................................................... 239
Figure 122: Selection toolbar ................................................................................................................... 240
Figure 123: Break elements options ........................................................................................................ 241
Figure 124: Chamfer values dialog box ................................................................................................... 243
Figure 125: Compensation mode ............................................................................................................. 244
Figure 126: Compensation value ............................................................................................................. 244
Figure 127: Fitting dialog box ................................................................................................................... 246
Figure 128: Shorten-lengthen dialog box ................................................................................................. 247
Figure 129: One-touch figures ................................................................................................................. 248
Figure 130: One-touch figure 1 ................................................................................................................ 248
17
Figure 139: One-touch figure 10 .............................................................................................................. 254
Figure 142: Copy types ............................................................................................................................ 257
Figure 143: Copy values 1 ....................................................................................................................... 257
Figure 146: Copies dialog box.................................................................................................................. 259
Figure 147: Copies dialog box 2 .............................................................................................................. 260
Figure 148: Rotation options .................................................................................................................... 262
Figure 149: Rotation values ..................................................................................................................... 262
Figure 150: Minimum rectangle ................................................................................................................ 263
Figure 151: Scale values .......................................................................................................................... 264
Figure 152: Place near options ................................................................................................................ 264
Figure 153: Break parts dialog box .......................................................................................................... 268
Figure 154: Contour ordering dialog box .................................................................................................. 270
Figure 155: Transform One-touch figures dialog box .............................................................................. 271
Figure 156: Verify part values .................................................................................................................. 272
Figure 157: Verify part dialog box ............................................................................................................ 273
Figure 158: Part data window .................................................................................................................. 274
Figure 159: View geometry dialog box ..................................................................................................... 276
Figure 160: Deletion warning message .................................................................................................... 277
Figure 161: Distance and angle dialog box .............................................................................................. 277
Figure 162: Angle between three points dialog box ................................................................................. 278
Figure 163: Automatic Lead-in/Lead-out values window ......................................................................... 281
Figure 164: Add element to Lead-in/Lead-out dialog box ........................................................................ 283
Figure 165: Micro-joints values dialog box ............................................................................................... 285
Figure 166: Loop values dialog box ......................................................................................................... 287
Figure 167: Chamfer values dialog box ................................................................................................... 289
Figure 168: Chamfer values dialog box 2 ................................................................................................ 290
Figure 169: Marking technology ............................................................................................................... 291
Figure 170: Dynamic technology .............................................................................................................. 293
Figure 171: Cutting Qualities .................................................................................................................... 294
Figure 172: Micro-joint values .................................................................................................................. 295
Figure 173: Text definition dialog box ...................................................................................................... 296
Figure 174: Text definition dialog box 2 ................................................................................................... 297
Figure 175: Vectorize text dialog box ....................................................................................................... 297
Figure 176: Delete instructions options .................................................................................................... 298
Figure 177: Contours options ................................................................................................................... 300
Figure 178: Cutting qualities..................................................................................................................... 302
Figure 179: Automatic cycles dialog box .................................................................................................. 303
Figure 180: Fast cut mode in holes (flying cut) window ........................................................................... 304
Figure 181: Flying cut in holes example ................................................................................................... 305
Figure 182: Manual hole destruction example 1 ...................................................................................... 306
Figure 183: Manual hole destruction example 2 ...................................................................................... 307
18
Figure 184: Offset for manual destruction of holes .................................................................................. 308
Figure 185: Linear cycle options .............................................................................................................. 309
Figure 186: Beginning point and distance ................................................................................................ 309
Figure 187: Ends and number of points ................................................................................................... 310
Figure 188: Circular cycle options ............................................................................................................ 310
Figure 189: Centre and angles ................................................................................................................. 311
Figure 190: Centre and beginning point ................................................................................................... 312
Figure 191: From point dialog box ........................................................................................................... 313
Figure 192: Grid cycle options.................................................................................................................. 313
Figure 193: Corner and number ............................................................................................................... 314
Figure 194: Milling nibblings example ...................................................................................................... 315
Figure 195: Contour option....................................................................................................................... 315
Figure 196: Milling cycle window .............................................................................................................. 316
Figure 197: Milling nibblings example 2 ................................................................................................... 317
Figure 198: Milling nibblings example 3 ................................................................................................... 318
Figure 199: Machining explorer (Milling nibbling)..................................................................................... 319
Figure 200: Irregular cycle options ........................................................................................................... 319
Figure 201: Milling pockets example ........................................................................................................ 320
Figure 202: Milling cycle window .............................................................................................................. 321
Figure 203: Machining explorer (Milling pockets)..................................................................................... 322
Figure 204: Modify options ....................................................................................................................... 322
Figure 205: Micro-joints dialog box .......................................................................................................... 323
Figure 206: Automatic Micro-joints at End of Contour dialog box ............................................................ 324
Figure 207: Order cut sequence dialog box ............................................................................................. 325
Figure 208: Regenerate dialog box .......................................................................................................... 326
Figure 209: Avoid holes already cut dialog box ....................................................................................... 328
Figure 210: Continuous cut dialog box ..................................................................................................... 330
Figure 211: Copy machining options ........................................................................................................ 331
Figure 212: Modify compensation dialog box........................................................................................... 332
Figure 213: Feed rates dialog box ........................................................................................................... 334
Figure 214: Postprocessor words dialog box ........................................................................................... 335
Figure 215: Optional block skip options ................................................................................................... 336
Figure 216: Comment text ........................................................................................................................ 337
Figure 217: Insertion block CN ................................................................................................................. 337
Figure 218: Management of clamps ......................................................................................................... 338
Figure 219: Head up/down ....................................................................................................................... 338
Figure 220: Open/close trap ..................................................................................................................... 339
Figure 221: Refrigeration .......................................................................................................................... 339
Figure 222: Contour attributes dialog box ................................................................................................ 340
Figure 223: Contour attributes; Make on .................................................................................................. 341
Figure 224: CN Compensation dialog box ............................................................................................... 342
Figure 225: System compensation dialog box ......................................................................................... 342
Figure 226: Extractor dialog box .............................................................................................................. 343
Figure 227: TRAP dialog box ................................................................................................................... 344
Figure 228: Extractor dialog box .............................................................................................................. 345
Figure 229: Boxes dialog box ................................................................................................................... 346
Figure 230: Current status dialog box ...................................................................................................... 347
Figure 231: Part machining list window.................................................................................................... 349
19
Figure 232: Simulation window ................................................................................................................ 349
Figure 233: Sheet simulation example ..................................................................................................... 352
Figure 234: Color display dialog box ........................................................................................................ 353
Figure 235: Redraw example ................................................................................................................... 354
Figure 236: Zoom scale values ................................................................................................................ 356
Figure 237: Instruction list dialog box ....................................................................................................... 357
Figure 238: ISN Position value ................................................................................................................. 358
Figure 240: Dimension definition dialog box ............................................................................................ 362
Figure 241: Dimension definition dialog box (Change data) .................................................................... 364
Figure 242: Parametrizations settings dialog box .................................................................................... 366
Figure 243: Text definition dialog box ...................................................................................................... 367
Figure 244: Partial cut of a contour dialog box......................................................................................... 370
Figure 245: Dragging options ................................................................................................................... 372
Figure 246: Selection options ................................................................................................................... 373
Figure 247: Open parts options ............................................................................................................... 377
Figure 248: Warning message (Delete) ................................................................................................... 377
Figure 249: Manufacturing products window ........................................................................................... 378
Figure 250: Import parts window .............................................................................................................. 378
Figure 251: Open window ........................................................................................................................ 379
Figure 252: Number of parts window ....................................................................................................... 379
Figure 253: Priority window ...................................................................................................................... 380
Figure 254: Part parameters window ....................................................................................................... 380
Figure 255: Part rotation window ............................................................................................................. 381
Figure 256: Boxes dialog box ................................................................................................................... 382
Figure 257: Bitmaps size dialog box ........................................................................................................ 384
Figure 258: Import stored nesting dialog box ........................................................................................... 387
Figure 259: Import stored nesting [Criteria] .............................................................................................. 389
Figure 260: Reference.............................................................................................................................. 390
Figure 261: Export nestings dialog box .................................................................................................... 390
Figure 262: Manufacturing products dialog box ....................................................................................... 391
Figure 263: Import parts dialog box ......................................................................................................... 392
Figure 264: Print ....................................................................................................................................... 394
Figure 265: Print preview ......................................................................................................................... 395
Figure 266: Configuration options (Nesting and Machining) .................................................................... 396
Figure 267: Lead-in/Lead-out values dialog box ...................................................................................... 397
Figure 268: Level of optimization window ................................................................................................ 400
Figure 269: Precision bar ......................................................................................................................... 404
Figure 270: Modules window.................................................................................................................... 408
Figure 271: Rectangular nesting setup window ....................................................................................... 409
Figure 272: Nesting for kits window ......................................................................................................... 411
Figure 273: Customize Quick access ....................................................................................................... 414
Figure 274: Customize Hide options ........................................................................................................ 415
Figure 275: Customize Shortcut keys ...................................................................................................... 416
Figure 276: Customize Ribbon ................................................................................................................. 417
Figure 277: Sheet selection dialog box .................................................................................................... 419
Figure 278: Create and modify sheets dialog box.................................................................................... 420
Figure 279: Change data options ............................................................................................................. 422
20
Figure 280: Change data dialog box ........................................................................................................ 422
Figure 281: Number of sheets dialog box ................................................................................................ 423
Figure 283: One window .......................................................................................................................... 426
Figure 284: Collisions example ................................................................................................................ 428
Figure 285: Copies dialog box.................................................................................................................. 429
Figure 286: Place near options ................................................................................................................ 431
Figure 287: Sheet Remnants dialog box .................................................................................................. 434
Figure 288: Cutting line types................................................................................................................... 434
Figure 289: Remnant line drawing options ............................................................................................... 436
Figure 290: Sheet remnants dialog box ................................................................................................... 437
Figure 291: Rotate remnants dialog box .................................................................................................. 438
Figure 292: Machine Time and Cost ........................................................................................................ 439
Figure 293: Export Data dialog box .......................................................................................................... 440
Figure 294: Excel document example ...................................................................................................... 441
Figure 295: Excel document example 2 ................................................................................................... 441
Figure 296: Points options........................................................................................................................ 443
Figure 297: View geometry dialog box ..................................................................................................... 444
Figure 298: Distance and angle dialog box .............................................................................................. 445
Figure 299: Angle between three points dialog box ................................................................................. 446
Figure 300: Automatic Lead-in/lead-outs example .................................................................................. 447
Figure 301: Semi-automatic Lead-in/Lead-out ......................................................................................... 448
Figure 302: Automatic Lead-in/Lead-out values dialog box ..................................................................... 449
Figure 303: Contour types ........................................................................................................................ 450
Figure 305: Automatic Lead-in/Lead-out dialog box ................................................................................ 452
Figure 307: Add element to Lead-in/Lead-out dialog box ........................................................................ 455
Figure 308: Automatic micro-joint values dialog box ............................................................................... 457
Figure 309: Micro-joints values dialog box ............................................................................................... 459
Figure 310: Semi-automatic loops ........................................................................................................... 460
Figure 311: Loop values dialog box ......................................................................................................... 461
Figure 312: Bridge values dialog box ....................................................................................................... 463
Figure 313: Bridges on corners example ................................................................................................. 464
Figure 314: Bridge types .......................................................................................................................... 464
Figure 315: Type of cut ............................................................................................................................ 465
Figure 316: Marking technology ............................................................................................................... 465
Figure 317: Marking technology, Make on ............................................................................................... 466
Figure 318: Cutting qualities..................................................................................................................... 466
Figure 319: Existent machining management .......................................................................................... 468
Figure 320: Copy machining dialog box ................................................................................................... 469
Figure 321: Copy machining of a set of parts example ............................................................................ 470
Figure 322: Regenerate warning message .............................................................................................. 470
Figure 323: Manual contour by means of two points dialog box .............................................................. 473
Figure 324: Continuous cut dialog box ..................................................................................................... 475
Figure 325: Set of selected parts ............................................................................................................. 476
Figure 326: Compensated movement dialog box .................................................................................... 478
Figure 327: Cut the Sheet framework dialog box ..................................................................................... 479
21
Figure 328: Destroy the Sheet framework dialog box .............................................................................. 480
Figure 329: Destroy Sheet holes dialog box ............................................................................................ 482
Figure 330: Common cutting parameters dialog box ............................................................................... 483
Figure 331: Common cut of a grid dialog box .......................................................................................... 484
Figure 332: Linear cut of parts dialog box ................................................................................................ 486
Figure 333: Linear cycle options .............................................................................................................. 487
Figure 334: Beginning point and distance ................................................................................................ 488
Figure 335: Ends and number of points ................................................................................................... 489
Figure 336: Circular cycle options ............................................................................................................ 489
Figure 337: Centre and angles ................................................................................................................. 490
Figure 338: Centre and beginning point ................................................................................................... 491
Figure 339: Arc ......................................................................................................................................... 492
Figure 340: Grid cycle options.................................................................................................................. 492
Figure 341: Corner and number ............................................................................................................... 493
Figure 342: Irregular cycle options ........................................................................................................... 494
Figure 343: Micro-joints dialog box .......................................................................................................... 495
Figure 344: Automatic micro-joints at the end of the contour dialog box ................................................. 496
Figure 345: Order Machining options ....................................................................................................... 497
Figure 346: Order cut sequence dialog box ............................................................................................. 497
Figure 347: Order cut sequence by window dialog box ........................................................................... 498
Figure 348: Order the cut of the parts dialog box .................................................................................... 498
Figure 349: Order the cut of the parts by window dialog box ................................................................... 498
Figure 350: INKJET dialog box ................................................................................................................ 499
Figure 351: Real references of the remnant dialog box ........................................................................... 500
Figure 352: Group cycles on lead-ins window ......................................................................................... 505
Figure 353: System efficiency dialog box ................................................................................................. 507
Figure 354: Verify unstable contours dialog box ...................................................................................... 508
Figure 355: Multitorch data dialog box ..................................................................................................... 509
Figure 356: Sheet turn over dialog box .................................................................................................... 510
Figure 357: Modules viewer options ........................................................................................................ 512
Figure 359: Special display ...................................................................................................................... 518
Figure 360: Zoom scale values ................................................................................................................ 522
Figure 361: Machining of the out of a part with multitorch dialog box ...................................................... 526
Figure 362: Common cut with multitorch dialog box ................................................................................ 527
Figure 363: Configure parts evacuation ................................................................................................... 528
Figure 364: Lift dialog box ........................................................................................................................ 529
Figure 365: Suction cups carriage data dialog box .................................................................................. 529
Figure 366: Part selection dialog box ....................................................................................................... 533
Figure 367: Part selection dialog box 2 .................................................................................................... 534
Figure 368: Figure selection dialog box ................................................................................................... 536
Figure 369: Kit selection dialog box ......................................................................................................... 537
Figure 370: Rectangular parts dialog box ................................................................................................ 538
Figure 371: Configure dialog box ............................................................................................................. 539
Figure 372: Open dialog box (Import DXF Files) ..................................................................................... 540
Figure 373: Import configuration dialog box ............................................................................................. 541
Figure 374: Open dialog box (Import DWG Files) .................................................................................... 542
Figure 375: Parametric parts dialog box .................................................................................................. 543
22
Figure 376: Configure dialog box ............................................................................................................. 544
Figure 377: Open window (Import DXF Files) .......................................................................................... 546
Figure 378: Import configuration window ................................................................................................. 547
Figure 379: Configurations dialog box ..................................................................................................... 548
Figure 380: New configuration dialog box ................................................................................................ 548
Figure 381: Drop-down list (Configuration window) ..................................... ¡Error! Marcador no definido.
Figure 382: Drop-down list (DXF files) 2 .................................................................................................. 550
Figure 383: Element search window ........................................................................................................ 551
Figure 384: Parts dialog box .................................................................................................................... 555
Figure 385: Configure: Tables dialog box ................................................................................................ 556
Figure 386: Figures window ..................................................................................................................... 557
Figure 387: Warning message ................................................................................................................. 558
Figure 388: Figure deletion confirmation window..................................................................................... 558
Figure 389: Sheets dialog box.................................................................................................................. 559
Figure 390: Materials dialog box .............................................................................................................. 560
Figure 391: Edit material window ............................................................................................................. 561
Figure 392: Consumables dialog box ....................................................................................................... 562
Figure 393: Consumable definition dialog box ......................................................................................... 562
Figure 394: Modification of the consumable dialog box ........................................................................... 563
Figure 395: Tools dialog box .................................................................................................................... 564
Figure 396: Tools selection dialog box ..................................................................................................... 565
Figure 397: Tools definition dialog box .................................................................................................... 565
Figure 398: Drill cycle dialog box ............................................................................................................. 566
Figure 399: Tap cycle dialog box ............................................................................................................. 567
Figure 400: Ream cycle dialog box .......................................................................................................... 568
Figure 401: C. Sink cycle dialog box ........................................................................................................ 569
Figure 402: Milling cycle dialog box ......................................................................................................... 570
Figure 403: Machine select dialog box ..................................................................................................... 571
Figure 404: Assign tools dialog box ......................................................................................................... 572
Figure 405: Turrets dialog box ................................................................................................................. 573
Figure 406: Turrets dialog box 2 .............................................................................................................. 573
Figure 407: Selection of turret type dialog box......................................................................................... 574
Figure 408: Turrets dialog box 3 .............................................................................................................. 574
Figure 409: Stations dialog box ................................................................................................................ 575
Figure 410: Import dialog box................................................................................................................... 578
Figure 411: Export nestings dialog box .................................................................................................... 580
Figure 412: Database dialog box ............................................................................................................. 581
Figure 413: Connection dialog box .......................................................................................................... 582
Figure 415: Set of instructions (Processes) ............................................................................................. 587
Figure 416: List of process instructions example ..................................................................................... 587
Figure 418: Job dialog box ....................................................................................................................... 590
Figure 419: Job explorer tree ................................................................................................................... 590
Figure 420: Machine definition dialog box................................................................................................ 591
Figure 421: Install: Machines dialog box .................................................................................................. 591
Figure 422: Materials dialog box .............................................................................................................. 592
Figure 423: Rectangles example ............................................................................................................. 593
23
Figure 424: Circles example..................................................................................................................... 593
Figure 425: Fillets example ...................................................................................................................... 594
Figure 426: Chamfer example .................................................................................................................. 594
Figure 427: Copy example ....................................................................................................................... 595
Figure 428: Union example ...................................................................................................................... 595
Figure 429: Part saving dialog box ........................................................................................................... 596
Figure 431: One Sheet example .............................................................................................................. 597
Figure 432: Sheet Remnants dialog box .................................................................................................. 598
Figure 433: Automatic remnant creation example ................................................................................... 599
Figure 434: Automatic Lead-in/Lead-outs example ................................................................................. 600
Figure 435: Machining initialization window ............................................................................................. 601
Figure 436: Machining example ............................................................................................................... 601
Figure 437: Verify the machining completion message ........................................................................... 602
Figure 438: Verified machining example .................................................................................................. 602
Figure 439: CNC code example ............................................................................................................... 603
24
INTRODUCTION
LANTEK EXPERT
Welcome to Lantek Expert Tutorial. This tutorial introduces all the important drawing modules, basic
concepts, and important functionalities of Expert II software. We recommend the user to go through this
tutorial to use the software effectively.
After reading this tutorial, the user will be familiar with the drawing modules and concepts of Expert II to
use it proficiently, making the management process a pleasant activity.
WHAT IS EXPERT?
Lantek Expert Cut is a CAD/CAM system specially designed to automate the programming of sheet metal
cutting machines such as oxycut, plasma, laser, water jet, and so on.
It combines the machine technology with customer’s programming and management requirements. All
the applications related to cutting such as creating part, nesting, generating the CNC, and so on are fully
integrated into a single program.
25
DOCUMENTATION CONVENTIONS
The following documentation conventions are used throughout this reference manual:
CONVENTION DESCRIPTION
Indicates a module name, table name in a path,

Data
tab or button
Indicates table name in sentences, window and

Data
dialog box name
‘Data’ Indicates section name, field name
‘Data’ Indicates the entry of a field
(Data) Indicates cross references
-> Indicates the path to access a table
Indicates the notes
Indicates the warnings
Indicates the prerequisites
TABLE 1: Documentation Conventions
26
CHAPTER
1
1 SYSTEM UNITS
1.1 METRIC SYSTEM

The units used by the system, are the following ones:
Length, width, distance,
Diameter, radius, etc.......................Millimeters (mm)
Area................................................Square meters (m2)
Perimeter.........................................Meters (m)
Weight.............................................Kilograms (Kg)
Density............................................Kilograms/cubic decimeter (Kg/dm3)
Speed..............................................Millimeters/minute (mm/min)
Price/weight.....................................Money/Kilogram (Money/Kg)
Price/length......................................Money/meter (Money/m)
Price/Area........................................Money/square meter (Money/m2)
Time.................................................Seconds (s)
Strength............................................Kilograms/square centimeter (Kg/cm2)
Power...............................................Watts (w)
Frequency.........................................Hertz (Hz)
27
Pressure..............................................Bars (bar)
Flow.....................................................Square decimeters/minute (dm2/min)
Output (weight/time).............................Kilograms/minute (Kg/min)
1.2 ANGLO-SAXON SYSTEM

The units used by the system, are the following ones:
Length, width, distance,
Diameter, radius, etc..........................Inches (inch)
Area....................................................Square yards (yard2)
Perimeter............................................Yards (yard)
Weight.................................................Pounds (pounds)
Density................................................Pounds/cubic foot (pounds/foot3)
Speed..................................................Inches/minute (inch/min)
Price/weight.........................................Money/pound (Money/pound)
Price/length..........................................Money/yard (Money/yard)
Price/Area............................................Money/square yard (Money/yard2)
Time.....................................................Seconds (s)
Strength...............................................Pounds/square inch (pounds/inch2)
Power..................................................Watts (w)
Frequency...........................................Hertz (Hz)
Pressure..............................................Bars (bar)
Flow.....................................................Square foot/minute (foot2/min)
Output (weight/time)............................Pounds/minute (pounds/min)
28
CHAPTER
2
2 CONFIGURE CUTTING MACHINES &
TOOLS
2.1 MULTITORCH DATA

The configuration of the multitorch of the selected machine appears in the present window.
 Number of torches: It shows and allows configuring the number of torches of the machine. The
system supports to use up to 20 torches at the same time.
 Torch capabilities: Each torch may have different capabilities for cut, mark or for machine chamfers
or notches. In this dialogue box, the user can choose the capabilities of each torch:
Figure 1: Torches table
In the example, the first torch can be used for all kinds of machines, but the second, third or the
fourth can only be used for normal cut.
 Torches on axis Y: Depending on each machine, the torches can be placed on X axis (by default), or
in Y axis. It is important to specify to system which kind of torches placement the machine uses.
 Control Torch: It establishes the reference torch. The CNC program is built for this torch and the
other torches follow the movements of this torch. The options depend on the previous parameter. If
29
the torches are on axis X, the possible movements are Right and Left. If the torches are on axis Y,
the possible movements are Up and Down.
 Minimal distance between torches: This is the minimum distance allowed between two torches.
 Maximal and distance between torches: This is the maximum distance allowed between two
torches.
 View configuration in "Do all": The multitorch configuration is shown each time the user clicks Do
All option in the Nesting module, which makes the nesting and machining process automatically for
all jobs depending on the configurations of Automatic Nesting and Automatic Machining. This
dialogue box is shown when the user uses Sheets / Multitorch too.
In the dialogue box, the list of torches along with the capabilities and distances of each torch is
displayed:
The capabilities of each torch are shown with icons:
It is possible to activate the torches that the user would like to use. If the icon near the number is in
red color ( ), the system can use that torch. The user can deactivate torch by clicking this icon.
The icon is turned to black color ( ). Click the black colored icon to activate the torch again.
 Positioning: When clicking this button, Torches positions dialogue box with following parameters is
displayed:
30
Figure 2: Torches positions dialog box
 Test this data before machining: Select this to test the possibility of doing multitorch cutting by
position when the system detects multitorch cutting. The system verifies if the torches can reach the
specified position before performing the machining or not. If the part is not correct, then the system
exploits the part and its corresponding multitorch parts.
 Index of the reference torch: The reference torch is the torch with the motor, and the rest of them
depend on this torch. It is possible to set the index of the master torch here.
 Initial position of the reference torch: The reference torch is fixed in the carriage. It cannot be
moved. It is possible to set the position of the reference torch with the value that the user enters here.
 Minimal position of torches with respect to zero point of the carriage: The rest of the torches
(other than the reference torch) can be placed along the carriage but they must keep some distance
from the reference torch. The nearest to the reference torch can be placed at the distance specified
here. The distance is referred to the zero point of the torch.
 Maximal position of torches with respect to zero point of the carriage: The maximal position
along the carriage where the farthest torch to the reference torch can be placed. The distance is
referred to the zero point of the torch.
 Maximum length that can move to negative the zero of the carriage: The carriage can be placed
in different positions between the physical limits. This value is the maximum length to which the zero
point of the carriage can be moved towards negative direction.
31
 Maximum length that can move to positive the zero of the carriage: It is the maximum distance to
which the zero point of the carriage can be moved towards positive direction.
 Coordinates of the zero of the carriage respect the zero of the sheet: This value is the distance
between the zero point of the sheet and the zero point of the carriage. If the reference torch is placed
in the middle of the carriage, and the sheet is placed in the work zone, this is the distance between
the reference torch and the zero point of the sheet.
 Torch movement length: Select whether the torch movement length should be independent of the
separation (the distance between two torches) or depend on that.
 Independent of the separation: It allows cutting parts even when any of the torches is
out of its Maximal position of the torches with respect to the zero point of the
carriage.
 Dependent of the separation: If any of the torches is out of its Maximal position of the
torches respect of the zero point of the carriage, the parts are not cut (even if the
part keeps the minimum distance with the previous one).
 Assignation of the dimensions of the contour:
 By contours: The system decides, depending on the carriage limits, which torches to
use for machining problematic contours.
 By Parts: The part is always machined with the same torch (interior and exterior
contours).
2.2 GRID
This is used for cutting machines that have a work support grid. It is possible to specify the
visualization parameters for the support grid. It is not typically required for punching applications.
 The machine has grid: First of all, the user must check this option for enabling the rest of grid
configuration parameters:
 Visualize: Select this check box to simulate the grid. It is also possible to see the positions of the
parts and modify them, if required.
The parameters to configure are 2D Points and Continuous Line/Arc.
32
o X and Y: the coordinates of the first point.
o d1 and d2: the horizontal and vertical distances between points respectively.
o n1 and n2: the number of horizontal and vertical points respectively.
The other parameter to configure is File. The user has an option to define the grid with his own
parameters in MEC format. The grid in MEC format with the desired geometry can be imported to the
system. Select File check box to import your MEC file. Use the Navigation button to select the
particular MEC file.
 Parameters for destroying holes: This option is for cutting or combination machines with grid. The
system executes a process for destroying the holes on the sheet. The sheet is placed over the table's
grid. Depending on the distance of the grid's lines, sometimes while cutting a hole, it may remain on
the table instead of falling down. If it remains in horizontal position there is no problem, but if it
inclines between two grid lines, it may stand out and the head can collide with it resulting in head
damage.
To prevent this, the system provides the option of cutting the holes into small parts to ensure they
always fall down the grid.
The following four parameters delimit the size of the holes to be destroyed:
o Maximum length of the hole
o Minimum length of the hole
o Maximum width of the hole
o Minimum width of the hole
The following example explains how to use this option. In the nesting, there are some parts with big
holes. The grid lines are shown in violet color:
33
The hole of the upper-left part is bigger than the values given (X:150-450, Y:150-450), and the
smaller holes are not between the defined lengths and widths.
So, if the user executes the order for destroying the holes from the CAM module before doing the
machining in Machining / Contours / Destroy sheet holes, it asks for confirmation of previously
entered data, and also the length and the width of the grid lines.
Figure 3: Configure: Machine window
The system calculates and introduces the required machining orders, which destroy the problematic
holes:
34
Figure 4: Problematic holes example
The big hole of the part is too big and stays over the grid without problems, and the other holes are
too small fall into the table without problems.
 Automatic micro-joints in unstable contours: It is possible to configure automatic micro-joints. The

user will be provided with the following options:
o No: Do not place any micro-joint.
o The part has no support on the grid: The micro-joints are only placed on parts without grid
anchorage.
o The part can be partially overturned: The part may finish partially overturned.
o Both: Both previous options will be selected.
2.3 SHEET CLAMPS
2.3.1 Position
 Number of clamps: The user can select the number of clamps from the drop-down list.
 Positions: Positions indicate the distance between different clamp positions.
35
 Offset: The offset is the minimum distance where the clamp can be placed from the side of the sheet.
For example, if the value is 70mm, and the clamp is to be placed at 40 mm, the system places it at 70
mm. The clamp must have a sensor for executing this.
 Positioning: The user can set up the positions of the clamps in this section.
 Any: When selecting this, the clamps can be placed anywhere. This option is used for machines
whose clamps must be placed manually with screws.
 Fixed: When the clamps are placed into the linear turret, they take positions with fixed distance
increments between them. In this case, the position of the clamps can be configured easily with the
following parameters:
 First position variable: Although the turret has fixed positions, if the user selects this,
the first clamp site can be in different position each time, and the rest of the clamps
are placed after it.
 First position: The distance between the first clamp position and the reference point.
From this first position, the rest of the clamps are placed as per the next two
parameters:
 Number of positions: Total number of positions of the linear turret.
 Position distance: Distance between each turret position. The system calculates
every clamp position adding to the first position the value given here.
36
For example:
Figure 5: Sheet clamps position distance example
 Reference point: The user will be able to select between the following options:
o Left sheet: The reference point is the left side of the sheet.
o Right sheet: The reference point is the right side of the sheet.
o Left work zone: The left side of the work zone is the reference point.
o Right work zone: The right side of the work zone is the reference point.
 Place the clamps automatically: If enabled, the system will calculate the position of the clamps
automatically during the machining initialization.
 Place the clamps with the mouse: This is used frequently when the user works with the whole
sheet without using lower sheet margin. In this case, it is normal to have parts or holes to avoid, and
this is difficult, if the clamp placement was done inserting distances with the keyboard. But if the
placement is done with the mouse, it is possible to slide the clamps and place them in a position
which allows machining the whole part of the sheet. With this, reposition orders will be avoided.
37
The system prompts to place the clamps with the mouse when the Machining / Initialize order is
selected.
 Prompt for this data when initializing: When selecting this option, the system shows the Sheet
Clamps - Position dialogue box when the initialization instruction is executed. Please refer Machining
/ Initialize.
 More: When clicking More button, a dialog box is displayed, where it is possible to configure each
clamp's properties like Minimum position, Maximum position, Minimum distance, and Maximum
distance. It is possible to indicate whether the clamp has sensor or not. The user can also select the
Type of the clamp from the drop-down list. The options available in the drop-down list are Fixed,
Movable, Auto-retractable, and Movable - 2positions. When selecting Movable - 2positions, Distance
field is activated, and it is possible to define the distance the clamps can move.
2.3.2 Clamp Zone

 Clamp zone: It is possible to set up the measurements of the clamp zone.
 Clamp size: The clamp size can be set up here based on the three parameters: L, R, and U. These
settings configure the real clamps size, which are used for the automatic repositions. The system
tests if the clamp is to be placed in a hole or not. If the clamp is to be placed in a hole, the clamp
cannot take the sheet properly.
38
 Simulation: When clicking the Simulation button, a dialog box is displayed. The system simulates
the clamps size depending on the values given in the following dialog box:
Figure 6: Clamp zone simulation
 Offset of clamps zone: When clicking the Offset of clamps zone button, a dialog box is displayed.
It is possible to add the safety distance required to the clamp's work zone.
 Prompt for this data when initializing: When selecting this option, the system shows the Sheet
Clamps - Clamp zone dialogue box when the initialization instruction is executed. Please refer
Machining / Initialize.
2.3.3 Auxiliar
It is possible to configure the auxiliary details of the clamps here.
 Move from point interactively: Select this checkbox to change the from point of the machining.
 The clamps take up turret position: With this option, the clamps are placed in the turret.
39
 Maximum length of the sheet to enable the pin 2 automatically: Enter the required value to
enable the pin2 automatically.
 Initial offset of the work zone: Enter the Initial offset value of the work zone.
 Offset to avoid the clamps: Enter the Offset value for the punch to avoid the clamps.
 Pin 2: Select this checkbox to activate the minimum length of the sheet, clicking on Navigation button.
The user can configure Move from point interactively in the window displayed. It will be possible to
configure the Move from point interactively (Center, Left, Right) and define the Offset.
 Allow collision test for clamps: Select this checkbox to allow collision test.
 Apply clamp check: Select this checkbox to apply clamp check.
 Prompt for this data when initializing: When selecting this option, the system will show the Sheet
Clamps - Auxiliar dialogue box when the initialization instruction is executed. Refer Machining /
Initialize.
2.4 FIXTURES
With this option, it is possible to configure the fixtures or the fixed clamps of the machine. The fixed
clamps work similar to the clamps. The machine will only have clamps or fixed clamps, they will never be
together in the same machine. To configure the fixed clamps the clamps number must be 0 otherwise the
Fixtures option will not be displayed. If after configuring the fixed clamps, the user modifies the number
of clamps bigger than 0, the fixed clamps parameters will be avoided.
During the machining initialization, it is possible to configure the fixed clamps with the keyboard and with
the mouse. The changes made during the initialization with the keyboard (using the configuration panel)
will be saved as standard in machine configuration parameters.
 Positions.
 Number of fixtures: The clamps can be located in any position. This option is used for machines
whose clamps can be placed automatically.
40
Figure 7: Fixtures dialog box
 Fixture zone: When the machine is initialized, this is the clamp zone which the system will use before
starting the machining.
 Place the fixtures with the mouse: This is used frequently when the user is working with the whole
sheet without using lower sheet margin. In this case, is normal to have parts or holes to avoid, and
this is difficult if the clamp placement was done inserting distances with the keyboard. But if the
placement is done with the mouse, the user can slide the clamps and place them in a correct position
which allows to machining the most part of the sheet. The user can avoid reposition orders thanks to
this option.
41
 Prompt for this data when initializing: The machine initialization process must be done always
before making any machine instruction.
2.5 EXTRACTIONS
Extractions is used for cutting machines with clamps to fix the sheet, because in these machines the
sheet moves and the parts must be evacuated. If the cutting head moves alone on the sheet, there is no
need to evacuate the parts and the traps configuration is not required.
 Number of traps: The user can configure here the number of traps of the machine. Depending on
this number, the system shows the boxes needed to specify the respective coordinates (all the
distances are referred to the cutting/punching center):
 Minimum X & Minimum Y: These are the coordinates for the lower left corner of the trap.
 Maximum X & Maximum Y: These are the coordinates for the upper-right corner of the trap.
 Increment X & Increment Y: The machine makes one movement after receiving one trap open
instruction while trying to center the part into the trap. This increment of movement is configured here.
 The machine has an extraction hammer: If the machine has an extraction hammer and extraction
hammer2, these must be configured here. This hammer is used to hit the trap to make sure it opens
properly. The hammer is defined by the coordinates X and Y and the radius.
 Extraction hammer 2: This option will be enabled when The machine has an extraction hammer is
activated. Here the user can specify the X, Y coordinates and the radius of extraction hammer 2.
2.6 LIFT/GRIP
 The machine has up/downloading by lift: The machine uses lift system for uploading and
downloading sheets and/or parts. When enabled, many other options will be displayed:
 MEC file with suction cups carriage geometry: The system allows defining a maximum of five
movable strips with suction cups to load/download and evacuate parts by lift. Each strip is movable in
X and Y directions and it is placed in the desired position.
 There are movable strips in the suction cups carriage: The system allows defining a maximum of
five movable strips with suction cups to load/download and evacuate parts by lift. Each strip is
movable in X and Y directions and it is placed in the desired position.
42
 Number of strips: When the previous checkbox is enabled, this one is displayed. Here the user is
able to select the number of strips.
 Number of suction cups: Number of suction cups of the lift system. The maximum of suction cups
groups is six and each group can have up to twelve suction cups.
 Lift could rotate: This option manages the lift evacuations where the lift can be moved. If this
parameter is configured, the system will ask for the rotation angle of the lift for the specific evacuation
during manual or semiautomatic evacuation.
 X displacement of the suction cups while uploading: This is the offset between the cutting head
and the cups carriage.
 Y displacement of the suction cups while uploading: This is the Y offset for the suction cups while
loading the sheet.
 Minimum X position of the suction cups: This is the minimum position in X where the carriage can
physically arrive.
 Minimum X and Maximum X position while downloading: This is the minimum and maximum X
position where the carriage can download a part.
 Minimum Y and Maximum Y position while downloading: This is the minimum and maximum Y
position where the carriage can download a part.
 The machining has downloading by grip: The machine uses lift system for downloading parts.
 More: Click this button to display additional parameters related to lift system. Configure these details
in the dialog box which is displayed:
43
Figure 8: Lift dialog box
 Speed & Acceleration: The speed and the acceleration that the lift system applies for uploading the
sheet.
 Pressing position: X position where the lift picks the sheet.
 Waiting position: At the beginning, the lift goes to sheet pallet and gets one carries it to the machine.
The second time, the sheet cannot be located in the same place because the previous has not been
machined yet and it has not yet been evacuated from the machine. In this case, the lift places the
sheet in a wait position whose objective is to make the upload faster. The next sheet can be uploaded
as soon as the previous sheet has been evacuated.
 Cycle of unstuck of sheets: Sometimes the lift gets two sheets instead of just one because of
suction. When selecting this parameter, the lift, after getting the sheet makes up and down
movements to unstuck the sheets.
44
 Control of double sheets: If this parameter is selected, the sensor measures the width of the part
being carried. If the width is not correct, the machine will execute the Cycle of unstuck of sheets again
and will remove the extra sheets. It is a security level related to the previous parameter, but a step
higher than that.
 Transfer position: The position in the pallet where the sheet is to be left.
 Use a percentage of sheet length: Enabled, the user will be able to define a percentage of sheet
length.
 Use a percentage of sheet width: Enabled, the user will be able to define a percentage of sheet
width.
 Speed & Acceleration: The speed and the acceleration that the system applies for downloading the
sheet.
 Head up/down: The user should select this to have the head raised while moving the part for security
purpose.
 Press on the table of the machine: This option allows leaving the part on the table instead of the
pallet.
 Downloading with ejection: When selecting this, the lift leaves the part from a certain height
specified in the following parameters.
 Show pressing cylinders: If the user has selected Move the pressing point interactively, this
parameter will be displayed. Select this option to display the cylinders and/or the pressing head at the
evacuation point.
 Move the pressing point interactively: Select this option to define the zone to avoid collisions.
When selecting the Navigation button, Suction cups carriage data dialog box will be displayed.
 Ejection height: When the system tries to download parts on the pallet, if there are a few parts
already places, the lift cannot arrive to the surface of the pallet. In this case, this parameter is the
height to which the lift leaves the part to the pallet.
 Pressing position (X): This is the X distance of the lift zero point where the lift leaves the part.
 Pressing position (Y): The Y distance of the zero point for getting the part. This parameter is for lift
systemts which has movement in Y axis.
 Copy nesting: Select this option to copy the nesting during evacuation.
45
 Downloading position offset (X and Y): With this option, it is possible to define the point from where
the copying of nesting is performed.
 Scale factor (X and Y): If the download zone is bigger than the working zone, a scale factor can be
defined (in X and/or Y) to get more distance between parts on the pallet.
2.7 UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD SHEETS

 Process the number of sheets automatically: If the loading is automatic, the system will calculate
the number of sheets and will order them to load whenever it is required.
 Number of sheets: By means of this option the user can choose the number of sheets which will be
loaded into the machine instead of using the previous parameter.
 Upload sheets: If activated, Sheet uploading parameter will become activated, where the user will be
able to select between Manual, Automatic and Lift.
 Download sheets: If activated, Sheet downloading parameter will become activated, where the user
will be able to select between Manual, Automatic and Lift, as well as introducing the X and Y values.
before making any machine instruction. With this option enabled, the system will show the
upload/download sheet dialog always when the initialization instruction is executed.
2.8 WORK ZONE

 The machine has a work zone: Maximum area the machine is able to process without doing any
sheet reposition. The user will be able to define the Length and the Width. It is necessary to enable
this option so as to display the rest of options.
 Margins: The user will be able to introduce the Left, Right, Upper and Lower margins of the sheet.
 Fitting: Related to the previous parameters, places/fits the work zone to the Origin, Left, Right or
Center, as required.
46
If the user selects to center a sheet that is bigger than the Work Center, the system will adjust the
sheet automatically to the border and the user can select between the following two options:
2.9 FROM POINT

 Zero point of the CNC equal to from point: Select this option to enable the zero point of the CNC
as from point.
 Prompt for this data when initializing: As for other parameters, the system can show this
configuration window when the Initialization process is executed.
2.10 REPOSITION
2.10.1 General
 Retract value in Y: This is the back off distance in Y when opening the clamps. It is applied before
the X carriage is moved providing a clearance between the clamps and the edge of the sheet.
 Advance value in Y: This is the value that the Y axis moves back after repositioning. Normally is the
same as retract value, but sometimes is smaller to prevent the sheet being "nudged" by the work
clamps if the edge of the sheet is uneven.
 Speed in X: It defines the feed rate in X of the machine when moving the sheet during repositioning.
 Speed in Y: The feed rate applied to the back off move.
 Fixed value of repositions and value: With this option enabled, the user can specify the distance to
move in a reposition. If this value is bigger than the work zone, the system will not do any reposition.
 X position of reposition: Using this parameter, the user is allowed to define the sheet fixture point
during the automatic repositions. It is only valid when the sheet is fixed by the head or the pistons.
This parameter has the following two options:
47
- Fit to the edge of active work zone.
- Sheet center.
 X position offset: The user will be able to define the X position offset.
 Y position of reposition is fixed: The user will be able to select between Fit to the edge of active
work zone and Sheet center.
 Look for a correct Y position of reposition: The system will check for an appropriate position of the
Y axis. It is important to hold the sheet strongly while the clamps are relocated, for this, the pistons
must be in contact with the sheet and not placed over a previously cut hole.
If the user configures upper and lower margin and an increment, the system will scan between these
limits for a valid position, altering the Y value each time by the stated until a suitable position is
found.
 Test for sheet clamps in holes when repositioning: When doing repositions, sometimes the
clamps are placed inside holes resulting in a bad sheet catch. With this parameter enabled, the
system will test each clamp position before placing it on the sheet. The distance increment for testing
must be set up in “Increment of search of correct position” option.
The system will not allow reposition movements if there is not a Minimum number of clamps catching
the sheet properly.
 Minimum number of sheet clamps to grip the sheet: Here the user will be able to set the minimum
number of sheet clamps that will grip the sheet.
 Maximum number of reposition & Maximum increment of reposition: The user can specify the
number repositions to do while machining and the maximum length for any reposition. The machining
will be stopped after reaching the number in maximum number of reposition instead of making more
repositions.
2.10.2 Advanced
 Sheet hold mode when displacing movable clamps: Using this option the user can fit the sheet
with the turret head and with the pistons while moving clamps. The user can select between: No hold
and Pistons.
48
 Y minimum position: This configuration parameter, which defines Y minimum position, avoids or
shows a warning when the user executes a manual reposition below this Y. the user will be able to
select between: No, Avoid and Ask.
2.10.3 Device
 Type of reposition: There are three different types of repositions: Pistons, Head or Both of them.
When selecting Pistons, the user will be able to define the Number of pistons and Coordinates:
 Number of pistons: The user will be able to introduce the required number of pistons.
 Coordinates: Defines the X and Y position of each piston, and the radius values must be configured
here. These values are measured from the cut head center. When selecting Head, the head will go
down to catch the sheet for performing reposition. The system will need to know the Head radius:
 Head radius: Introduce here the required value in millimeters. If the user selects Both of them, the
reposition will be done with pistons and with head at the same time. The parameters to configure are
Number of pistons and Head radius.
2.10.4 Strategy
 Mode: The user will be able to select between the following options:
 Normal: Standard one for the machine.
 Go home: This mode will perform the repositions as the standard way, but at the end of the
machining the machine will make another reposition to go back to the home position.
 Inverse: Selecting this mode changes the direction of the sheet. Clicking on Inverse mode displays
four parameters:
 Edge of sheet and not go home: The reposition is made to the edge of the sheet first and when the
machine finishes the cut it will not make any reposition at the home point.
 Not edge of sheet and not go home: The machine goes and cuts the parts directly. Here home
point and edge of the sheet are not considered for reposition.
 Edge of sheet and go home: The machine moves to the edge of the sheet when the parts have
been cut and the head goes back to the home point.
49
 Not edge of sheet and go home: The head moves directly when the machine starts to cut the parts
and when it finishes the reposition goes to home point.
 Strategy:
 Normal: The system will perform machining of all the work zone and the rest after the reposition.
 Maximum rigidity: The system will perform one small percent of the work zone and the rest after the
reposition. Using this reposition strategy with maximum rigidity, the repositions can be improved for
all the combined machines. It is possible to configure the length up to the end of the machining or up
to the sheet’s edge. In case of combined machines, the system can configure the strategy with
maximum rigidity in order to use it for cutting, punching or both.
 Maximum rigidity: The user will be able to select between By parts or By length.
 Maximum length: The user will be able to select between Machining and Sheet
borders.
2.11 SHEET PARAMETERS

 Remnant margin: When a remnant is generated from the current sheet, if there is any value here,
the remnant will be created with these margins.
 Respect sheet margins on remnants: This dialogue allows the user to specify margins around the
sheet. This ensures the machine is not going to cut or punch out of the sheet and leave enough
material to support the parts. In the example shown, the lower margin is larger to avoid the clamp
zone. The X and Y values are the coordinates that the system will take for the selected red point.
Normally this point is the 0,0 because it is the point where the torch will be placed before cutting.
 Display sheet reference in status bar: If this parameter is activated, the reference of the sheet will
be displayed in the status area while working on the nesting.
50
 Sheet status: Indicate the fold status of the sheet through one of the numbers in the list. (0 =
completely flat, 9 = very irregular). This parameter may be useful if the postprocessor uses it to
calculate the distance that the head must come down in order to cut/punch for trying to avoid
collisions with sheet.
 Anti-scratch: This parameter's objective is that the rapid movements are done at a higher distance
for not scratching the sheet. When the movement is from one hole to another with the head down,
instead of the normal height, with this enabled it will go a little higher.
 Rotation: With this option the user can visualize the sheet rotated 90 0, 1800, and 2700. It also allows
making sheet symmetry around the X or Y axis. This parameter is not configurable through the
system yet. It is possible to configure it modifying the parameter A266 of the selected machine CT
file.
 Minimum length and width: Using this parameters the user can limit the minimum dimensions of a
sheet.
 Maximum length and width: Using this parameters the user can limit the maximum dimensions of a
sheet.
2.12 SHEET TURN OVER

 The machine has automatic turn over device: If enabled, many other parameters will become
activated.
 Center of rotation: With this parameter the user can configure the Center of rotation point in X and Y
direction.
 Rotation sense: The user can select between three options: Clock wise, Counter clock wise and
Both of them.
 Pistons 1, 2, 3, 4, 5: The user can select the piston position as Circular or Rectangular. The X and Y
position of each piston. In case of circular pistons, the user will have to introduce the Radius and
Angle, while rectangular ones will require the Length and Width. These values are measured from the
cut head center.
 Turn over type: The user can select between four options: Request, Manual rotation of 180°, Manual
rotation of 90°, Manual symmetry, Automatic rotation of 180° and Automatic rotation of 90°.
51
 Rotation sense: The user can select between three options: Request, Clock wise and Counter clock
wise.
 Pressing position: The user can select between three options: Request, Fixed and Sheet center.
 Sheet rotation point: The user can select between four options: Request, Fixed, Equal to pressing
point and Avoiding collisions with clamps.
 Previous position point to turn over: The user can select between the following options:
 Request: It allows the user to select the previous position point to turn over.
 Fixed point of the sheet: The user can specify the Fixed point in X and Y direction.
 From point: The user can specify the Displacements in X and Y direction.
 Lower left corner of the sheet: The user can specify the Displacements in X and Y direction.
 Lower right corner of the sheet: The user can specify the Displacements in X and Y direction.
 Upper right corner of the sheet: The user can specify the Displacements in X and Y direction.
 Upper left corner of the sheet: The user can specify the Displacements in X and Y direction.
 Sheet center: The user can specify the Displacements in X and Y direction.
 Cancel repositions when executing the turn over: Using this option the user can cancel reposition.
If there were any reposition before the sheet turnover, after executing it, all the reposition will be
cancelled keeping the working zone as it was at the beginning.
2.13 HEAD CHAMFER DATA
2.13.1 Head Data

 Type: Using this option it is possible to specify the head type that the user will use. The head chamfer
data will be of a different type depending on its use.
o Normal: With this option it is possible to make straight cuts is 3 axes only without any
inclination.
o Three torches: As in Normal, the machine is configured with three torches in order to work
with three sheets at once.
52
 Use machining dimension on nesting: When selecting Three torches, this option is displayed. It
enables selecting between No, Yes and Orthogonal.
o 5 Axis: In this, it is possible to define two angles to rotate head part depending upon the type
of head that the user has selected.
a) When selecting Type A the AB corresponds to X axis and CC to Z axis.
b) When selecting Type B the AB corresponds to Y axis and CC to Z axis.
When selecting Others then the AB and CC correspond to the axis that the user indicates.
o Tangential: Using this option, it is possible to rotate the head only over one axis, and it is also
possible to define the maximum and the minimum angle of the rotation.
o Tangential 5X: This option is the same as 5 axis with a tangential sensor that measure the
height of the sheet, because of that the head can cut only in one direction.
2.13.2 Chamfers Management

 Type of cut: Depending on the type of cut, three different options are specified:
o By elements: Using this option, the user cut the edges of the part separately (Finish all the
cut of a segment before beginning with the next one).
o Group by same type: This option allows the user to join the edges with the same kind of
chamfer (For example: triple with triple, double with double…).
o Group by same angle: This option allows the user to join the consecutive edges with the
same type of angle (For example: upper with upper, lower with lower ...).
 Discretization length
o On segments: This option defines the distance to discretize a segment when the initial vector
and the final vector are not the same.
o On arcs: This option defines the distance to discretize an arc when the initial vector and the
final vector are not the same.
53
o On variable arcs: This option defines the distance to discretize a variable arc when the initial
vector and the final vector are not same. If the distance defined is bigger than the size of the
segment, the machine divides this segment in two parts.
 Compensation
o Default: The machine configures all the contours in general settings.
o System: The system compensation is done independently in the general settings.
 Auxiliar elements
o Minimum length on loops: The machine cuts more of the normal line, if there will be a loop.
o Length for auxiliary lead in: Select the auxiliary lead-in length of the loop to cut the part.
o Length for auxiliary lead out: Select the auxiliary lead-out length to cut the lines of a part.
o Angle to avoid double cut: In some cases, if the user has to make double or triple chamfer the
lead out of one of the cuts, coincide with the lead in of the other, to avoid this problem the
user can select this angle and it will be applied in one of them.
 Order of loops: With this option, it is possible to define the order in which the user wants to cut a
segment with different chamfers. The machine will cut the chamfer in a fixed order such as lower,
orthogonal and upper. The order of the loops will get changed based on the options selected. For
example, when selecting an option as orthogonal then the second and third will get modified to upper
and lower or vice versa.
 Angle for tangential cut: To join two consecutive chamfers, introduce 90 degrees, which is the
maximum angle between the perpendicular line and the bisector. This is very important for tangential
machines.
 Limit angle on chamfers: To join two consecutive chamfers, introduce 80 degrees, which is the
maximum angle of the straight line between both (the inclination of the line that merge both chamfers
to make it continuously), and it considers the maximum inclination that is to be cut by the machine.
 Join without lead in when same line: When changing the inclination of a cutting line, instead of
introducing a lead out or lead in we can make a joined cut to change this inclination.
 Compensation by type of chamfer: Using this option, we will able to configure the compensation for
each type of chamfer in material thickness dependent data.
54
 Special management of loops: This parameter enables a special loop for those parts with inner
chamfers and prevents the head from passing over the parts.
2.14 GENERAL
2.14.1 Geometry
 Linear tolerance & Angular tolerance: Necessary values for the system to make calculations.
 Use the minimum rectangle of parts: If this parameter is enabled, the parts will be turned so that
the rectangle formed by the corners of the selected part has the minimum area. The user can define
the Favourite position for the minimal rectangle, where it is possible to choose between Any,
Horizontal and Vertical.
 Process lead-in/lead-out, loops and micro-joints in automatic nesting: If this parameter is

activated, the space needed for leads, loops and micro-joints will be considered in Automatic Nesting.
The space left between parts could be enough but the system is not going to guarantee avoiding the
overlapping of parts with leads, loops or micro-joints unless this option is enabled.
 Calculate the part dimensions without any auxiliary geometry: Auxiliary geometries are those
which are included with the part for the machining process: leads, loops, micro-joints. If this option is
enabled, the system will use the real part dimension without these geometries.
 Restrict rotations in manual mode: If enabled, the system will not allow placing rotated parts of the
nesting manually if the angle has not been allowed on the part.
 Prompt for data when ordering contours: The system will assign automatically cutting order to the
contours when saving the part or when the nesting module is executed. When this option is enabled,
the system will display Contour Ordering dialog box, where the user will be able to set the required
order for both interior and exterior contours.
2.14.2 Part Changes

 Replace punch with cut: If enabled, the system will replace all the punching of the part by cutting.
 Mark: It will only be enabled if the previous parameter is activated, and the user will be able to
replace the punching of a part by the desired type of marking: No, Powder, Drill, Pen or Cut.
55
 Prompt for this data: If enabled, the system will show a window allowing the configuration of the
previous parameters in the case of entering in the nesting module after changing a nested part.
 Do in case of part change: Once the nesting has been executed, if a part is changed, the system
can execute one of the following actions: Nothing, Keep the nesting and Remake the nesting. If the
user selects Keep the nesting, the following option will be enabled:
 Show on sheet the machining modifications made on parts: If enabled, this option will keep the
existing machining on the part. On the contrary, if not, all the machining in the sheet will be deleted. If
the user selects Remake the nesting, the following options will be enabled:
 Warn in case that the parts don’t fit on the nesting: If due to modifications all the previous nested
parts do not fit on the sheet, the program will show a warning message if this parameter is enabled.
 Insert more parts if it is possible: Due to the changes made on the part, there may be more space
on sheet that the system can use for placing more parts. Enabling this parameter will make the
system to test this.
2.14.3 Auxiliar
 Parts template name: Name of the file that has the parameter to print the list of parts.
 Sheets template name: Name of the file that has the parameter to print the list of boxes.
 Part time: It refers to the cut time that will be calculated in the Drawing module. The user can select
between the following three options:
o System: The system will calculate the time internally.
o Time calculation: The calculation will be done using the required postprocessor.
o Postprocessor: The calculation will be done using the postprocessor of the current machine.
This option is used in water machines where the speed changes frequently.
 Generate information for labels: If enabled, the system will create a label for each part and this
information will be stored in the database. If not, all the label reports will be empty.
 Work only with unitary parts (fast entry to nesting module): If enabled, each geometry part that is
machined will be considered as an independent part.
56
2.14.4 Cut
 Automatic contours - Warn if there is interior geometry not machined when cutting: If enabled
the user will be warned when there is no machined geometry inside a contour when using Automatic
contours option.
o No
o Yes, and cut the contour
o Yes, and not to cut the contour
2.15 STARTUP
2.15.1 General
 Execute every rapid with head up: If enabled, the machine will be instructed to raise the cutting
head before every rapid movement. This parameter is used for safety, to prevent head damages.
 The machine has laser-eye: The laser-eye is a device of some laser machines used to detect and
avoid possible collisions with the head. If enabled, the system will use it. When clicking Navigation
( ) button the system will display a dialog box, where it is possible to select between the following
laser-eye methods: Don´t use it, Measure 1 sheet border, Measure 2 holes, Measure 3 points (third
point in X) and Measure 3 points (third point in Y).
 PartNo: The CNC file will take the same name assigned to the PartNo. Which is the internal name of
the CNC files and can be assigned in different ways through the following parameters:
o Default: The Part No. will be assigned by default using the value introduced in the box
PartNo.
o Automatic: The Part No. will take an automatic value that will increase for subsequent CNCs.
Six additional parameters will be displayed:
o Reset PartNo: This option will reset the CNC's counter.
o Minimum: PartNo: Minimum number of characters for the PartNo.
o Maximum: PartNo: Maximum number of characters for the PartNo.
o Step of the PartNo: The number of steps used for the PartNo.
57
o Number of characters (e.g. 8): Number of characters for the PartNo.
o Previous text (e.g. P): The first characters of the PartNo.
2.15.2 Pre-initialization
 Explode modules: With this option, the user can execute the machining pre-initialization. It allows
exploding all the modules before the machining initialization.
 Delete the machining totally outside of the sheet: This option will delete the machining done
outside of the sheet. It will be configurable if the parameter "Prompt for the data when initializing"
from Startup menu is active, or when the user initializes the sheet.
 Create the cutting line of the remnant automatically: By this option, the remnant line will be
created automatically and with the shape configured by the user. The following two parameters will
become activated:
o Delete existing remnants: By using this option, the user can delete the existing remnants that
are created by the cutting line of the remnant automatically. If any remnant exists and there is
no configuration to delete them, it will not be possible to delete the remnant line nor generate
a new one.
o Delete existing remnant line: The user can use this option for the deletion of existing
remnants line. If any remnant line exists and there is no configuration to delete it, will not be
possible to create a new one.
2.15.3 Feed Rates

 Feed rates: The machine speeds can be configured in this section, which comprises Cut speed,
Chamfered speed, Powder mark speed, Drill mark speed, Pen mark speed, Cut mark speed, Wheel-
tool speed, Rapid speed and Prompt for this data when initializing.
58
2.16 CNC
 Prompt for CNC reference: This option is used when a nesting module or nesting part is saved.
There are four options: No, Only if the sheet is new and the file already exists, Only if the sheet is
new and Always.
 CNC name = Job: If this parameter is enabled, the name of the CNC file will start with the name of
the manufacturing order. When selecting this, it will be possible to select the number of characters, as
well as to enable Allow large names and Add job reference options.
 CNC name = PartNo: The CNC file will take the same name assigned to the PartNo which is the
internal name of the CNC files.
 Directory of CNC files: All the CNC code files will be stored in the directory set here.
 Extension of CNC files: This file will display the extension of CNC parameters. The extension of the
file can be configured in the final CNC operation.
2.17 SHEET REMNANTS

When the machining for a sheet only takes up a small part of the total area, sometimes there is a piece of
the sheet we are interested in keeping for future use, which is referred as remnant. The system can
automatically generate these remnants and manage them in the database. This is very useful when the
user want to use one of these remnants for another order. The system can be configured to recognize
these remnants and store them in the sheets database when saving the nest.
 Generate remnants when you save: If enabled, the system will automatically generate a remnant
for the current sheet when saving.
 Generate remnants with the completed sheets: The system will keep on the database the whole
sheet after cutting the parts. Sometimes this is useful if the sheet has been machined with a few parts
and is better not to cut it for remnants. The user can get this sheet for nesting and machining more
parts taking advantage of the remaining space of the sheet.
 Create the cutting line of the remnant automatically: This option allows generating remnants with
different shapes depending on the area value. The different shapes available are shown below:
59
 Offset between the parts and the line: This value will determine the distance between the
remnant´s cutting line and every part nested on the sheet.
Figure 9: Offset between the parts and the remnant line example
 Minimum width: The value of this parameter is the minimum allowed for using a little space of the
sheet that is between parts in the limit of the remnant's cutting line.
Figure 10: Minimum width of hollows example
 Round the remnant line: With this option the user can round the remnant line automatically when it
is generated. The first parameter allows activating this option, while the second one asks the value for
the round radius. This option is also available for combined machines.
60
 Delete the remnant area around parts: If enabled, the system will not use as remnant any area of
the sheet including those that are inside parts like holes.
 Minimum area of remnants: This value indicates the minimum area of the remnants to be
considered as such.
 Consider the auxiliar geometry: If enabled, remnants will be generated taking into account auxiliary
geometry. This option is configurable and the user will be able to select between the following
options:
o 0: the base has a value 10 times linear tolerance.
o Cutter diameter: the base has this value.
 Remnants can be rotated: The remnant will be generated as configured, but with this parameter
enabled, the system will look for the best position of the remnant for placing the cutting head (from-
point) of the machine into the sheet. The user will be able to choose between Not allow rotations,
Allow rotations, Prioritize horizontal and Prioritize vertically.
 Allow to turn over the remnant: This option makes possible the rotation for the remnants.
 Prompt for references when generating remnants: The system generates a reference
automatically for each remnant. But if this checkbox is enabled, at the moment of generating a new
remnant from the sheet, the system will ask for the reference.
2.18 SAVE OPTIONS
2.18.1 General
 Generate labels automatically: When machining parts automatically or by parts, the system
generates automatically one Begin span and one End span for each part. Then verifies what is
between the spans and if there are equal codes, one subprogram will be generated.
 If the user executes the machining of the part by contours, spans will not be generated and,
because of this, no subprograms will be used for the CNC. Enabling this parameter will force the
system to verify the machining code inserting spans between the beginning and the end of equal
61
code. Then will generate subprograms for these codes although they are only for contours, not for
whole parts.
2.18.2 Subprograms
When there is one part nested many times in the sheet, the CNC code generated for this aforementioned
part can be used for the rest of equal parts that have to be nested. Using subprograms will result in
smaller CNC codes, which is very useful when the numeric control of the machine has limited memory.
 Generate subprograms: The system will try to generate subprograms.
 Linear subprograms: If possible, the system will detect and apply linear subprograms in the CNC.
 Subprogram rotation: If there is a possibility to use subprograms with rotations, the system will
apply them generating the proper CNC code.
 Grid subprograms: The grid subprograms generation will be supported using this option.
 Linear tolerance & Angular tolerance: These values are the linear and angular tolerance for
calculations of the system.
 Subprograms by contours: If enabled, the system will create subprograms for each different
contour, and then will execute them in the same order.
 Only subprograms by reference: If enabled, the system will automatically repeat the subprogram
when performing equal parts. Therefore, the subprogram will only be generated once.
 Delete subprograms which are executed once: If enabled, the groups of instructions that are only
executed as a subprogram once will not be considered.
 Definition point: The definition point is the reference point taken by the subprogram. This reference
will be used for generating the rest of the equal parts from the first one.
62
2.18.3 Part Saving
There are some options that can be executed automatically when the user saves a part. This is a
powerful feature for saving time.
 Verify part: This option will verify the part immediately after saving the part. When clicking the
Navigation button, a dialog box is displayed.
 Contour ordering: If this option is activated before saving the part or the nesting, the system will
keep the direction of the contours as they were before nesting.
 Automatic technology: Automatic technology will be applied depending on the configuration

previously set.
 Automatic loops: The Loop values previously set in configuration will be applied.
 Automatic Lead-in/Lead-out: The automatic Lead-in/Lead-out values previously set in configuration

will be applied.
2.18.4 Execution Nesting Module
When the nesting module is executed, there are some options that can be applied automatically.
 Delete existent machining: With this option the user can delete existent machining features. When
this parameter is enabled, the user can select between the following features by selecting the
navigation button: Machining, Auxiliary geometry, Technology and No cut technology.
 Automatic mark: When entering to the nesting module, the system will introduce the name of the
part inside their geometry and will assign marking technology. With this, the identifier for each part
can be automatically marked into the part. When selecting the navigation button, the Automatic mark
dialog box is displayed.
 Contour ordering: If this option is activated before saving the part or the nesting, the system will
keep the direction of the contours as they were before nesting.
 Automatic technology: Automatic technology will be applied depending of the configuration

previously set.
 Automatic Lead-in/Lead-out: The system will apply automatically the settings of Automatic Lead-
in/Lead-out configuration.
63
 Automatic round angles: The system will apply automatically the settings of Loop values previously
set.
 Automatic loops: The system will apply automatically the settings of Loop values previously set.
 Automatic micro-joints: The system will apply automatically the configuration previously set in
Automatic micro-joints values.
 Automatic micro-joints at end of contour: The system will insert automatic micro-joints at the end
of the contour. When clicking the navigation button, the Automatic micro-joints at end of contour
dialog box is displayed.
 Change micro-joints into micro-joints with lead-ins: The system will automatically change the
micro-joints into micro-joints with lead-ins.
 Redefine lead-ins/outs depending on machine configuration: As the name of the parameter says,
the system will redefine the lead-in/outs depending on machine configuration.
 Redefine micro-joints depending on machine configuration: As the name of the parameter says,
the system will redefine the micro-joints depending on machine configuration.
2.19 MATERIAL/THICKNESS DEPENDENT DATA

Obviously, the machining process will not always be the same when using different materials and
thickness. Therefore, some of the machining parameters will need to change when choosing different
materials or specify a different thickness.
Before configuring any parameter, the user must create pairs of material-thickness limits, and from there,
all the changes made to the values of each section will be associated to that material.
2.19.1 Cutting Parameters

 Cutter radius: For the specified material between the given thickness, the system will use the value
given here as the radius for the cutter.
 Piercing radius: This parameter allows the user to define the piercing radius depending on quality,
thickness and material.
64
 Corrector for holes: Some numeric controls have different corrector for interiors or exteriors. Here,
the user can configure the corrector number which the numeric control is going to use for interior
contours.
 Corrector for exteriors: In this case, the numeric control will use this number of corrector for exterior
contours. The numeric control corrector values must be programmed for using this properly.
 Level of optimization: Optimization level can be configured as per the material/thickness. If the
option <> is selected, the configuration of the corresponding machine is considered applied, as the
one defined in CT, otherwise the level chosen will be applied. Different part rotations per
material/thickness can be defined, and blocked if required (only 0º rotation should exist). This will
require the definition of rotation angle parameter optimization level of parts at 360º.
 Separation of parts: Here the user will have to introduce the value of separation between parts in
millimeters.
 Allow different separation in Y: The system will allow different separation in Y depending on the
specified material.
 Cut speed: This cut speed will be applied for any job done in the specified material.
 Chamfered speed: This speed will be applied for making chamfers for any job done in the specified
material. This value will be used only for machines with bevel cutting possibilities.
 Compensations by quality: Using this parameter the user can apply system compensation and/or
control corrections depending on the cutting quality of the parts and the type of cut. This option will
allow defining the following parameters with different data for each quality: Corrector for holes,
Corrector for exteriors, Compensation radius for holes and Compensation radius for exteriors.
 Compensation by angle: By clicking this option, you will get Compensation by angle dialog box,
where you can view Angle, Theoretical, CNC angle and Compensation field. Using this parameter,
the following options can be configured: Add angle, Delete, Recalc all and View all.
2.19.2 Sheets Parameters

 Sheet status: Indicate the fold status of the sheet through one of the numbers in the list. (0 =
completely flat, 9 = very irregular). This parameter may be useful if the postprocessor uses it to
calculate the distance that the head must come down in order to cut for trying to avoid collisions with
sheet.
65
 Remnant margin: When a remnant is generated from the current sheet, if there is any value here,
the remnant will be created with these margins.
 Sheet margins: This allows the user to specify margins around the sheet. This ensures the machine
is not going to cut out of the sheet and leave enough material to support the parts.
2.19.3 Automatic Technology

 Minimum and maximum radius: The parts are classified here by area. The system calculates the
area of a part, and then generates internally the circle with the same area. Minimum and maximum
radiuses designate the areas of the circles that correspond to the areas of the parts.
 Cutting quality: The color which will be used for each cutting quality can be configured too. The user
can configure the cutting quality of each contour.
 New: This button will create a new entry on the cutting quality assignation table.
 Delete: This button will delete the selected entry on the cutting quality assignation table.
 Dot small contours: The system will assign a dot cycle to all the contours whose radius is below the
minimum radius, but only if the configured minimum radius is bigger than 0. The action to take on
each dot cycle should be previously configured on Dot cycles by default.
 Mark small contours: If the minimum radius is bigger than 0, the mark technology chosen here
(powder, drill, pen, cut) will be applied automatically to all the contours whose radius is below the
minimum ones.
 Apply in contours: This option allows defining the type of contour to which the automatic technology
selected will be applied. The available types of contours are: All contours, Internal contours, External
contours, Circular internal contours, Rectangular internal contours and Oblong internal contours. The
last three types of contours are the most restrictive.
66
2.19.4 Head Raising Test
 Management by material/thickness: It is necessary to enable this parameter in order to visualize
the rest, which allows managing the Head raising test by each material and thickness.
 Head raising test: This indicates that the system will have special care with the machine head, if
disabled, the automatic machining process will not manage the head movement.
 Make the head raising test while saving: The system will test even if the system has been
configured for making all the rapid movements with the head up.
 Maximum hollow & Offset: When moving over a hole, the head may result damaged. The distance
have different values depending on the chosen option:
o Maximum hollow: Is the maximum distance inside the hole that the system will allow the head
to pass over.
o Offset: Is the maximum distance between the hole and the head movement.
 Maximum length with head down: This is the maximum trajectory in mm described by the head
when is down.
 Maximum number of rapid tracts: The system will try the given number of tracts to avoid holes.
 Modify lead-in/outs: The system will allow changing the situation of the lead-in/outs to optimize the
head management of the machining process. The user will be able to select between: No, By parts
and By contours.
 Apply head up at end of each part: When the machining process of a part has been done, the
system will send an order to the machine for lifting the head.
 Head up for common cut elements: The special case of common cut elements is what this option
configures. When a common cut element has been finalized, the head will go up.
2.19.5 Machining Order

 Management by material/thickness: This check must be activated in order to activate the rest of
parameters.
 Machining order: There are three options available: By parts, By contours and By minimum heat.
67
o By parts: By selecting this option, it will be possible to configure Order mode of the holes,
which offers the following options: None, By proximity and By direction. If the user selects By
proximity, it will be possible to configure Path optimization and Method. The method can be
Normal or Optimized. If the user selects Optimized, it will be also possible to introduce
Number of passes. If the user selects By direction, it will be possible to configure the
Direction of the machining order. The direction can be Horizontal and Vertical. It will also be
possible to configure options like Cut in zig zag and Cut small holes first and Orthogonality
tolerance.
o By contours: If the user selects By contours, the machining will be ordered by contours. Here
the user can select between the following options: By zones, Start point and direction, By size
(largest to smallest) and By size (smallest to largest).
o Minimum heat: If the user selects Minimum heat, the system will distribute the cut zones with
the objective of not to cut the same area consecutively. This option can be based on the
following criteria: By zones, By parts and By contours.
2.19.6 Lead-in/Lead-out Values

 Lead-in/Lead-out values: With this option you can configure a machine’s approach parameters. The
user can assign manually leads for each part, this can be done with the leads toolbar which appears if
choosing the Technology - Lead in-Lead out option of the menu in both drawing and nesting module.
 Special lead-in/lead-outs for circular holes: It is possible to select this check box to enable special
lead-in/lead-outs for holes. When selecting this, the Lead-in/lead-out values dialog box allows the
user to set the parameters for the special lead-in/lead-outs. Enter the distance in ‘D’ field, radius
values in ‘R1’, ‘R2’, and ‘R3’ fields. It is also possible to enter the additional distance value in ‘H’ field.
 Circle angles: If the user wants to place the lead manually, sometimes happen that this lead cannot
be placed in the exact clicked point. The value of this parameter will help to system to decide where
68
to put it. The meaning is the angle step the system will use for placing the lead. For example, with a
90 circles angle value, the lead will be placed in the nearest quadrant point to clicked one: 0, 90, 180,
270. If the system cannot place on nearest position, it will try on next 90 degree point. For a value of
30, the system is going to try to put the lead on every 30 degrees from the clicked point: 0, 30, 60, 90,
120.
2.19.7 Automatic Lead-in/Lead-out Values
If the user selects to assign the leads automatically, it is necessary to configure some parameters.
1. To use snap in order to place the lead in or lead out. With this the user will be able to dynamically
drag lead in with the mouse. To define the lead in, the user should define a line (2 points option)
crossing the contour where the lead in is going to be placed. There are two different ways to
define this lead in: Automatic, which take the values from the automatic lead in option, and Manual
where the user has to define the type for the lead in. There is an orthogonal selection mode (F2),
which allows moving the lead only in horizontal or vertical to the coordinate system.
2. If the user configures it in the Save options section of the machine configuration. In these
dialogues, the user can choose if it will insert lead-in/lead-out automatically when saving the part,
or when entering on the nesting module.
3. In both drawing and nesting modules, the user can select Technology -> Lead-in/Lead-outs ->
Automatic option to execute automatic lead-in/lead-out assignation or by using the automatic
toolbar button.
 Management by qualities: If the cutting qualities are used for the job, the system allows configuring
different values for the Lead-in/Lead-out when using the automatic assignation. With this checkbox
enabled, the window will show twelve tabs which are related to each of the twelve available cutting
qualities.
 From Material-thickness dependent data - Automatic Lead-in/Lead-out, the cutting qualities

checkbox is not enabled. If the user wants to configure them depending on material-thickness, first
the Management by qualities checkbox must be enabled on Configure Machine - Cutting machine -
Automatic Lead-in/Lead-out.
69
 Zone: When using automatic leads, the user can choose the place where the system will try first
placing the lead. It is possible to select different positions for exterior contours of parts and for holes.
Figure 11: Automatic lead-in/lead-out zones
 Modify button: A different Lead-in/out type can be assigned per each contour, as shown in the
images provided below:
Figure 12: Lead-in/lead-out types
 Constraints button: Click this button to configure restrictions for the lead-in and lead-out. You can
configure the following parameters:
70
o Minimum length: This is the minimum length in which one lead can be placed.
o Minimum radius: The meaning is the same as the previous parameter, is for security on
placing leads on big enough segments. In this case, the system will look for the radius and if
is not bigger than this value will look for another segment.
o Maximum angle: If the lead is for a corner, if the two segments constitute an angle bigger
than this value, the system will not place the lead and will try with different type of lead.
o Minimum angle: When the lead is for an interior contour, the system will test the angle
between these segments and if is smaller than the value given here, will not place it.
o Maximum angle: The same as previous one, if the angle of the interior contour's segments is
bigger that the value of this parameter, the system will not place the lead.
2.19.8 Micro-joint Values

 Lead-in/Lead-out values (A, D, S & Radius): Specify A, D, S, and Radius values here for lead-in
and lead-out.
 Circle angles: When the micro-joint is assigned manually, the system will try to put it in the exact
clicked point, but this is not always possible. With this parameter, the system will decide where to put
it. The value meaning is the angle step the system will use for placing the micro-joint in relation to
clicked point.
2.19.9 Automatic Micro-joint Values

 Micro-joint types: The system supports automatically different types of micro-joints. For each one,
there are some parameters that must be configured. Introduce D, A, S and Radius parameters.
71
Figure 13: Micro-joint types
 Circle angles: This value is used in order to test positions for placing micro-joints. The meaning is
the angle step the system will use for placing the micro-joints near the clicked point.
 Distance between micro-joints: This is the minimum distance between micro-joints. The system will
not allow placing a micro-joint at a distance lower than this value.
 Minimum number of micro-joint for each contour & Maximum number of micro-joint for each
contour: Using this option, if the contour has a very big perimeter and the maximum number of
micro-joints has been added, the system will distribute the microjoints halfway (without taking care to
the minimum separation). If the contour is small and the micro-joints are too close, the system will
redefine them and will locate them halfway on the contour .
2.19.10 Loop Values
This option allows the user to configure the parameters of the Loop values section in a machine. The
loops are used for improving the quality of the corners of the parts.
The system tries to use loops for corners:
1. If the user configures it in the Save options section of the machine configuration . In these
dialogues, the user can choose if the system inserts loops automatically when saving the part, or
when entering on the nesting module.
2. In Drawing Module, the user can get the Loops toolbar, and execute automatic loops assignation
using the automatic button.
 Maximum angle (W): For the angle round process, the system looks for the segments whose angle
is less than the value entered here for (0-W) section.
 Loops: Loops can also be applied automatically. The user will have to introduce the loop values.
72
 Round angles: With this feature, the machine uses soft movement without hard trajectory changes
on corners. The result is better part machining. Depending on the degrees, the angle is rounded
using the R value. There are two different kinds of contours where a round angle can be applied:
Figure 14: Round angle contours
 Limit angle (Z): It sets the limit to round angles. When the option group (W-Z) is selected, the action
is executed for all the angles fulfilling the following characteristics:
Maximum angle (W) < Angle < Limit Angle (Z).
 Radii: There are two Radii buttons. The first one is for (0-W) fields and the second one is for (W-Z)
fields. Clicking this button takes you to another dialog box, where you can assign round angles to
various cutting qualities. Select ‘Management by qualities’ to manage the loop based on qualities.
2.19.11 Chamfer Values

 Chamfer values: This option allows the user to configure the parameters of the Chamfer values of
the machines. In order to create chamfers, the machine must have a rotation head that allows cutting
in different angles. There are two different kinds of chamfers that can be executed depending on the
parameters:
o Upper chamfering: It will be executed on the upper side of the sheet. For this chamfers, only
the d and a parameters will be used, the rest must be 0.
o Lower chamfering: This kind of chamfer will be executed in the lower side of the sheet and as
in the previous case, only d and parameters will be used.
73
2.19.12 Bridge Values
Bridges are used to join various contours cut with less piercings.
 Maximum length: This value is the maximum distance allowed for creating a bridge between
contours.
 Maximum number: This value is the limit of maximum number of bridges you can have at a time.
The default value is zero, which means there is no limit.
 Parts area (maximum & minimum): With this option the user can define the maximum and minimum
area of parts to have bridges automatically.
2.19.13 Chamfers Management

 Auxiliar elements: The following are the auxiliar elements that the chamfers management consider:
o Minimum length on loops
o Length for auxiliar lead-in
o Length for auxiliar lead-out
2.19.14 Sheet Remnants

 Management by material/thickness: By means of this checkbox the user can decide whether to
manage the sheet remnants depending of material/thickness related parameters or not.
 Minimum area of remnants: This value indicates the minimum area of the remnants to be
considered as such.
74
2.20 CUTTING PARAMETERS
2.20.1 General
 Type of cut: The cut technology of the machine can be selected here: Oxycut, Plasma, High
definition plasma, Laser and Water.
 Cutter radius: This value indicates the cutter radius of the machine in millimeters.
 Piercing radius: Here it is possible to define the piercing radius depending of quality, thickness and
material. This is the area around the piercing point where the system will keep as not usable for
security reasons. The system will use the value given here as the radius of the circle around the
piercing point of non-usable sheet.
 Compensation mode: The three drawings shown below are a visual representation of each
compensation mode. Choosing one of them will determine how the system will apply the
compensation.
Figure 15: Compensation mode
 Number of sheets: Introduce the number of sheets to work with.
 Deal with number of sheets in the system: If enabled, the number of sheets given in the system
will be used. When selecting this option, it is possible to define the Gap between sheets and Total
limit between sheets.
 Gap between sheets: This option will be enabled if the previous one is selected. The user will be
able to define the gap between sheets in millimeters.
 Total limit between sheets: This option will be enabled if Deal with number of sheets in the system
one is selected. The user will be able to define the total limit between sheets in millimeters.
75
 Test collision in the margins of the sheet: The system does not check by default if any part
collides with the margins of the sheet. If enabled, the system will detect such situations while verifying
the machining.
 Automatic control of the focal distance: The focal distance is referred as the position of the laser
beam focus in relation to the top of the plate to be cut. If the machine supports it, if enabled, the
system will use the Automatic control of the focal distance feature.
 Ignore non cut contours: The system allows using non-cut technology, which can be assigned to
geometries that the user does not want to machine like auxiliar geometries. This parameter is most
useful in the nesting module, where if enabled, the nesting will be executed without using the non-cut
contours getting only the rest of the geometries. But if is disabled and some non-cut contours are
included, the nesting will be done using these contours too although they are not going to be
machined.
 There are special cycles: This checkbox determines the way the drawing module will handle the
cycles. If enabled the user will be able to modify simple, lineal and circular cycles by a right click in
the drawing window. If disables, the special cycles options of the drawing module will be disabled too.
 Table height offset: The cutting head must respect this offset for working on a higher height.
Sometimes the sheet is not placed directly over the table because, for example, a special support is
placed in between. In this case, the system should know the necessary height to avoid collisions with
the sheet.
 Texts angular tolerance: Some machines cannot mark text in any angle. With this parameter, the
system is told in which angle the machine can mark texts. The nesting module will orientate the text
depending on the machine limitations. It will be possible to enable the Angle step option.
before making any machine instruction. With this option enabled, the system will show the Cutting
Parameters dialog always when the initialization instruction is executed.
2.20.2 Auxiliar Parameters

 Reference gas: Here the user can select the gas that is going to be used in the laser machine.
Possible gases are Nitrogen, Compressed air or Oxygen. Like in the rest of the system, the < >
symbol indicates any of the elements.
 Nominal power of machine: In order to set up properly the machine the user will have to introduce
the value of the machine power in Watts in this field.
76
 Use default values of tables of technology: With this parameter, the user can indicate whether we
want to use the default values of the technology tables. If we activate this parameter from inside the
nesting we can see that the corresponding fields change for the values of the technology tables, if it is
activated, while initializing the machining the system will take the default values without going to the
configuration window. Once this field is activated we have direct access to the technology tables
window to make the appropriate changes. This parameter will only be shown if the corresponding
A0465 parameter is activated in the CF file. It will be used as default field when there are various
lines with the same machine, material and thickness.
2.20.3 Contour Attributes

 General attributes: The object of all the variables of this dialog is to associate values to contours,
and then these values will be read by the postprocessor in order to execute the actions properly.
o Corner management: The value will be assigned to all the corners of the contour.
o Micro-joint at contour´s end: The value will be applied at contours micro-joint if exists.
o By quality: There is the possibility to filter what micro-joints are going to be valued depending
on quality.
 User attributes (1, 2, 3, 4, 5): These values will be applied to all the contours. Establishing these
values from here will apply them to all the contours of parts in automatic mode.
2.20.4 Compensations by Quality
Using this parameter the user can apply system compensation and/or control corrections depending
on the cutting quality of the parts and the type of cut. This option will allow to define the following
parameters with different for each quality.
o Corrector for holes
o Corrector for exteriors
77
o Compensation radius for holes
o Compensation radius for exteriors
The user will also be able to distinguish between:
o Main contours in no common cut
o Main contours in common cut
o Auxiliary contours in common cut
 Assign this data automatically in the sheet: If enabled, the data set will be assigned automatically
in the sheet.
2.21 COMMON CUTTING PARAMETERS

 Common cut: This parameter configures how the common cut is going to be executed. The user can
select between No, Between two parts and Between several parts. Using ( ) button the user can
configure the Lead-in/Lead-out values of the main and auxiliary contours in common cut.
 Factor for insignificant length: The given value for this factor is the maximum distance the system
will leave without cutting when using the common cut feature.
 Length of pre-cutting elements: This option is enabled when selecting Common cut between
Several parts. If the system is cutting parts together sometimes it happens that already cut parts
should move or incline a little, which is dangerous for the head because of collision. To avoid this kind
of situations, the system allows introducing a security value that will be used so that there are no
collisions.
 It is allowed to reverse contours: This option is enabled when selecting Common cut between
several parts. If enabled, the system will reverse the contour sense of the cut if it suits the process.
 Order by lead-in/lead-out position: This option is enabled when selecting Common cut between
Several parts. When making common cuts among various parts, it is possible to order these cuts so
that the last part cut finishes in the same area where the automatic placement of part lead-ins/lead-
outs are configured. If this parameter is enabled it arranges the part cutting order with the common
78
cut in order to optimize the number of startups so that the part cut always finishes in the same side or
corner of the part. This option is mainly used to get an optimum position for evacuation when part
cutting is finished.
 Execution mode: This option allows selecting the common-cut order that the machine will follow.
Figure 16: Common cut execution mode
 Nesting for common cut: The related options modify the nesting process, allowing the automatic
placement of the parts on the sheet. For working automatically properly, the user should configure the
same settings on nesting for common cut and on common cut, and then, use automatic nesting and
machining. The other way is to place the parts manually on the sheet and, if the common cut is
enabled, the user can make the automatic machining allowing the system to try to apply the common
cut to the manual nesting. The user will be able to select between No, Between two parts and
Between several parts.
 Minimum length: The value given here is the minimum length that the contours must have to apply
the common cut.
 Only between same length elements: The common cut will only be applied if the common contours
have the same length.
 Only place on nesting direction: If enabled, the nesting will be done optimizing the common cut
instead of lower sheet usage. For example:
79
Figure 17: Only place on nesting direction example
In the sheet of the left, the system tries to use the sheet at most placing the two right parts. down on
the sheet. However, on the sheet of the right, the system detects that the common cut is better and
places the part properly.
 Always respect the distance between parts: If enabled, this option makes the system test the
minimum separation between parts among certain elements when performing the common cut. This
option also tests whether the other elements not involved in the common cut respect the minimum
separation between parts. In some cases, it is more restrictive than the user might expect, since two
elements not respecting this minimum distance, prevent parts entering the common cut, when the
user had no problem in bringing these elements closer than that separation between parts.
 System compensation: The user can select to apply system compensation between No, Main
contours and All the contours.
 Islands: Due to the use of common cut, some holes may appear between the parts. The system
provides different treatments for them. The user will be able to select between; No treatment, Cut the
parts inside the islands first, Cut all the islands first and Cut islands when cutting the parts.
2.22 TECHNOLOGY
2.22.1 Lead-in/Lead-out Values
With this option the user can configure the approach parameters of the machine. The user can assign
manually leads for each part, which can be done with the Lead-in/Lead-out toolbar provided both in
drawing and nesting module.
 Lead-in/Lead-out distances: The following options will be applied to any lead inserted manually for
all the jobs of the specified material between the thicknesses given. All the parameters are related to
the length and shape of the leads:
80
Figure 18: Lead-in/lead-out distances
The user will be able to specify D, A, R and S distances for the Lead-ins and Lead-outs.
 Special Lead-in/Lead-outs for circular holes: Select this checkbox in order to enable special Lead-
in/Lead-outs for holes and set their parameters. The user can enter the distance in ‘D’ field, radius
values in ‘R1’, ‘R2’, and ‘R3’ fields. It is also possible to enter the additional distance value in ‘H’ field.
 Circle angles: If the user wants to place the lead manually, sometimes can happen that this lead
cannot be placed in the exact clicked point. The value of this parameter will help to system to decide
where to put it. The meaning is the angle step the system will use for placing the lead.
 Cut the contour: If enabled the system will machine the contour just after the lead is placed.
2.22.2 Automatic Lead-in/Lead-out Values
If the user selects to assign the leads automatically, some parameters must be configured.
81
 Management by qualities: If the cutting qualities are used for the job, the system allows to configure
different values for the Lead-in/Lead-out when using the automatic assignation. With this checkbox
enabled, the window will display twelve tabs which are related to each one of the twelve available
cutting qualities.
 Zone: When using automatic leads, the user can choose the place where the system will try placing
the lead first. It is possible to select different positions for the exterior contours of parts and holes.
There are different types of contours which the system can distinguish. The system will try to insert
the chosen lead type, if this is not possible, will try with second and last with third type. This is a way
of configure different leads for irregular exteriors and let system place the best one in each case.
Figure 19: Automatic Lead-in/Lead-out zones and types
 Modify button: For each contour type, one lead-in/lead-out type can be assigned. The first type will
not assign any lead-in/lead-out to the contour. There are some values to be specified that define the
dimensions of each Lead-in/Lead-out.
82
Figure 20: Lead-in/Lead-out values dialog box
 Piercing radius: This option allows the user defining the piercing radius depending on quality,
thickness and material. These values can be defined depending on the default piercing radius, as a
percentage of it, or as an absolute value. Whenever one of these values changes, the other one gets
updated.
 Constraints button: Click this button in order to configure restrictions for the Lead-ins and Lead-
outs. The user will be able to configure the following Elements where Lead-in/Lead-outs are placed:
o Minimum length: This is the minimum length is which a lead can be placed.
o Minimum radius: In order to make sure that the leads are placed on big enough segments,
the system will look for the radius and if is not bigger than this value, it will look for another
one.
o Maximum angle: In the case of a corner, if the two segments constitute an angle bigger than
this value, the system will not place the lead and will try with a different type of lead.
o Minimum angle: When the lead is for an interior contour, the system will test the angle
between these segments and if it is smaller than the value given here, will not place it.
83
 Maximum angle: The same as previous one, if the angle of the interior contour's segments is bigger
that the value of this parameter, the system will not place the lead.
 Change position in part: This option allows the user to change the position of the lead-in or lead-out
in the part. There are two options: No and Along the cutting sequence.
o No: The system leaves the leads-in/leads-out just as they were defined in the corners of
Holes and Parts.
o Along the cutting sequence: The leads-in/leads-out is modified. In order to avoid it, it is
placed in the nearest hole.
 Change position in sheet: This option allows the user to change the position of the lead-in or lead-
out in the sheet. There are three options: No, Along the cutting sequence, and Avoiding the oxycut
effect.
o Along the cutting sequence: The leads-in/leads-out is modified by selecting this option. They
are placed in the nearest hole in order to avoid them. At the same time it is also possible to
select only for inside or only for inside and outside option.
o Avoid the oxycut effect: It works as the interrogation mark option. This option places the lead-
ins/leads-out to avoid the warming heating of sheet.
 Overlapping test: It is possible to configure checking the overlaps in the automatic lead-ins. This test
will take into account if there will be a pre-punching or a cycle in order to know if the lead-in is
overlapped or not. In case of overlapping, the system will perform the action previously selected
between the following:
o Shorten: The lead-in/lead-out geometry will be shorten trying to avoid the overlapping. The
value is the maximum shortening allowed.
o Change position: The lead-in/lead-out will be placed in other position, and system will try as
different positions as the number given on Number of attempts.
o Change position and shorten: This solution is a combination of the previous. The system will
try on each position to short the lead-in/lead-out geometries and if this not solved the
overlapping, will change the position.
o Change quality: In this case, system will try changing the cutting quality of the lead-in/lead-
out. With this, the configuration for lead-in/lead-out will change getting the values configured
of the new cutting quality.
84
o Change position and quality: On each position, the system is going to try to change the
cutting quality of the lead-in/lead-out, and if not, change position as many times as specified
attempts.
o Change position, quality and shorten: For each position, the system will try changing the
cutting quality, and shorten the lead-in/lead-out on each position, and if the problem persists,
change position as many times as the value given.
o Change quality and shorten: First, the quality will be changed and if still there are overlaps,
the lead-in/lead-out geometries will be shortened.
2.22.3 Micro-joint Values

 Lead-in/Lead-out Values (A, D, S & Radius): Specify A, D, S and Radius values here for Lead-
in/Lead-outs, so that the system uses them whenever placing them.
 Circle Angles: When the micro-joint is assigned manually, the system will try to put it in the exact
clicked point, but this is not always possible. With this parameter, the system will decide where to put
it. The value meaning is the angle step the system will use for placing the micro-joint in relation to
clicked point.
2.22.4 Automatic Micro-joint Values

different values for the micro-joint when using the automatic assignation. With this checkbox enabled,
the window will show twelve tabs which are related to each of the twelve available cutting qualities.
 Micro-joint types: These are all the micro-joints the system supports automatically. For each one,
there are some parameters to configure as shown on the graphs. Enter D, A, S, and Radius
parameters for lead-ins and lead-outs.
Figure 21: Micro-joint types
85
 Circle angles: This value is used for system to test positions for placing micro-joints. The meaning is
the angle step the system will use for placing the micro-joints near the clicked point.
 Distance between micro-joints: This is the minimum distance, the system will not allow placing a
micro-joint at a distance lower than this value.
 Minimum number of micro-joints for each contour: Using this option, if the contour has a very big
perimeter and the maximum number of micro-joints has been added, the system will distribute the
micro-joints halfway (without taking care to the minimum separation).
 Maximum number of micro-joints for each contour: If the contour is small and the micro-joints are
too close, the system will redefine them and will locate them halfway on the contour.
 Copy button: Because there are 12 possible cutting qualities, the same parameter must be
configured many times. For making the data entry easier, Expert provides this button which permit to
copy the automatic micro-joint configuration from existing cutting quality values.
2.22.5 Loop Values

 Maximum angle (W): Maximum angle permitted by the system for Loops.
 Loops: here the user can select the type of automatic Loops and introduce “r” value. For automatic
machining, the loops can be applied in:
o Only in chamfer elements: In automatic mode, the loops are applied only to the chamfers of
the contours.
o Only in round angles: The automatic loops will just be applied to angles.
o In chamfers or in round angles: The automatic machining applies loops in chamfers and
angles.
 Round angles: With this feature, the machine uses soft movement without hard trajectory changes
on corners. The result is better part machining. Depending on the degrees, the angle is rounded
using the R value. There are four different kinds of contours where to apply the angle round; two in
(0-W) section and another two in (W-Z) section. If none of them are chosen, the settings may not
have any effect.
86
 Radii button: There are two Radii buttons. The first one is for (0-W) fields and the second one is for
(W-Z) fields. Clicking this button takes the user to another dialog box, where it is possible to assign
round angles to various cutting qualities. Select Management by qualities to manage the loop based
on qualities.
 Limit angle (Z): It sets the limit to round angles. When the option group (W-Z) is selected, the action
is executed for all the angles fulfilling the following characteristics:
Maximum angle (W) < Angle < Limit Angle (Z).
2.22.6 Chamfer Values

 Chamfer values: This option allows the user to configure the parameters of the Chamfer values of
the machines. In order to create chamfers, the machine must have a rotation head that allows cutting
in different angles. There are two different kinds of chamfers that can be executed depending on the
parameters:
o Upper chamfering: It will be executed on the upper side of the sheet. For this chamfers, only
the d and a parameters will be used, the rest must be 0.
o Lower chamfering: This kind of chamfer will be executed in the lower side of the sheet and as
in the previous case, only d and parameters will be used.
2.22.7 Bridge Values
Bridges are used to join various contours cut with less piercings.
87
 Maximum length: This value is the maximum distance allowed for creating a bridge between
contours.
 Maximum number: This value is the limit of maximum number of bridges the user can have at a
time. The default value is zero, which means there is no limit.
 Parts area (maximum & minimum): With this option the user can define the maximum and minimum
area of parts to have bridges automatically.
 Bridge fitting: This portion deals with the position of the bridges.
 On Corners: The bridges are applied on part's corners. In the example, there are bridges on corners
that allow the user to make all the machining without raising the head.
 Fitting: It is possible to place the bridge on the Left side or the Right side as per your requirement.
2.22.8 Tables of Technology
With all the information recovered on the Nesting - Machining process, the system generates a CNC
program. There are some parameters related to machining which can be configured and assigned to
the different contours of the parts. All of these kinds of parameters which affect the CNC program are
grouped into Cutting qualities. Depending on the cutting quality, each contour will be cut with
different settings.
By default, all the contours have a cutting quality assigned. The tables of technology are structured
in different parameter categories which depend on the configuration made on the filter parameters.
88
Figure 22: Tables of technology
The filter parameters may be different depending on the postprocessor configuration, and the
parameters contained into the categories are different for each postprocessor.
The system will test if the contours have a specific cutting quality assigned, and if so, it will take into
account this table. Depending on the material, thickness, lens, gas and power which is currently
used in the machining order, it will apply the values configured in the different categories.
In this window it will be possible to create a New entry, as well as Delete, Copy…, Import and filter
it by Criteria option located on the filter parameters.
 New: This will create a new entry on the filter parameters.
 Delete: This will delete the current row together with all the given values for the parameters.
 Copy: This will duplicate the current row allowing a faster configuration.
89
 Import: The system will provide the possibility of importing a previous backup of the technological
tables’ configuration.
 Criteria: The system will display a window where the user can choose which rows will be shown on
the screen for making the searching process faster and easier.
 Configure: This allows the user to configure the variables for a particular material and thickness
range defined.
2.23 AUTOMATIC NESTING
2.23.1 General
 Level of optimization: In this field the user can select any of the predefined levels of optimization
from the drop-down list provided. The system provides five predefined levels, each one with their own
set of parameters. The execution time and result of these predefined levels is balanced, that is, the
longer the execution time, the better result. Every one of the predefined levels corresponds to a
predefined Level of optimization configuration. The user can modify the configuration of any of the
existing predefined levels and save it as a user defined level of optimization. The configuration of the
existing predefined levels will not be modified. In order to visualize the parameters of any of the
predefined levels or to modify them and save them as user customized level of optimization, it will be
necessary to click on the arrow button provided next to the drop-down list ( ). If this button is
selected, the system will display Level of optimization window. In this window the user can configure
all parameters related to the level of optimization. Between the fields provided in this window, the
user will only find enabled the ones that correspond to the user optimization and not system
optimization.
90
Figure 23: Level of optimization window
o Use modules: If the user enables this parameter, the system will generate modules of two
parts in Nesting module whenever it is possible. However, the parts in question must fit
together very well so that the system considers them as a module. The system will only use
those ones that provide a good performance.
o Test starting from a different corner for each part: If the user enables this parameter, the
system will use a specific algorithm that places the parts automatically in the different corners
of the sheet. If this parameter is disabled, this is how these parts would be placed in the
sheet.
91
If this parameter is enabled, it will place each part in a different corner of the sheet, achieving an
exceptional efficiency.
o Rotate parts to maximize holes between them: As the name indicates, this parameter will
rotate in order to try creating bigger holes between them. This way, if there is any part that
may fit in the gap created, the user will be able to place more parts and therefore will get a
better efficiency.
If this parameter is disabled, parts are not being rotated and therefore the space that may be
formed inside is clearly not being exploited fully.
If this parameter is enabled, the system will rotate the parts, maximizing the hole between
them. This way it is possible to introduce another part inside and increase the efficiency of the
nesting.
92
o Define the number of irregular methods to apply: The bigger number specified by the user,
the more methods the system will test in order to place the parts and look for the best result.
The system will try several algorithms looking for the best sheet advantage and will use the
ones on which the space profit is best. The number of methods applied will depend on the
number of irregular methods to apply defined by user, which will consequently result in a
longer execution time. Setting a higher value ensures a better result. There are eighteen
irregular methods. The user must try with different values and check the efficiency
percentage in order to select the most suitable one. This option is useful for those cases in
which there are different parts with irregular geometries and small quantities.
o Use regularity method: This parameter adds regular methods to the previous irregular ones.
Both parameters can be enabled at the same time if required. As in the previous case, the
bigger the level selected, the more possibilities to get a better nesting. However, it adds more
testing time to the nesting. This method basically looks for part modules towards a better
sheet efficiency. This parameter is useful for those cases in which there is a big quantity of
the same part (at least to fill half the sheet).
 Level 1: The system will create column modules and apply them with basic
criteria.
 Level 2: The system will modify the column modules created initially, looking
for a better sheet advantage.
 Level 3: The system will create different column sizes. This level will suppose
more testing, therefore the automatic nesting will take more execution time.
 No regularity: Without any regularity method, the nesting of the following part
would be as shown below:
93
- Level 1: Once Regularity method level 1 is activated, the difference would be
remarkable.
o Try to nest in horizontal and vertical: Sheets can be nested horizontally (nesting the sheets
by rows) or vertically )nesting the sheet by columns). If this parameter is activated, the
system will test both horizontally and vertically and will use the one on which the best
efficiency is reached.
o Force a specific precision: If this parameter is enabled, the system will force the precision set
in this field by the user. Whenever activated, the system will display a drop-down list with the
following options:
 Very low (fastest)
 Low
 Normal
 High
 Very high (slowest)
 Value: In this case, the user will be provided with a precision bar in order
to set the required value:
94
Figure 24: Precision bar
o Force a specific rotation angle: Whenever this parameter is enabled, the system will display
the following fields:
 Rotation angle for parts: Select between the provided options in the drop-down list
(15, 30, 45, 90 and 180).
 Search special rotation angles for the parts: If enabled, the system will execute
various tests and search for the most appropriate rotation angle for the parts, which
will result in a better efficiency.
 Force a specific type of modules: If this parameter is enabled, the arrow ( ) button
located on the right side will also become enabled. Whenever the user selects this
button, the system will display Modules window. Here the user can select between
the provided options, which are divided into Simple modules, Complex modules and
Special modules.
Once the user has defined the required parameters in Level of optimization window, it
is possible to save them for a later use by means of Save as… button located at the
bottom of the window. The system will display New reference window where the user
will have to introduce the required name for the level of optimization that has been
defined and click OK button in order to save it.
 Maximum time to calculate the best efficiency: Here the user must introduce the maximum time
that will be taken to test the methods (that have been previously set). Remember that the time must
be introduced in seconds. During the automatic nesting execution, once the time here specified is
reached, the system will stop testing methods and will choose the best one (most efficient) found up
to that moment.
 Precision: This field allows the user setting the required exactitude or preciseness of the automatic
nesting. The user will be provided with a drop-down list with the following five options:
o Very low (fastest): In the case of all those elements that are not neither horizontal nor vertical,
the less precision applied, the system will apply more distance between parts.
o Low
o Normal
o High
95
o Very high (slowest): With more precision, the distance between parts will be closer to the
minimum distance between parts.
The higher the precision level selected, the longer it will take for the system to execute the automatic
nesting.
 Allow part rotations: Depending on the shape of the part it may be very useful to rotate it in order to
get a better nesting. For example, in case of circles, it would not make any sense since their output is
the same whichever the angle the user chooses.
o Rotations: Here the user can select the rotation angle required. The drop-down list provides
the following options: 15, 30, 45, 90 and 180 degrees. For example, given the case 15
degrees is selected, the system will test placing the part on every 15 degrees position, which
will result in 24 tries.
o Search special rotation angles for the parts: Whenever this parameter is enabled, the system
will look for special angles that may be useful for the parts as well as result in a better sheet
efficiency. This parameter will test more rotation angles than in the previous case, and
therefore will result in a longer execution time.
 Separation of parts: Here the user must introduce the required value to use as separation between
parts. This separation value is intended to safeguard the quality of parts. Usually, this value is defined
by the restrictions of the machine that is being used.
 Allow different separation in Y: This parameter is aimed at those cases in which the user works
with big thicknesses. It allows setting a different separation in Y in order to avoid putting a
disadvantage (penalizing) both dimensions due to the auxiliary elements (such as lead-in/lead-outs,
loops and micro-joints).
If this parameter is disabled, the separation between parts either in X or in Y is exactly the same.
The separation between parts will correspond with the value introduced in the previous field.
96
Whenever the user enables this parameter and introduces a different value for the separation in Y
axis, after performing the automatic nesting the difference will be very obvious (as shown in the
image below).
 Allow mirroring: If this parameter is enabled, the system will place the parts in the nesting with
symmetries. However, this parameter is usually restricted by the material that is being used since the
quality is not always the same in both sides of the sheet.
 Fit every part to sheet borders: If this parameter is enabled, as the name indicates, parts will be
fitted to sheet borders. If disabled, the system will always maintain half of the separation set between
parts (based on the value given in Separation of parts field). However, this condition may be
restricted by the machine that is being used.
If this parameter is enabled, the part will adjust either to the sheet margin (in case there is any) or to
the sheet border. If it is disabled, the system will always leave half of the separation between parts
(half of the value given in Separation of parts field).
 Create equal sheets: Here the user will be able to select the required option between the three
options provided in the drop-down list: No, Yes and Ask. Given the case either Yes or Ask option is
selected, the system will check whether it is possible to generate repetitions of the current nesting
(which is already very efficient) if the existing quantity of parts and sheets so permits.
97
 Corner: Here the user will be able to select the required corner from which the system will start
placing the parts. The nesting process will start from the selected corner and continue in the opposite
direction.
2.23.2 Advanced
 Calculate modules for parts: Whenever the user activates this parameter, the system will calculate
modules of two parts always looking for the best efficiency. Once this parameter has been enabled,
the arrow button ( ) located on the right side will also become enabled. Whenever this button is
selected the system will display Modules window. Modules window displays the existing types of
modules, which are divided into three different groups: Simple modules, Complex modules and
Special modules:
Figure 25: Modules window
98
 Simple modules:
o Basic: It is formed by the same part.
o Advanced: It is formed by a basic module and other parts. Once the basic module
has been calculated, the system will fill in the holes left in the nesting with other parts.
 Complex modules:
o Multi-part: It is formed by several parts, which also tries fitting the parts together.
o Staggered: It consists in a staggered combination of the parts.
 Special modules:
o Multitorch: This type of module is specific for machinery with multitorch and will only
be displayed whenever the machine that is being configured has them.
 Nesting priority direction: Sheets can be nested horizontally (nesting the sheet by rows) or
vertically (nesting the sheets by columns). Depending on the measures of the sheet it might be more
efficient to nest in one direction or the other. This parameter provides a drop-down list and allows the
user selecting between Horizontal and Vertical.
o Horizontal: As shown in the nesting below, parts will be placed horizontally.
o Vertical: In this case, parts will be placed vertically.
99
 Rectangular mode is allowed: By means of this parameter, the system allows treating those parts
that are almost rectangular in order to improve the speed of nesting calculations. Given the case this
parameter is enabled, it would be the very first algorithm to execute whenever performing an
automatic nesting. Once this parameter has been enabled, the arrow button ( ) located on the right
side will also become enabled. Whenever this button is selected, the system will display Rectangular
nesting setup window:
Figure 26: Rectangular nesting setup window
o Type: It provides a drop-down list where the user can select the type of rectangular nesting
between the following options:
 Normal: The system will treat parts as rectangles as will search for the best
combination of those rectangles (the ones that meet the Squareness percentage) in
the sheet.
 Optimize for linear cut of parts: In order to optimize linear part cutting, the user must
get the largest number of parts of the same size (both length and width) nested in
columns. This parameter aims to look for part columns with the same width and is
very useful for machines with common cut. Once this option has been selected, the
arrow ( ) button located on the right side will be enabled. If the user selects this
button, the system will display Optimize for linear cut of parts window, where it will be
possible to set the following parameters: Minimum height of the column relative to the
sheet and the Separation of parts in millimeters.
 Optimize for chain cut: In order to optimize chain cutting, nesting will be done in
columns by parts of the same length. The system will apply special bridges between
the parts so that the parts remain in the sheet until the last vertical cut is executed.
Once this option has been selected, the arrow ( ) button located on the right side
100
will be enabled. If the user selects this button, the system will display Optimize for
chain cut window, where the user will have to configure the following parameters:
 Minimum height of the column relative to the sheet: Here the user must introduce the
minimum height of the column by introducing a percentage. This percentage will be
applied to the sheet measures in order to calculate the value in question.
- Separation of parts: The separation of parts can be set either by the Default
value, the Cutter diameter (multiplied by a number) or a fixed Value.
Remember that this separation must be set in millimeters.
- Part type: The user will be provided with the following four options:
- Bridges automatically: If this parameter is enabled, the user can select

between the following two options:
- Bridge width: This parameter will also be enabled. Here the user will be able
to select between The semi-separation of part, Cutter radius (multiplied by a
number) and a fixed Value. Remember that this separation must be set in
millimeters.
o Squareness percentage: The user can introduce the required squareness percentage which
will be used in the system to consider parts as rectangular. If a part does not reach the
percentage set, it will not be considered as rectangular.
o Optimize remnant of the last sheet: Thanks to his parameter, parts can be placed using the
minimum X in order to generate the best remnant possible. Usually, when there is a big job
which includes more than one sheet, this optimization is applied to the last sheet of the job.
101
o Calculation level: This field provides a drop-down list where the user can select between 0, 1,
2 and 3.
 Minimum usable area to insert parts in apertures: Whenever the area of a hole is big enough, if
possible, the system places parts inside them. In this field, the user can introduce the minimum area
required in order to consider a hole as valid for placing parts inside.
 Nesting for kits: This parameter allows prioritizing those parts that compose kits during the
automatic nesting execution. Once this parameter has been enabled, the arrow ( ) button located
on the right side will also become enabled. Whenever this button is selected, the system will display
Nesting for kits window:
Figure 27: Nesting for kits window
o Mix different kits in same sheet: If this parameter is disabled, the system will wait until the
whole kit has been nested in order to start nesting the following kit. On the other hand, the
system will incorporate parts which belong to different kits in the same sheet.
o Use nestings of original kits as modules: Thanks to this parameter if a kit has already
nestings which are very efficient, given the case the measure of the existing sheets and the
number of parts allows it, the previous nestings will be used as modules.
 Part order in nesting: This parameter set how parts will be placed in the nesting. It provides a drop-
down list where the user will be able to select between the following options:
o By area: From the biggest area to the smallest area.
o By rectangular area: Based on external area.
o By perimeter: From the biggest perimeter to the smallest perimeter.
o By length: From the longest to the shortest.
102
 Group parts with similar order value: Whenever this parameter is enabled, the system will prioritize
those methods that introduce the highest number of big parts instead of the ones that place small
parts, regardless of their efficiency.
2.23.3 Unitary
 Sheet margins: Here the user can introduce the required margins for the sheets. These margins will
ensure that the machine does not work outside the sheet as well as leaving enough material so as to
support the parts. The value must be introduced in millimeters.
 Ignore open contours: Whenever this parameter is enabled, the system will not take into account an
open contour (such as, for example, lead-ins) in order to estimate the sheet required.
 Create the sheet in database: If enabled, whenever creating a new sheet for the unitary nesting, the
system will introduce the sheet in question in the database and therefore, it will be displayed in the
sheets list.
 Prompt for this data: If this parameter is enabled, the system will prompt a window asking for this
data whenever automatic nesting option is selected and prior to executing it so that the user can
select the required parameters in each case.
2.24 AUTOMATIC MACHINING
2.24.1 Cut
2.24.1.1 Parts
 Apply Lead in/outs in the part automatically: When the automatic machining option is executed on
drawing module, the system will insert lead in/outs automatically if this parameter is enabled. The
lead in/out will be placed depending on the configuration previously made.
103
 Re-order machining sequence at part level: On drawing module, the system can optimize the
machining process trying to improve speed and movements. This option will make the automatic
machining better when executing it in a part on drawing module.
 Order mode of the holes: With this parameter, the user can order the internal machining of a part.
Until this moment the internal machining of a part was decided by the system by proximity, the user
will be able to define the following parameters:
o By proximity
o By direction
Figure 28: Order mode of the holes dialog box
o Start: The initial machining point will be one of the corners of the part; the selected one or the
closed to the current point before start the internal machining.
o Direction: The cutting direction can be Horizontal or Vertical.
o Orthogonality tolerance: It defines the maximum distance between two holes to be

considered in the same cutting line. This distance is referred to axe – horizontal or vertical.
 System compensation: If enabled the system will manage all the compensation settings. There are
some parameters that have to be properly configured for obtaining a good compensation
configuration. System compensation requires the Cutter radius.
 CN Compensation: If enabled the system will manage all the compensation settings. It will prompt
for the Compensation Index.
 Dwell time of cycles: When there is a cycle, the value given here is the time in second the cycle will
keep on.
104
 Type of cycle: The user will be able to select between the following options:
o Default: If this option is selected, the system will use the type of cycle previously configured in
Configure machines / Postprocessor / Specifics of cut / Dot Cycle by default.
o Drill cycles: All the cycles applied on automatic machining will be drill cycles.
o Switch on/off: All the cycles on automatic machining will be switch on/off cycles.
 Configure: Execution of fixed cycles: If the machine has special cycles (should be configured on
Configure machine / Cutting parameters / There are special cycles) the system can use them
automatically.
Figure 29: Configure: Execution of fixed cycles dialog box
 Use cut cycles in automatic: When the part which is going to be machined has a big number of
holes, the system may take some calculation time for making the automatic machining. Activating this
checkbox will make the system to use cut cycles for enhancing the process speed. But if the area of
the contour is very big, is no convenient to use macros. The “Maximum area for cutting macros in
automatic mode” parameter allows limiting the maximum size for applying macros.
 Maximum area for cutting macros in automatic mode: This parameter allows limiting the
maximum size for applying macros.
105
 Prompt for the from point when machining the part: With this parameter the user can define the
FROM point when machining one part. If the parameter Prompt for the from point when machining the
part in automatic machining is ON, then, when machining one part the FROM point will be asked.
This parameter is also available for combined machines.
 Use fast cut mode in holes (flying cut): With this option the user can perform a new cutting order
for the internal holes of a part. There are some restrictions to define which element of each hole can
be cut in this mode, depending on the minimum radius to keep the arc continuity and depending on
the angular tolerance to join elements in the same cut. The parameters of this option help the user to
define the desired cutting sequence and the order between them.
o Angular tolerance to join elements in the same cutting sequence: With this option, it is
possible to assign the angular tolerance to join the elements in the same cutting sequence.
o Minimum radius to keep continuity in arcs: Using this option it is possible that small radius will
not be taken as continuous elements.
o Union among elements in the same cutting sequence:
 Elements of different type: It allows configuring the possibility to join different

elements (for instance = arcs and segments).
 Elements of same type: It allows configuring the possibility to define equal elements
(always keeping the minimum radius and angular tolerance restrictions) or only join
segments which are in the same line or arcs which are in the same circumference.
o Order mode among cutting sequences: Once the rest of parameters are defined the user will
be able to define the order and select between By Proximity and By parallelism and
concentrity.
o Apply quality: This option enables selecting the desired cutting quality.
o Apply also in circular contours: This option enables the user doing the flying cut of totally
circular contours.
o Changing cutting direction is allowed: This option enables the inversion of the cutting
direction of the circular contours in order to avoid passing above contours already cut.
o Start the fast cut from a specified corner: This option allows the user selecting the starting
corner for flying cut. It must be executed manually (by specifying contours).If this option is not
activated or is in automatic mode, the starting point for flying cut will be the nearest to the
machining point in which the system is.
106
Figure 30: Fast cut mode in holes (flying cut) dialog box
2.24.1.2 Sheets
 Cut the remnant line: When a remnant has been generated, this option allows the system to insert
the CNC code that will separate the remnant from the sheet. For this option it is important to have a
remnant line inserted, which can be configured automatically in Configure machine / Sheet
Remnant or made manually from nesting module. Click Navigation button and the system will display
the following dialog box asking for the data shown:
107
Figure 31: Cut the remnant line dialog box
o At the beginning and at the end of the machining: Depending on each option, the operation
will be done at the beginning or at the end of the machine process.
o At the beginning and at the end of each zone: The operation will be done at the beginning or
at the end of the each zone.
Mode:
o Like contour: The remnant line is cut as any other regular contour, skipping the lines with no
cut technology.
o Like cut movements (from beginning to end): GO TO instructions are inserted between the
sides that are cut. The sides with cut technology are cut starting from one of the ends.
o Like cut movements (starting from the middle): GO TO instructions are inserted between the
sides that are cut. The sides with cut technology are cut starting from the middle towards both
ends.
Direction:
o Like the machining: The direction will be as the one in the machining.
o From bottom to top: The direction will be from bottom to top.
108
o From top to bottom: The direction will be from top to bottom.
 Apply Lead in/outs automatic during nesting: If the parts are placed on the sheet and the Lead
in/outs have not been placed yet, the system will check it and insert them depending on the
configuration previously set in Configure machine / Automatic Lead-in/out configuration.
 Test for parts inside others: If enabled, the system will test whether there are parts inside other
parts or not, as shown in the example below:
Figure 32: Test for parts inside others example
 Cut the sheet framework: When the cutting process has finalized, the system provides solutions for
the sheet leavings. The Cut the sheet framework option makes the machine to cut the scraps in
horizontal and vertical cuts. The Navigation button will show a dialogue where the user needs to enter
some values for the following parameters:
109
Figure 33: Cut the sheet framework dialog box
o Only when the remnant line is cut: If enabled, it will force the script to be cut always after the
remnants have been cut.
 At the beginning or at the end of the machining: Depending on each option, the
operation will be done at the beginning or at the end of the machine process.
 Maximum length in X and Y: It determines the maximum rectangle that will be

generated as scrap.
o Offset in the parts: It is the minimum distance between the cut and the parts
o Offset in the edge of the sheet: It configures the distance between the cut and the edge of the
sheet
o Cut in holes: This checkbox will determine if the holes are going to be cut or not
110
o Start in the middle: Instead of cutting the framework lines from up to down, the segments will
be cut from the middle to one side, and then it will go to the center again and to the other
side. It is possible to make a lead-in/lead-out in the middle of other types of cutting segments
which belong to a sheet framework such as In any cut, Cuts between parts, In cuts outside
parts and In all cuts.
o Order: Using this parameter the user can define the sheet skeleton (frame). The user can
select between:
 By proximity
 Horizontal + Vertical
 Vertical + Horizontal
 Destroy sheet holes: This option allows destroying sheet holes regardless of the sheet framework.
Figure 34: Destroy sheet holes dialog box
o Maximum and minimum length/width of the hole: It is the size of the holes required to destroy
considering the maximum width and length.
111
o Offset in the parts: It is the distance required from the interior cut of the hole to the part
extreme.
be cut from the middle to one side, and then it will go to the center again and to the other
side.
o It is also possible to select the required instruction order: At the beginning of the machining,
At the end of the machining and Before cutting contours.
 Display progress bar: When doing the automatic machining, the system must perform very
complicated internal calculations that may take some time. The user can know what the system is
doing on every moment with the progress bar.
 Delay after completion: After the automatic machining is over, the system can keep the progress
window for a while. This is what the Delay after completion parameter sets.
2.24.1.3 Head Raising Test

 Head raising test: This indicates that the system will have special care with machine head, if
disabled, the automatic machining process will not manage the head movement.
 Make the head raising test while saving: When saving the machining, the system will make several
tests for avoid head collisions. This option can be enabled although the first one is not. In this case,
the treatment will be done only when saving, not when doing the automatic machining.
 Make head test even with head always up: The system will make the test even if the system has
been configured for making all the rapid movements with the head up.
 Maximum hollow & offset: When moving over a hole, the head may result damaged. The distance
has different values depending on the chosen option.
 Maximum length with head down: This is the maximum trajectory in mm described by the head
when is down.
 Maximum number of rapid tracts: The system will try the given number of tracts to avoid holes. In
order to understand what is a tract, the following figures show two examples:
112
Figure 35: Rapid tracts example
 Modify Lead-in/outs: Selecting an option from here will allow the system to change the situation of
lead in/outs to optimize the head management of the machining process.
o By parts: Leads will be repositioned for avoiding cut parts in the rapids movement.
o By contours: The objective with this configuration is not to encounter any cut hole on the
rapid movements.
 Retain lead in/outs defined in part: If the part has Lead-in/outs previously assigned and this option
is enabled, the system will use them. If disabled, the system will erase them and look for the best
position in order to make easier the manual part removal.
 Apply head up at end of each part: When the machining process of a part has been done, the
system will send an order to the machine to lift the head.
 Head up for common cut elements: The special case of common cut elements is what this option
configures. When a common cut element has been finalized, the head will go up.
 Test only with the contours that are in the direction of the movement: If enabled, this option will
avoid already cut holes in the direction of the movement.
2.24.1.4 Machining Order

 Machining order: There are three options available:
o By parts: If the user selects this option, the machining will be ordered by parts. When
selecting this option, the system will provide the user with the following order options: By
zones, Start point and direction, By size (largest to smallest) and By size (smallest to largest).
If this option is selected, Order mode of the holes parameter will become enabled, which
offers the following options: None, By proximity and By direction.
o By contours: If the user selects this option, the machining will be ordered by contours. When
selecting By contours, the user will have to choose between By zones, Start point and
direction, By size (largest to smallest) and By size (smallest to largest) as order mode for the
113
contours. This option will also enable Cut holes first parameter, which as the name indicates,
will first cut the holes and then continue with the rest of the contours.
o Minimum heat: The user can choose between By zones, By parts and By contours.
 Order mode of the holes: This option will only be available whenever By parts machining order has
been previously selected. It allows configuring a new mode of holes distribution. It enables cutting the
small holes that are near larger holes in the first place. It will only be possible to configure it in
Proximity mode only if path optimization is not required. In order to distinguish between large and
small parts, it is necessary to indicate the minimum length and width of the minimum rectangle of a
contour to be considered as a large hole. It will be enough to meet one of these two dimensions in
order to consider the contour as a large hole. It is also necessary to configure the offset in order to
calculate the collision area around large holes. This value will be added from all the sides of the
minimum rectangle of the contour and every small hole located inside that area or that collisions with
it, will be cut before the large hole. The user will be able to choose between the following options:
o None
o By proximity
o By direction
Depending on the option that the user chooses, different options will be shown. For example, when
selecting None, the following dialog box will be displayed:
Figure 36: Machining order dialog box (None order mode of the holes)
When clicking the navigation button, Cut small holes first dialog box will be displayed:
114
Figure 37: Cut small holes first dialog box
On the other hand, given the case By proximity option is selected, the system will display the
following dialog box:
Figure 38: Machining order dialog box (By proximity order mode of the holes)
Here the user will be able to enable Path optimization parameter and select the required Method
between Normal and Optimized.
Finally, if the selected option is By direction, the dialog box displayed will be as shown below:
115
Figure 39: Order mode of the holes (By direction) dialog box
 Only cut holes: If enabled, the system will only cut the interior contours of the part.
 Put in order by qualities: By means of this option, the system provides a way to order the machining
depending on the cutting quality assigned to each contour.
o No: If selected, the system will not order the machining based on cutting qualities.
o By sheet: The machine will cut first all the contours whose cutting quality coincides with the
chosen list.
o By part: The selected order on the dialogue will be followed for each part. When one part has
been finished, the machine will go to order the qualities of another part.
Given the case any of the last 2 options is selected, the system will display the following dialog box
in order to select the desired quality to apply:
116
Figure 40: Put in order by qualities dialog box
 Cut contained contours by zones: This option is used by machines of two axis. One of these axes
allows arriving to all areas of the cutting machine and the other axis has a less course though it is
speeder. There are many machines whose speed movement axis can cover a large area in the
market so for this reason now it is possible to choose the exact moment to cut those contours outside
the area. This option provides a drop-down list with the following options:
o No
o By path in X
o By path in Y
 Whenever either By path in X or By path in Y are selected the navigation button next to them will be
enabled and will display Zone position dialog box.
117
Figure 41: Zone position dialog box
Here the user can select Positions between Fixed, Minimum position and Maximum position options.
It is also possible to introduce the Length of the zone in millimeters. In addition, Order of the contours
that do not fit into the zone parameter provides two options; At the end and As soon as possible.
 Orthogonality tolerance: This parameter will become enabled whenever Start point and direction
option is selected (both in machining order By parts and By contours). It defines the maximum
distance between two holes to be considered in the same cutting line.
 Cut in zig-zag: Depending on the selected starting corner, the machining will go in the selected
direction, going back if cut in zigzag option is enabled. In the following table, there are all the
combinations between directions and zigzag for one corner.
 Corner: The point selected in this field will be the first corner of the machining process.
 Direction: The system will follow the direction selected in this field. The user will be able to select
between Horizontal and Vertical.
 Last side: If enabled, the figure of the sheet will be displayed and the selected side of the sheet will
be the last one to be machined.
 Number of zones: X and Y are the number of zones on which the sheet will be divided. The user will
be able to introduce an Offset percentage as well as to enable Visualize checkbox.
118
2.24.1.5 Mark and Cycles Sequence
 Mark by parts: This option is used to select the text marking sequence. The usual marking sequence
is to mark at the beginning and after cutting all the parts. If enabled, this option will activate all the
following options.
 Mark when cutting the parts: If enabled the system will mark the parts when cutting them.
 Milling cycles execution order: This option allows establishing the order in which milling cycles will
be executed. It till be available after activating the “Cycles when cutting the parts” option. The user
can decide the moment in which each milling cycle associated to a part should be executed.
Figure 42: Milling cycles execution order options
The user can choose between the following options:
o Before cutting the holes: The system will execute milling cycles before cutting the interior
contours of a part. This option is equivalent to the previous functioning mode.
o After cutting the holes: The system will execute milling cycles after cutting the interior
contours of a part.
119
o At the same time as cutting the holes: The system will execute milling cycles at the same
time as it is cutting the interior contours of a part. The system will order the interior cutting
operations and milling operations according to the value set in the “Order mode of the holes”
field.
For example, if the By proximity criterion is selected (as shown in the image below), the system will
execute milling cycles and cut interior contours at the same time and, for the operations order, it will
take into account the distance existing between them.
Figure 43: Order mode of the holes option
 Inkjet texts when cutting the parts: This option allows the user modifying the marking sequence,
proceeding with the cut after the inkjet marking of each part. Therefore the sequence will be: mark
part 1, cut part 1, mark part 2, cut part 2, and so on.
 Cycles when cutting the parts: This option allows the user to define the marking sequence to be
done in automatic machining. If the parameter is on, the cycles will be done before finishing the
machining of each part.
 Order cycles by: The user will be able to choose between X-Axis, Y-Axis and Nearest.
 Generate cycles before mark: If enabled, the system will generate cycles before marking.
 Generate cut and other technologies in the same subprogram: If enabled, and only if the system
is configured to generate the cutting and marking into the same subroutine, the system will do so.
120
2.24.1.6 Advanced
 Group cycles on Lead-ins by rows/columns of parts: Thanks to this option, it is possible to group
some cycles by rows or by columns.
o Generation of labels: This parameter indicates whether labels will be generated or not, as
well as which one will be the label type. The user will be able to select between No generate,
By parts and By group.
o Orthogonality tolerance: This parameter indicates the maximum tolerance (respecting the X
or Y axis) between two parts to be considered as they are in the same column or row.
2.24.1.7 Modify Lead in/outs
2.24.1.7.1 General
 Modify Lead-in/outs position: The user can select between the following options:
o No: If selected, the system will not perform any modification.
o Smooth tool path: This option allows to move the Lead-in/outs automatically in order to avoid
strong movements between them. Therefore, if after a Lead-out there is a rapid, the system
will try to smooth this movement by moving the rapid tangent to the Lead-out. The user will
have to introduce the Angular error tolerance, Number of passes, Number of test for each
contour and It is allowed to reverse contours checkbox.
o Place in one touch figures: This option allows modifying the Lead-in position and prioritizing
their placement in notches. When enabled, Number of test for each contour and It is allowed
to reverse contours options will be enabled.
o Place by proximity: By means of this option the user can place the Lead-in/outs in such a way
that the distance between the Lead-out and the next Lead-in is reduced to the minimum.
 Modify Lead-in/outs data: The user will be able to select between the following options:
o Put the Lead-in/out in bisector: This option modifies the Lead-in/out to the bisector of the
existing Lead-in/outs. When selecting the Navigation button, a dialog box will be displayed.
o Put the Lead-out like the Lead-in: This option modifies the Lead-out similar to the Lead-in.
o Modify tangent arc Lead-in by 2 segments: This option allows the user to convert a tangent
arc´s Lead-in to segments Lead-in.
121
2.24.1.7.2 Apply a GAP
 Apply a GAP in Leads-in/Leads-out: With this option the user can apply a GAP (Micro-joints at the
end of the contour) in all the contours of the part. The system will leave a GAP before ending each
contour. There are two restrictions.
o Type of Lead-in/out
o Maximum angle to apply the GAP
 Value (d1): Select between:
o Fixed: If the user wants the gap to be based on a fixed value then select Fixed value. It is
possible to enter the required fixed value in Value field.
o Percentage of sheet thickness: If the user wants the gap to be based on the sheet thickness
select this option. Introduce the sheet thickness percentage in Value field.
o Automatic depending on cutter radius: If the user wants the gap value to be calculated
automatically based on the radius value select this option. Set the Offset (d2) field.
 Offset (d2): The user will be able to select between the options shown below:
o No: Offset is not required.
o Fixed: Set a fixed offset distance.
o Percentage of cutter radius: Set the offset based on cutter radius percentage.
o Percentage of sheet thickness: Set the offset based on sheet thickness percentage.
Figure 44: Offset example
122
2.24.2 Machining by Zones
 Machining by zones: This option allows cutting the parts by zones and extracting their remnants
whenever finishing the cut. This is normally used in case of very big sheets which are always moved
in the same directions where it is necessary to cut and extract the sheet framework at the same time.
With this type of machines, it is also possible to nest by zones and cut each zone separately. Working
this way causes less sheet usage. Select the required mode from the Machining by zones window,
where you will also be able to indicate the length per each zone.
 Length of the zones: Introduce the required length of the zones.
Inside the machine configuration of machining by zones it is necessary to configure a series of

parameters:
o Nesting by zones: When selecting this option, it is possible to nest the parts automatically by
zones. Click the navigation button attached to this option and Nesting by zone dialog box will
be displayed:
Figure 45: Nesting by zones dialog box
 Zone offset: Margin of the zone.
123
 Overlay zones: This option allows the user to overlap the different zones. If this
option is activated, the new zone will begin at a specific distance before the end of
the previous zone.
 Margin between zones: The margins between zones. The user will need to select
between The separation of parts, Twice the separation of parts and Value
 Minimum length for each zone: Here the user will be able to define the minimum
length for each zone.
 Minimum length for the last zone: Here the user will be able to define the minimum
length the last zone.
 Create a remnant line: By selecting this option, the user will be able to define the
remnant line. It will be possible to define the remnant line type (Linear, True Shape
(Real), and True Shape), Minimum width, Minimum length of the sheet to put the
remnant line, as well as the Distance from the parts (The separation of parts, The
semi-separation of parts and Value).
The True shape remnant line that the system uses is the true shape line formed
by segments. The line does not make full use in all cases of the holes that exist between
the parts that delimit the line. However, the True shape (real) allows the user to choose
as remnant line the true shape line that tries to follow the shape of the contours of the
parts that it is delimiting. In this way, it is possible to gain material which may be usable
for the next zone.
o Cut by zones: This option allows cutting the parts by zones and extracting their remnants
whenever finishing the cut. It is useful for machines that use very big sheets, which are
always moved in the same directions and where it is necessary to cut and extract the sheet
framework at the same time.
With this type of machines it is also possible to nest by zones and cut each zone separately.
Working this way causes less sheet usage. It is possible to select which one of the two modes
available is required from the Machining by zones window, where the user will also be able to
indicate the length per each zone. When selecting the Navigation button, the following dialog
box is displayed:
124
Figure 46: Cut by zones dialog box
Configure the following parameters:
 Generate remnant line: This option indicated that it is required to cut the sheet
framework or, on the contrary, it is only required to cut the parts by zones.
 Previous offset to move to zone line (p): This is previous offset margin that the
system will use in order to find the best coordinate to carry out the cut of the remnant
line.
 Next offset to move the zone line (n): It is the succeeding offset margin that the
system will use in order to find the best coordinate to carry out the cut of the remnant
line.
 Vertical torch offset: It indicates the distance from which the machine will start cutting
from the sheet edge. Normally, the distance is the half of the cutter radius, given that
it will be used to make sure that the cut is executed on the material.
125
 Maximum distance to eliminate the last cut line (m): This indicates the distance of the
sheet border from which it will be possible to cut the remnant line, given that the area
of the sheet left is considerably small.
2.24.3 Component Removal
This section allows assigning evacuators to all sheet parts. The system provides two different
configurations for evacuations of parts and holes, whose options will be shown in two different tabs. All
the parameters are the same but they will be applied for parts or for hole depending on which tab the user
configures them.
 Put a stop: After every evacuation movement, the machine can be stopped if this option is enabled. If
selected, some parameters must be configured.
 Micro-joints: If selected the system will automatically apply micro-joints as evacuation method
depending on the values given on the following parameters. When selecting the Navigation button,
the following dialog box is displayed:
Figure 47: Micro-joints dialog box
o The width of micro-joints is a thickness factor: If this parameter is enables, there are two
values to configure: Factor of thickness for corner micro-joints and Factor of thickness for
middle micro-joints.
o Maximum length without micro-joints: This is the maximum distance allowed to part contours
without micro-joints.
 Move the Lead-in/out: The system will try to move the Lead-in/out in order to improve the manual
part removal, always trying to leave the head in the best position.
126
 Number of attempts: The number here introduced refers to the number of attempts the system will
use in order to move the Lead-in/out.
 Lead-in/out placement: The user can choose where to place the Lead-in/out and the system will
calculate the best position for each part.
 Retain Lead-in/outs defined in part: If the part has Lead-in/outs previously assigned and this option
is enabled, the system will use them. If disabled, the system will erase them and look for the best
position in order to make easier the manual part removal.
 Minimum radius: If the part or hole to evacuate is smaller than this minimum radius, the system will
not remove it from the sheet.
 Removal speed: This parameter allows configuring the speed of the lift system removal.
 Dwell time: This is the delay time for closing the tramp. Sometimes the tramp closes early and the
part cannot go into the box. This value adjusts the time the tramp remains open.
2.25 TIME CALCULATION
2.25.1 Cutting Parameters
2.25.1.1 General
 Piercing time: This is the time the machine takes to perform a piercing. The user will be able to
select between three options:
 Fixed: Expert will add one second each time the machine executes a piercing.
 By thickness: The system will add 0.5 seconds for each mm of the thickness.
 Tables of technology: The system will get the value from the Tables of technology.
 Piercing time percentage for pre-cut or pre-punched points: Thanks to this parameter the user is
allowed to define the piercing time, when the piercing point is pre-cut or pre-punched, in relation with
the regular piercing time.
127
 Cut & mark speed: These are the speeds for making time calculations.
 Active: Means that Expert will make the time estimation with the current active speed.
 Tables of technology: Means the speed will be taken from the Tables of technology.
 Cancellation time: This is the time the machine takes to stop everything after the machining process.
It is possible to define whether to calculate the cut stop time considering a fixed value or those values
given in the technology tables. Given that this parameter consists in cut stop time calculation
considering the values given in the technological tables, is only valid for water machines and regards
values such as: Final time (cutting) or Abrasive cancellation time.
2.25.1.2 Technology Change

 Times of technology changes: The following ones are the times the machine takes for changing the
current technology, which are normally very short time durations:
Figure 48: Times of technology changes table
2.25.1.3 Quality Change

 Times of quality changes: When using different cutting qualities , the changing time between each
one should be set by filling the table shown below:
128
Figure 49: Times of quality changes table
2.25.2 Reposition / Extractions

 Reposition: In this section the user can specify the time the machines takes to perform a reposition.
It is divided into the following sections:
o Head: Down time and Up time are the times to lower and raise the head when doing a
reposition.
o Pistons: Down time and Up time are the times the pistons take for making down and up
movements.
o Auxiliar time: This value will be added to reposition time estimation. It depends on the way
each machine performs the repositions.
 Component removal: This section refers to the time the evacuation system will take in order to get a
component from the sheet.
o Extract time with lift: The time of evacuation by lift will take set up depending on the lift and
the movement it makes.
o Extract time using work chute: Here the user will be able to define the Dwell time, Opening
and Close for traps.
2.25.3 Rapid Accelerations
In this window the user will have to configure the speeds and accelerations of the machine in the
table provided.
 New: Click this button to create new acceleration parameters.
 Delete: Click this button to delete the required acceleration parameter.
2.25.4 Linear Cut Accelerations
In this window the user can configure the speeds, accelerations and decelerations of the machine.
 Maximum speed (90º): The user will be able to select between Active and Tables of technology.
129
 Speed: Here it is possible to define the maximum speed at which the machine can cut a corner of
90º.
 New: Click this button to create new acceleration/deceleration parameters.
 Delete: Click this button to delete the required acceleration/deceleration parameters.
2.25.5 Circular Cut Accelerations
In this window the user will have to configure the acceleration/deceleration times of the machine in
the table provided.
 New: Click this button to create new acceleration/deceleration parameters.
 Delete: Click this button to delete the required acceleration/deceleration parameter.
2.25.6 No Cut
This window allows setting up the time Expert will add to estimation when one of these
postprocessor words is going to be executed.
 Optional stop time: Here the user can set the optional stop time.
 Unconditional stop time: Stops: Here the user can set the unconditional stop time.
 Refrigeration: Time the refrigeration system of the machine takes to work. The user can set
Activation time and Cancellation time.
 Head: When Head-up or Head-down words are found in the CNC code, Expert will use the times set
here in Up time and Down time fields.
 Sheet Clamps: Here the user will be able to set the Blocking time, Up time, Down time, Cancellation
time (OUT), Cancellation time (OFF), Opening time and Closing time of the sheet clamps.
2.25.7 Upload/Download Sheets

 Upload times: Here the user will be able to set the Manual upload time, Automatic upload time,
Clamps test time and Auxiliar time.
130
 Download times: Here the user will be able to set the Manual download time, Automatic download
time and Auxiliar time.
2.26 COST CALCULATION

Lantek Expert will perform the sheet of job cost calculation if the following values are configured
properly. They will give a different cost to each different entity that is part of the sheet or job.
 Area: The following are the different options to configure the part area to be used in cost calculation:
o Rectangle area: Minimum boundary box of the part.
o External area: External area of the part with internal holes.
o Real area: External area of the part without internal holes.
o Rectangle with offset: When selecting this option, the system will increase the size (offset) of
the element only for calculation of cost for the minimum boundary box of the part.
o External with offset: When selecting this option, the system will increase the size (offset) of
the element only for calculation of cost for external area of the part with internal holes.
o Real with offset: When selecting this option, the system will increase the size (offset) of the
element only for calculation of cost for the external area of the part without internal holes.
 In order to work with offset the user will have to navigate to Cost of material window and
configure the required Offset and Minimum radius for holes.
The selected type of area is used to calculate the necessary material used to produce the part, which in
turn is used to calculate the cost of the part.
 New: Click this option to fill in the table with Material type and Thicknesses and create a new record.
 Configure…: Click this button in order to access the table where the cost parameters for all the
machining operations can be set up. The system will display Costs consumables dialog box when
selecting Cost of consumables option or Cost of material dialog box when selecting Cost of
material option. Cost of consumables dialog box will display five parameters which will determine
how the calculation will be made:
131
o Operation: The operation selected here will be included into the cost calculation each time
the machining executes it. The operations will be different depending on the machine type.
o Mode: The mode determines how the cost given in the value parameter will be added into the
calculation.
o Consumables: The consumables can be defined together with the price of volume unit in the
Raw materials option of the system.
o Value: This parameter will increase the total expense of the machining process depending on
the calculation mode.
o Units: Number of units.
 Delete: Click this button in order to delete the selected record from the table.
 Copy: This option is very useful when the configuration of different materials and/or thicknesses is
similar. By means of this option the user can copy all the cost configuration parameters into a new
material/thickness assignation.
 Criteria: The list of materials and thicknesses can be filtered by means of this option. The system will
only show the range set in this window. The "< >" character means any material.
2.27 INK-JET
 Automatic: If enabled, the system will introduce the Ink-jet text introduced here on every part of the
sheet automatically.
 Text data: The text given here will be marked into the part. Introduce the required values in Length of
one character, Height of one character, Horizontal separation between characters, Vertical separation
between characters and Correct position.
 Correct position: The values of the Offset (X and Y) will determine the distance between the
external contour of the part and the marked text. But if there is a hole where the marked text should
be, the user can configure the distance from the initial point at which the system should try again.
This distance will be introduced in Search Step field X and Y.
 Rotate the text with the part: The text will be marked in the part always in the same position as the
part is placed in the nesting.
132
 Delete the text if it does not fit in the part: If enabled, the system will delete the text that does not
fit in the part. This option will only be activated once Rotate the text with the part checkbox is
activated.
 Reference text: With this option the user can define the reference text for the Ink-jet marking. Every
time this reference text is found in a part, the system will replace it by the text previously introduced in
Text field.
2.28 POSTPROCESSOR
2.28.1 General
 Machine tolerance: It refers to the precision of decimal numbers that the machine supports. It is
important to configure this parameter properly because if the system is sending coordinates with
different precision, the machine may not work correctly.
 Postprocessor configuration file: This is the name of the specific postprocessor file. Manipulating
this file will result in CNC code generation way changes. Also the user can edit the PS parameters of
the Postprocessor configuration file.
 Tables of technology file: This is the name where the technological tables’ values will be stored.
The user can edit PS parameters of this file.
 Time calculation file: This file will contain time calculation parameters, here the name of the file can
be configured. Also the user can edit the PS parameters of the time calculation file.
 Cost calculation file: The cost calculation parameters will be stored in this file, here the name can
be set up. The user can edit PS parameters of the file.
 Seed file: The user will be able to visualize the seed file of the active machine.
 Technological configuration file: The user will be able to visualize the Technological configuration
file which provides all the general data.
 Material/thickness dependent data: The user will be able to visualize all the material/thickness
dependent data, which is the same file as Technology table file, but can be located in a different path.
If the path coincides, this one will be enabled.
 Data for the postprocessor file: The user can visualize the Data for the postprocessor file.
133
 Communication configuration file: The user can visualize de Communication configuration file.
 Pallet file: The user can visualize the Pallet file.
2.28.2 Block Numbering

 Block number text: Each CNC block will start with the character given here. However, the block
number hast to be configured through the following parameters:
 Number of characters allowed for block number: It refers to the digits that the block number will
have. For example, if the text of block number is N:
o N00001…
o N00002…
o N00003…
 Strip leading zero´s: If enabled, the system will delete the zeros of the CNC block numeration.
 First block number: The number of the first block can be set up here.
 Step between block numbers: The line for each block of the CNC code will start with the Text of
block numbers and the First block number for the first block, and the rest of lines will increase the
number of the value given here on this parameter.
2.28.3 Free Tape

 Number of null characters at beginning: Indicates the number of null characters at the beginning of
the file for synchronization.
 Number of null characters at end: This is the number of null characters at the end of the CNC code
which will be output from the system.
 ASCII code of null characters: American Standard Code for Information Interchange of null
characters.
134
2.28.4 Specifics of Cut
 Default technology: This technology will be applied to the geometry. The user can select between
Cut and Mark.
 Dot cycle by default: The postprocessor is going to apply this default dot cycle if there is not any
specific cycle applied in Machining / Cycles section. For all the dots drawn on the drawing module,
the system will introduce the cycle type chosen here between Drill cycle or Cut on and off.
 Technological index by default: Depending on the default technology, the index given here will be
applied to the geometry from the moment it has been generated. Clicking the navigation button the
system will show a dialogue with all the cutting qualities.
 Circles in one movement only: The Numeric Control needs a specific instruction in order to
generate a circle. Normally the system divides the circle into two arcs which execute two instructions.
This parameter should be enabled so that Numeric Controls work properly and circles are created
only in one movement.
 Modify the center of the circles: When the tolerance of the machine is small, the system changes
the center of the circles for making those points recognizable for the machine.
 Arcs in one movement only: When there is a micro-joint inserted in a circle, the resultant arc is
below 360º and, normally, is divided into two arcs. If enabled, the system will generate this arc in just
one instruction.
 Type of leading in circles: In this field the user will be able to select between the following options:
o No: The postprocessor is going to use the configuration made in automatic lead-in/out on
circles.
o Linear: Independent of the configuration made in automatic lead-in/out on circles, the CNC
code will be generated placing a lineal lead-in whose length will be specified on the Length of
leading in circles parameter.
o Circular: The postprocessor will not take into account the configuration made on the system,
and it will place a circular lead-in on circles whose length will be taken from the Length of
leading in circles parameter.
 Linear tolerance: This value is the linear tolerance for calculations of the system. It should be the
same as the value configured in Utilities / Configure machines / General / Linear tolerance.
135
 Angular tolerance: The system will use this angular tolerance value for calculations. It should be the
same as the value given in Utilities / Configure machines / General / Angular tolerance.
 Length of leading in circles: If there are arc geometries smaller than the machine tolerance, the
system will decompose them into one or more segments whose length will be the configured at
Length of broken segments parameter.
 Minimum length of arc: If there are smaller arc geometries than the machine tolerance, the system
will decompose them into more segments whose length will be the one configured at Length of
broken segments parameter.
 Length of broken segments: The value introduced in this field will be the maximum length for a
segment.
 Process micro-joints like micro-welds: This option can be only used for those machines that
support micro-welding technology. If enabled, the system will order the machine to use micro-welding
instead of micro-joint instructions.
 Centre the multitorch: When a machine is multitorch, there is always one which is the Control
Torch. All the torches follow the control torch movement. If this control torch is not placed on corners,
the system must know which torch will be the control torch. If enabled and if the number of torches is
odd, the system will take the torch of the center. If the number of torches is par, it will take the most
centered one nearest to the position of the control torch.
2.28.5 Reserved
Do not modify these parameters without consulting a skilled technician, they are internal parameters
and may cause machine damage if they are changed without knowledge.
136
CHAPTER
3
3 JOBS
3.1 CLOSE
Close ( ) option allows the user to close the active job.
3.2 RECENTS
This section provides information about the Recent jobs and Recent kits opened.
3.3 JOBS
New ( ) option allows the user creating new jobs. In order to Create a new job, perform the
following steps:
1. Click New option and the system will display Job dialog box as shown below:
137
Figure 50: Job dialog box
2. Introduce the required data in the fields provided. The different fields in this dialog box are briefly
described below:
o Reference: Unique reference code assigned to the job. The system assigns automatically this
code.
o Name: Name of the job.
o User data (1-5): Data of the job. The user can also navigate to the existing Data list and
select the required element or enter a new element, which will be added in the Data list for
future use.
o Description: Additional details of the job.
3. Click OK button in order to save the changes.

138
Open ( ) option allows the user opening an existing job. In order to open an existing job,
select the required job from the existing list and the system will open it.
Edit ( ) option allows the management of jobs so that the user can modify the required data.
Click this option and the system will display Jobs dialog box as shown below:
Figure 51: Jobs window
4. The different fields of this dialog box are briefly described in the following lines:
 Delete associated elements: If enabled, the associated elements of the job will be deleted.
 Delete parametric elements only: If enabled, the parametric elements of the job will be deleted.
This field will only be available when Delete associated elements checkbox is selected.
139
 Delete the manufacturing order associated to the job: If enabled, the manufacturing order
associated to the job will be deleted.
 Export: Select this option in order to export a job. Perform the following steps:
1. Select the job that to be exported and click Export. The system will display Directory dialog
box.
2. Select the required folder from this dialog box and click Select.
3. The selected job will be exported.
 Create: Select this option in order to create a new job. Perform the following steps:
1. Click Create button and the system will display Job dialog box.
2. Introduce the required details in the dialog box provided and click OK.
3. The created job will appear in the list of Jobs dialog box.
 Modify: Select this option to modify the information of an existing job. Perform the following steps:
1. Select the job whose information is required to be modified. Click Modify and the system will
display Job dialog box.
2. Modify the required information and click OK button in order to save the changes.
 Delete: Select this option in order to delete a job. Perform the following steps:
1. Select the job that is required to be deleted. Click Delete button.
2. The system will display a warning message asking whether the user wants to delete the
selected job.
3. Click Yes and the selected job will be deleted.
 Close: Select this button in order to close Jobs dialog box.
3.4 KITS
New ( ) option allows the user creating new kits. In order to Create a new kit, perform the
following steps:
140
1. Click New option and the system will display Kit dialog box as shown below:
Figure 52: Kit dialog box
2. Introduce the required data in the fields provided. The different fields in this dialog box are briefly
described below:
o Reference: Unique reference code assigned to the kit. The system assigns automatically this
code.
o Name: Name of the kit.
o User data (1-5): Data of the kit. The user can also navigate to the existing Data list and select
the required element or enter a new element, which will be added in the Data list for future
use.
o Description: Additional details of the kit.

141
Open ( ) option allows the user opening an existing kit. In order to open an existing kit, perform
the following steps, select the required kit from the existing list and the system will open it.
Edit ( ) option allows the management of kits so that the user can modify the required data.
Click this option and the system will display Kits dialog box as shown below:
Figure 53: Kits dialog box
3.5 INFORMATION
Properties ( ) allows the user viewing and editing the information related to the active job. When
selected, the system will display Job dialog box, in which the user can introduce the reference, name and
user data, as well as the description of the job selected.
142
Export ( ) allows the user exporting the current job with all the necessary information, such as
parts, nestings and machining backup files between many others to the required directory.
In order to Export a job perform the following steps:
1. Select the job to be exported and then click Export. The system will display Database dialog box
as shown below:
Figure 54: Database dialog box
2. Introduce the Directory in which the job will be exported, or click Navigation button in order to
select it.
3. Click OK button and the system will export the selected job (The user will be able to visualize
System is working loading window until the loading process is finished).
4. The selected job will be exported with all the necessary information such as parts, nesting,
machines back up files, etc.
Subjobs ( ) comprise the different parts that compose a job grouped by machine, material and
thickness. Therefore, a job will contain as many subjobs as machine-material-thickness combinations.
When selecting this option, the Subjob selection dialog box is displayed:
143
Figure 55: Subjob selection dialog box
 Modify: When clicking this button, the system will display a dialog box in which the user will be
able to modify the Machine, Material and Thickness of the selected job.
 Close: This button allows closing Subjob selection dialog box.
3.6 HELP
In this section, the user will find useful information in Documents and Online Resources.
User Guide option enables getting instructions and suggestions to work more effectively and
proficiently. Whenever it is selected the user will be provided with two options in the drop-down list:
Contents of the help system option will open the online help designed to give assistance in the
use of the software application.
Tutorial option introduces all the important modules, basic concepts and relevant functionalities of
the software.
New Features option allows the user discovering all the new features and enhancements included
in this new software version.
144
Technical information option provides information related to specification and technical requirements of
the system.
Web Page option provides access to our Main Page and Product Home Page. The Main Page
displays all information related to our company, solutions, products, support, partners, news, events and
customers. On the other hand, the Product Home Page provides all the technical characteristics,
technology, advantages, specifications and management of the product.
Register option allows the user obtaining the rights to the guarantee and access to technical
information and support. There are two types of register:
Web registration: The user can fill in the registry form in our Website.
Manual registration: The user can introduce the required information, read the license agreement in
detail and accept it before sending it.
Send comments and suggestions option, as the name indicates, allows the user informing
Lantek of any comments and/or suggestions.
Contact technical support option will open support section of our website where the user will be
able to contact Technical Support Department and Customer Service.
In addition to the previous options, it is very important to mention that located on the right side of the
window, the user will be provided with information about the Version, License and Serial Number of the
Lantek key.
145
Figure 56: About Lantek Expert
3.7 PRINT
This section allows the user printing the Most recent lists and All the installed lists. When clicking
Configure lists option, Lists dialog box is displayed, allowing the user to create new custom lists, install
them or remove them from the list.
3.8 CONFIGURATION OPTIONS

Configuration options section is used to configure different options that are used in Expert software. By
means of this option the user can get all the relevant configuration details at a glance. The system will
display the following:
146
Figure 57: Configuration options backstage page
All Configuration options will be displayed together with a brief description, which enables the user to
access the required option in a more user-friendly way.
147
3.8.1 General
Using this option, the user can configure different parameters related to the Nesting module. The system
will display Configure: System window as shown below:
Figure 58: Configure: System window (Main module)
 Units: The system will use the unit system selected as Metric or Imperial.
 Work with automatic references: If enabled, the system will automatically create the automatic
references for the newly created parts/sheet. If Mandatory is activated the user will not be able to edit
the created reference.
 Visualize information about the management system: With this option, the user can view the
information related to the management system.
148
 Allow to change the status of the nestings: In this section the user will be able to select between
No, Workshop, Available and Both of them. When any of the last three options is selected, the option
Save as… will be displayed in Nesting and Machining module.
 Allow to unblock available nestings or workshop nestings: If enabled, the system will unblock all
the remnants which have been generated when doing the nesting. This ensures that the generated
remnants will be used for future jobs.
3.8.2 Draw and Nest
This option enables the configuration of the parameters corresponding to Drawing and Nesting. The
system will display Configure: Draw and Nest window, which is composed of six different tabs that
separate the parameters per the following groups:
3.8.2.1 General
 Import parts that do not exist: Enable this option to import parts that do not exist.
 Overwrite quantity when importing existent parts: Select this option to overwrite the quantity of
the parts when importing the existent parts, or when a part already exist in the database with a
defined quantity and the user imports the same part again. The system can be configured to add the
quantity of the new part to the previous one or to replace the old quantity by the new one.
 Warn in case of changing the material, thickness or machine of a machined part or with
technology or nested: Select this option to get a warning message while changing the material,
thickness or a machined part.
When modifying and/or importing a part, if it already had technology assigned or was machined, the
system will allow the user to create a new part coming from the original. If enabled, the system will
allow overwriting the part or creating a new one.
Now the system will warn if the part has been nested. Besides, when the warning is shown, it says
how the part is, whether it has been only machined, or it only has technology or whether it has the
three things.
When selecting this option, the system allows selecting the Allow to create a copy of the part
option.
149
 Large icons: This option permits the visualization of the icons of the main window in a large format.
 Warn parts without geometry detection entering nesting and machining module: Select this
option to get warning message if parts are detected without geometry.
 Put together equal parts in the nesting and machining module: It is possible to group the parts
with the same reference from a subjob. It may happen that a subjob could have the same part
reference several times because this parts needs to be manufactured for different manufacturing
orders (different sale order, customer, etc.). In such cases, it is possible to group, visualize and
manage these different manufactures like if they were just one in Nesting and Machining module.
The part quantity to be nested will be the sum of the quantities of the manufacturing orders of the
part. The distribution of the parts in the nesting will be automatically made following a configurable
distribution criteria. The user can configure one of the following distribution options: Labor ticket,
Priority, Quantity, Nested quantity, Pending quantity, Proportional quantity and Product. The
distribution criteria can be applied in a descending or ascending way.
It is also possible to configure if the user wants to group the parts or not when the workshop sheet is
printed.
Figure 59: Put together equal parts in the nesting and machining module dialog box
 Release unnested parts: In order to release unnested parts, select the required option from the
drop-down list provided: No, Always and Ask.
 Release unnested parts of filling hollows free: When importing parts from the database, the user
will have two options depending on a parameter: parts of filling hollows or normal parts.
 Delete the CNC when deleting the nesting: Select this option to delete the CNC code while deleting
the nesting.
 Only one machine, material and thickness for a job: Select this option to make sure that there is
only one machine, material and thickness is used for a particular job.
150
 Only one machine, material and thickness for a kit: Select this option to make sure that there is
only one machine, material and thickness is used for a particular kit.
 Create a .ZIP file of the exported job: Select this option to create a .zip file of any file which is being
exported. The user can also create a .ZIP file from an exported manufacturing order. The
compressed file will be stored in “Lantek \ Expert \ Export \ M.O. name \”.
 Work with the machine files in network: With this option, the user can work with the machine files
which are in the network, networking with all or some machine files. Supposing that all the users are
on the same network, the way the system will work as follows:
1. The first user configuring the system to work in this way, the system will copy the local machine
desired file or files into a defined network directory and will start working with this copied file.
2. The following users will be able to join to this network but their local machine files will not be
copied into the network directory.
When clicking the navigation button the system will display Machine files in network dialog box as
shown below:
Figure 60: Machine files in network dialog box
There are some restrictions to work with some machine files:
151
If the user uses networking with the Material-Thickness files and not with the CT (Technological
Configuration) files, when configuring the CT file to work through the network (in the future) the user
may have problems because the CT parameters will not be copied to the network directory.
The following applications are not working through the network = PrepMach, ExpSetUp and
MchSetUp.
 Automatically refresh the job and kit explorer: This option allows the user to refresh the tree and
to update it in case of changes on the database. Apart from refreshing the explorers previously
mentioned, this option also enables updating the current manufacturing order, refreshing the active
views at the moment of the execution.
In addition, it is possible to configure the system to execute a complete refresh automatically every
certain time. The user can activate or deactivate Automatic refresh option and indicate the required
periodicity for the update in case the option is enabled.
3.8.2.2 Auxiliar
 Adjust sheets to sides: If this parameter is activated, the sheets are drawn in one corner of the
graph area. If deactivated the sheets are adjusted to the center of the graph area. Activation of this
parameter is recommended since, if the sheets are drawn in a corner, more space will be available
for the part screens.
 Work with sheet references: If this parameter is disabled all the sheets with the same thickness,
material and size will be assumed to be equal, however if it is enabled it is possible to differentiate
between sheets with the same thickness, material and size, by giving them a reference name. When
creating a new sheet, if this parameter is enabled, the system will prompt for a reference.
 Automatic sheet references: Using this option the user will be able to define a specific format in
order to automatically obtain sheet references. If this option is enabled, when clicking on the
navigation button the system will display Automatic sheet references format dialog box as shown
below to define the format of the automatic references.
152
Figure 61: Automatic sheet references format dialog box
When defining the Format, the user can combine the value of the fields Material, Length, Width and
Thickness.
 Verify the machining of the sheets while saving: When saving the sheet, the system will test that
the machining process has been done properly looking if all the parts and contours are machined,
there is no overlapping between parts and auxiliar geometry. If there is any error the system will
display a warning message showing where the error is. If not the system will display All machining on
the sheet has been executed completion message.
 Define the default snap mode: When this option is active, a new button will be displayed at the snap
mode toolbar and it will allow defining the snap mode by default. The selected option will be displayed
with a red frame all around the button. Each time the user uses another option different than the
default option, the system after applying the option selected will come back to the default option. To
disable any default option, double click on the new button.
 “Undo” option: Undo option is very useful when making changes, given that it allows going back to
previous states of the system. Here the user should decide how many levels to use in Drawing and
Nesting modules. The user will have to select between:
o All levels: With this option the system will store in the memory the highest number of levels
possible. It is important to understand that this choice will make the program use the memory
of the computer, so if the amount of RAM memory is small (64 MB or less), it is not advisable
to use this option.
o Defined number (Number of levels): Instead of all levels, the system allows to configure the
number of levels the program is going to remember for the Undo option. Five numbers of
153
levels is the value recommended for those computers whose RAM memory is small (64 MB
or less).
 Scale factor for keyboard and wheel zoom: Using this option the user can configure the scale
factor while doing the zoom, both for the keyboard and wheel zoom. The value to enter as scale
factor should be in the range of 0.1 to 100, being 2 the default value. A smaller value than 1 inverts
the zoom behavior, the page up key makes zoom-out and the page down key makes zoom-in. The
same is applicable for the mouse wheel. If the value is 1 the zoom is not performed.
In case of the mouse wheel, consider the following:
o Moving the mouse wheel forward, the system will perform a zoom–in and moving backward
the system will perform a zoom-out.
o If the mouse right button is pressed while moving forward the mouse wheel, the drawing will
be moved down and if the mouse right button is pressed while moving backward the mouse
wheel, the drawing will be moved up.
o If the mouse left button is pressed while moving forward the mouse wheel, the drawing will be
moved to the left and if the mouse right button is pressed while moving backward the mouse
wheel, the drawing will be moved to the right.
o Keeping the middle button pressed while dragging the mouse the user pans the screen.
o Keeping the middle button and shift key pressed while dragging the mouse the user does a
dynamic zoom. As mouse cursor moves up the screen view should zoom in. As the mouse
cursor moves down the screen view should zoom out. To configure mouse the sensibility or
change its behavior it is possible to change this parameter:
o Parameter >= 1.0 up = zoom in; down = zoom out.
o 0.0 < parameter < 1.0 up = zoom out; down = zoom in
 Quadrant angle: This is the angle in which the circles are going to be divided. The default angle is 90
degrees, therefore there are four possible points.
 Use: When calculating the material optimization, the user will have to select between the following
three options:
o Real area: This is the external area without the interiors.
o External area: This is the area of the exterior perimeter of the part.
o Rectangular area: This is the area of the minimum rectangle of the part.
154
 Generate box windows metafile while saving (WMF): When saving, the system will generate a
WMF file with the current sheet box nesting. The WMF is a standard graphic format which can be
treated from many external applications. The file will be generated inside Database folder.
 Generate sheet windows metafile while saving (WMF): When saving, the system will generate a
WMF file with the current sheet nesting. The WMF is a standard graphic format which can be treated
from many external applications. The file will be generated inside Database folder.
 Generate PDF of print sheet box while saving: With this option, PDF documents will be generated
with the Print Box of the selected document when saving the parts and nestings. Every time a part or
a nesting is saved, the corresponding print box PDF will be generated. It will be stored in the same
directory as the product it represents and will take the same name.
 Generate sheet DXF while saving: As the Generate sheet windows metafile while saving (WMF)
option, if enabled, the system will generate a DXF file. DXF files are standard drawing exchange
formats. When saving, the system will generate a DXF file with the current sheet nesting.
 Generate part DXF while saving: Same as the previous option, if enabled the system will generate a
DXF file with the current part nesting when saving.
 Save autorecover information: This option saves the automatically recovered information of the
current work in the drawing and nesting modules. The desired time can be set to save the auto
recovered information.
 Order subjobs: Whenever entering the Nesting module the subjobs will be ordered depending on the
configuration made here.
 Contour attributes: The postprocessor will generate the proper CNC code for the attributes of the
contours here defined. The system will display Contour Attributes dialog box as shown below, where
the user will have to introduce the required data:
155
Figure 62: Contour Attributes dialog box
 Auxiliary geometry: It is possible to create non cut lines configuring their line properties as well as
their visualization. First of all, it is necessary to create the new non cut types that will be used and to
specify the name and properties of the line (color, style and thickness), as well as the possibility of
visualizing this line on the sheet. From this moment on it will be possible to modify these properties
from Colors tab located next to the rest of customizable elements.
Figure 63: Auxiliary geometry window

156
Non cut line concept allows distinguishing between different types of lines that contain different
applications, such as up folding, down folding, welding, boxes, etc. This way, it will be possible to
create non cut lines configuring their line properties as well as their visualization in Draw and Nest
view. First of all, it will be necessary to create the new non cut types that will be used from the Draw
and Nest Configuration.
3.8.2.3 Do All
 Order of sheets: In order to select the sheets for the nesting, the system will use the type of order
set in this field. The user will be provided with the following options:
o Largest to smallest
o Smallest to largest
o By priority
 Remnants before sheets: In order to select the sheets for the nesting, the system will look first at the
status of Remnants before sheets parameter and given the case it is enabled, the system will
prioritize the use of existing remnants over sheets.
 Select sheets for quotation: This option enables the user selecting sheets for quotation. The drop-
down list provided on the right side of the field provides the following options:
o No
o Yes
o Only these
o If the job is for quotation
 Only use sheets according to the criteria for sheet selection: By means of this parameter, the
user can configure the required criteria for sheets selection. Once it has been enabled, the arrow
( ) button located on the right side will also become enabled.
The system will display Sheet selection window, where the user will be able to set the minimum and
maximum length as well as the minimum and maximum width of the sheets. In addition, the user will
be able to see the values previously introduced in the following fields:
o User data (1-3)
157
o Show the sheets with quantities equal to zero
o Select blocked sheets
o Select the remnants generated by nesting
o Select the remnants generated by user
 These parameters previously listed will be disabled. In order to modify them, the user will have to go
to Nesting module / Sheets / New / Criteria window. Whenever Do all option is executed, the
system will use those sheets that match with the defined criteria.
 Make unitary nestings with long parts: Thanks to this parameter, it is possible to create unitary
nestings with long parts when executing Do all option. The user must introduce the required value in
Minimum length field, which must be in millimeters. This option will check all the parts that compose
the job considering their dimensions and if any of them is bigger than the value here configured, the
system will create a unitary nesting with the rotation of the dimension that exceeds the configured
value. Given the case both dimensions are bigger than the value specified, the part will be nested in
the original rotation. For instance, if the user wants to make a unitary nesting for all the parts of a job,
it would only be necessary to configure the Minimum length with a small enough value, as for
example one millimeter.
 Look for sheets in stored nestings: If this parameter is enabled, the system will search first for the
nestings saved as Stored nesting. When activating this parameter, the following parameters will
become enabled:
o Criteria: This field allows filtering the stored nestings that the user wants to use. Once it has
been enabled, the arrow ( ) button located on the right side will also become enabled.
Whenever this button is selected, the system will display Import stored nesting (Criteria)
window. This window allows filtering nestings by Machine, Material, Thickness, Reference,
Date, Length and Width.
o Delete existing machining: By activating this parameter, if any of the nestings to be used has
machining, it will be previously deleted before including it in the job and it will be machined
again during the process.
o Regenerate: By activating this parameter, if any of the nestings to use has machining, it will
be completely regenerated before including it in the job and it will be machined again during
the process. Remember that regenerating also supposes deleting the existing machining.
158
 Look for the best format of sheets: Given the case this parameter is enabled, the system will try to
nest all the parts making use of each one of the existing formats. For example, there are three
different types of formats. The system will execute three tries, by nesting all the parts of the job in
format number one, then in format number two and finally, in format number three. The system will
compare the efficiency reached by every one of the formats and will make use of the most efficient
one.
 Look for the best combination of sheets: This parameter depends on the field Minimum efficiency.
If this parameter is enabled, the system will take into account the minimum efficiency set and will look
for the best sheet per each nesting (the most efficient one). As in the previous case, imagine there
are three different type of formats. The system will test all the existing formats per nesting, and will
choose the most efficient one per nesting. For example, the system will test nesting number one, in
sheet number 1 (with an efficiency of 65%), in sheet number two (efficiency of 72%) and sheet
number three (efficiency of 85%). Since sheet number three is the most efficient, the system will save
it and start testing again with the following nesting in every sheet format following the same process
until all the parts have been nested. If none of the existing sheets meets the efficiency requirement
set in Minimum efficiency field, the system will keep the one that has achieved the highest efficiency.
 Minimum efficiency to eliminate each sheet: Once Do All option has been performed and the
machining has been executed, the system will test whether the sheets used meet the minimum
efficiency requirement set in this field. Those sheets whose efficiency is not bigger than the value
configured, will be deleted. In this case the system will make use of other sheets until the minimum
efficiency is exceeded.
 Rectangular nesting – Maximum efficiency: The option will be able to select which the maximum
percentage of used area for rectangular nesting will be.
 Minimum efficiency calculation mode: This option allows deciding the way that the efficiency
(defined in the previous point) to eliminate sheets will be calculated. The available options are:
o Real area: Sum of the real area of all parts.
o External area: Sum of the external area of all parts.
o Rectangular area: Sum of the rectangular area of all parts.
o All parts bounding box: Area of the bounding box of all parts.
 Maximum time to look for the best sheets: Here the user must introduce the maximum time that
will be taken to search for the best sheets. Remember that the time must be introduced in seconds.
159
During the Do All execution, once the time here specified is reached, the system will stop testing
methods and will choose the best one (most efficient) found up to that moment.
 Prenesting: This option allows creating temporary sheets with limited quantity so that it is possible to
select automatically which ones are the most adequate to execute the parts nesting of a determined
job. In order to activate this option, it is necessary to activate Look for the best format of sheets or
Look for the best combination of sheets. These options are necessary in order to test all the
temporary formats that the system can create.
Apart from temporary sheets, it is also possible to indicate if it is required to use or not the sheets
that have already been created in the system. If this option is activated, the system would use the
same sheets that would be used in the nesting of a complete job. If sheet dimensions are required as
much adjusted as possible, the user can configure Adjust final sheet dimensions to nested
dimensions option. This parameter can be defined both in X and Y or in both dimensions. This option
allows creating sheet formats that take full advantage of a coil, given that it is possible to set it to
always adjust in X.
Once the system obtains the final sheet format result, the user will be able to create the sheets in the
database or not. In this way, the user will also be able to create quotation sheets if required.
Finally, it will also be possible to launch the sheet list so that the user can be provided with the list of
used formats in the current job. If required, it will be possible to print directly or to get a previous
display to save the list in a determined format as, for example, PDF.
160
Figure 64: Prenesting dialog box
 Generate remnants after nesting: Given the case this parameter is enabled, once the nesting has
been executed, the system will generate automatically the remnants of every sheet (if any).
 Cut after nesting: If enabled, the system will perform the machining operation after the nesting has
been done.
 Deal with equal sheets: Using this option, the system will calculate if the same sheet can be done
twice instead of making the nesting and machining process of the same parts in the same sheets
more than once, what will help the user save time.
If this parameter is disabled, the system will get one sheet and make the nesting and machining. Get
the following sheet and make the nesting and machining. The system will execute the same steps
once and again until the whole job has been finished even if the sheets are equal, which results in a
longer execution time.
If this parameter is enabled, after performing the first sheet and machining, the system will detect
whether the following sheet is equal to the first one (this means we have the same number of parts,
which can be placed in the same positions). Given the case it detects an equal sheet, the system will
store just one sheet, meanwhile the Worksheet will define that the sheet must be machined twice.
3.8.2.4 Print
 Print sheets while saving: If enabled, the system will print the sheets while saving.
 Print machining: If enabled, the machining will also appear in the worksheet.
 Print the full remnants: If enabled, the remnants will be filled with linear texture making easier the
differentiation between sheet and remnant when printing.
 Only the initialization: Enabled, in the worksheet will only appear the initialization.
 Prompt for sheets before printing: Do All option may generate more than one sheet. If this option is
enabled, the system will ask for the sheets required to print instead of printing all of them.
 Print: The system will generate the worksheet of the sheets selected here. The user can select
between: The current sheet, Every sheet of the subjob, Every sheet of the job and Select sheets.
 Prints identifiers of parts: If enabled, the identifiers of the parts will be included in the printing
worksheet.
161
 Identifiers: The user can select between the following options:
o Print the name: The system will include the name of the part inside the geometry.
o Print the index: The system will insert the same number to every equal part of the sheet. This
index is very useful because it will be printed in the Factory sheets list.
o Print the order: The system will include in the parts the number that corresponds to their
order.
 Line width: When printing, the width of the different elements involved can be modified in order to
make easier their identification. The user will be able to set the Line width of the Geometry part,
Geometry sheet, Machining part and Machining sheet.
 Prompt for template name before printing: If enabled, the system will prompt for the template
name to use before printing. This option is useful when the user has more than one template defined.
These templates, also called boxes, can be parameterized. In other words, the user can define the
line thickness, position and dimension of the drawings, text format and database fields required in the
boxes. In order to define a new box, contact the product support team.
3.8.2.5 Colors
This window allows configuring the colors of the whole system. The user will get the list of
elements/aspects that can be configured by clicking the drop-down arrow located at the top of the
window. The configurable aspects are the following: Background, Cursor cross, Axis, Background of
sheets, Edge of sheet, Background of remnants, Edge of remnants, Clamps and work zone, Straight,
Point, Selection, Dragging, Machining, Machining with multitorch, From Point, Rapids, Cycles, Machining
texts, Punched, Punch attribute, Common punch attribute, Shear attribute, Mark attribute, Cut attribute,
Micro-joints attribute, Shear, Pattern, Dimensions / Text, Simulation Window-Capture, Virtual movement,
Bridges, Loops, Lead-in / Lead-outs, Micro-joints, Geometry, Upper and lower chamfering, Upper
chamfering, Lower chamfering, Remnant line, Cutting quality 1-12, Powder mark, Drill mark, Pen mark,
Cut mark, Rapid with head down, Suction cup, Activated suction cup, Reference point, Grid, Auxiliary
clams and auxiliary work zone, Distinguished color 1-30, Active part in part list.
162
Figure 65: Colors examples
The user will be able to configure the Type, Make on and Color of the previously mentioned aspects.
3.8.2.6 Display
 Go to an instruction before executing manual punches on the nesting: This is an option for
punching and combined machines. This option makes easier inserting nibbling or simple punches in
the correct position of the machining from the Nesting and Machining module.
 Show remnant references on screen: If enabled, whenever a remnant is generated the system will
show the assigned reference inside it.
Figure 66: Show remnant references on screen example
 Show part texts on the sheet: In the Drawing window it is possible to assign a description text which
will have no machining effect. If this parameter is enabled, this text will be displayed.
163
Figure 67: Show part texts on the sheet example
 Show the dragging of the part with collision control: If enabled, the user will be able to visualize
the dragging part with the collision control.
 Show non-cut contours on the sheet: The system provides an option to assign non-cut technology
to the contours. This means that these contours will not be machined unless this assigned technology
changes.
Figure 68: Show non cut contours on the sheet example
If enabled, the non-cut geometries will be shown in the configured color by.
 Selection by window/capture/trap: If enabled, whenever the user selects parts (to erase, copy or
move them between many other options) they will get different colors so that the visualization is
easier and clearer.
164
Figure 69: Selection by window/capture/trap example
 Simulate selection when mouse is moved: If enabled, whenever the mouse passes over a
segment, this segment will change color showing which contour would be selected if the mouse was
clicked.
Figure 70: Simulate selection when mouse is moved example
 Show micro-joints: If enabled, the micro-joints will be shown and an exterior line will appear in the
contours. This parallel line to the external contours is the center of the exterior punch. The distance
between the exterior contours and this line is the middle of the width of the configured tool for the
exteriors.
Figure 71: Show micro-joints example
 Display all clamp and work zones: If enabled, the nesting module will show in the screen all the
work zones as well as the clamps in the configured positions.
Figure 72: Display all clamp and work zones example

165
The clamp zone changes depending on the station the turret is working with. If this parameter is
disabled, only the clamp work zone of the current station will be shown with continuous line and the
rest with discontinuous lines.
 Simulate the full remnants: If enabled, the remnants will be filled with a green color for making the
identification easier.
Figure 73: Simulate the full remnants example
 Display dimensions on the sheet: Although the dimensions made in the drawing module will be
always shown, the user can decide to keep them in the nesting module or not by activating this
parameter.
Figure 74: Display dimensions on the sheet example
 View nesting limit: When enabled, the system will display the line that shows the end of nesting.
166
 Highlight selected part: When the user selects a part in the Nesting Part list window, the geometry
of the select part will be highlighted in the sheet only when this option is enabled. In the same way, it
the user select any parts on the sheet, the system will highlight them on the Parts List window as well
as all the equal parts nested on the sheet. This color can be configured in Color window.
 Show points at the center of punching instructions: This parameter allows a display of the central
point of each punch. This way, a better and faster punching interpretation can be obtained. The user
will be able to select between: No, Drawing, Nesting and Both of them.
 Text size for the quantities in the parts window: This parameter allows the user modifying the size
of the text that will appear on the sheets window of the Nesting module. The user will be able to
select between: Small, Normal, Large and Largest.
 Postprocessor words: From this window the user can define which text will be shown on the sheet
when a function is selected, as well as the font and size of the postprocessor words displayed on the
sheet. If none is specified, the system will use the windows standard font size configured by default
on the computer.
These parameters allow visualizing or hiding the Postprocessor words as well as changing their text.
Figure 75: Postprocessor words dialog box
 Move the “offset” of the part on the sheet: If enabled, when getting a part from the list, the system
will show additional lines from the margin of the part showing the minimum distance between parts.
167
Figure 76: Move the “offset” of the part on the sheet example
 Selection with multitorch: When the machine has been configured as multi-torch, the system will
make the nesting trying to use the maximum number of torches. If this option is enabled, when a part
is select, the system will select the entire multi-torch group (given that the parts will be machined at
the same time as selected).
Figure 77: Selection with multitorch example
 Selection by window/capture/trap without multitorch: When selection with multitorch is enabled

this parameter will become enabled.
Figure 78: Selection by window/capture/trap without multitorch example
 Show selected machining: This option allows visualizing the selected machining.
168
 Show micro-joints with points: If enabled, the system will display the micro-joints with two points in
order to show their location.
 Display fixed position points of the clamp: If enabled, the system will show the fixed position
points of the clamps.
 Show part references on the screen: If this option is enabled, the part references will be included
inside the contour of the parts. It will not change the machining of the parts, it is only a visualization
option.
Figure 79: Show part references on the screen example
 Rapids:
o Show the direction of movements: If enabled, the system will show with an arrow the direction
of every rapid movement.
Figure 80: Show the direction of movements example
o Show rapids in drawing module: If the visualization is enabled in the Drawing module, the
user will be provided with these three options:
 One part: It shows rapids when one part is opened.
 Multiparts: It shows rapids when multiple parts are opened.
 Always: It shows rapids constantly.
169
o Show rapids in nesting and machining module: Select this checkbox to visualize the rapids in
Nesting and Machining module.
 Show chamfer information: Both in Nesting and Drawing module the user can visualize chamfer
information. The system will display Chamfer information setup dialog box as shown below:
Figure 81: Chamfer information setup dialog box
Text position, font and size can be selected as well as where the text will be shown: Drawing,
Nesting or Both of them.
 Simulation: When clicking this button the system will display Simulation dialog box as shown below:
170
Figure 82: Simulation dialog box
Here the user will be able to define the shear movement while the machining simulation. The user
can select between two different movements:
o On XY: The shear will move using both axes at the same time.
o First on one axis and later on the other: The shear will move first in horizontal or vertical and
then in the other way.
The user will be able to define the following options:
o Head radius (mm): Here the user can introduce the Head radius in millimeters.
o Number of milling broken segments: This option allows the user to define the number of
milling broken segments.
3.8.3 Costs
 % Remnant price: The user can enter the cost related to the remnants.
 % Scrap price: The user can enter the cost related to the scrap.
 Cost by N2 and O2 unit: The user can enter the cost of N2/O2 used per unit.
 Machine: The user can enter the cost based on the machine used.
 Machine hourly rate: The user can enter the rate per hour of the active machine.
 Employee hourly rate: The user can enter the rate per hour of an employee.
171
 Save time and cost of parts: If enabled, the system will save the time and cost of the parts with no
need of entering in the Nesting module. The calculation will be made in the Drawing module.
 Save costs of the sheets: If enabled, the system will save the cost of the sheets.
Figure 83: Configure: Costs dialog box
 No update: The part time and cost will not be updated based on the nesting.
 Last part time with qualities of the nesting: When saving a part in Nesting without qualities the
system saves a time for that part. If the user later assigns qualities to that part, the time will be
updated in the database and it will get a different value, which is supposed to be more accurate.
 Part time in the last nesting: If enabled, the system will save the part time in the last nesting
process.
 Average with the last saved time: If enabled, the system will save the average of the part from the
current and previous nesting.
172
 Average of all the nesting times: If enabled, the system will save the average of the part from all
nestings.
 Update times in the manufacturing line: If enabled, the system will update the times in the
manufacturing line.
3.8.4 Identifiers
Several identifiers can be configured in this section. The user can assign them the required name.
The user can select between Identifiers of... Jobs, Parts and Sheets.
Figure 84: Configurable identifiers
 Jobs: The right side of the window displays the identifiers of the manufacturing order. Click on the
identifier to be modified and type in the new one.
 Parts: The right side of the window displays the identifiers of the part. Click on the identifier to be
modified and type in the new one. By means of More button the user can create or delete the
identifiers.
 Sheets: The right side of the window displays the identifiers of a sheet. Click on the identifier to be
modified and type in the new one.
3.8.5 Language
This option changes the language of the program. Once the language has been selected, the
program will restart with the selected language.
173
Figure 85: Languages dialog box
3.8.6 Interface
The Interface button enables the user to create a new toolbar and change the existing toolbar
applications among many other options.
1. Click Interface button and the system will display Customize dialog box:
174
Figure 86: Customize Quick Access
2. The window is divided into the following tabs:
o Quick access
o Shortcut keys
o Details
o Ribbon
3. In the Commands section the user will visualize all the menus with their applications listed.
 In Quick Access tab, the user can quickly access the different functionality areas of the software that
are coming in the drawing and nesting modules in a clear way.
o Delete: Click this button to remove an application from the toolbar.
o Separator: Click this button to include a separator between the applications of the toolbar.
175
o Label: By means of this option the user can add or modify Labels manually for each option.
Groups of related parameters can be identified with a common name. Introduce the name in
the Text field located at the right bottom of the window and click on Separator button in order
to place it in the Quick Access section. In order to drag the options from Commands section
to the Quick Access section make use of Single arrow ( ) button.
 In Shortcut keys tab, the user can create new shortcut keys, view and delete the existing ones for
the applications.
Figure 87: Customize Shortcut keys
Select an application and then introduce the key from the keyboard to assign as New Shortcut key
for the previously selected application. Click Assign button and the selected key will be assigned as
shortcut key as well as visualized in Existing keys field. The user can also select an existing shortcut
key from the Existing keys field and click Delete button in order to remove it.
 In Details tab, the user can configure the view of columns in the products and sheets panel. It is only
possible to configure one view at a time. In order to visualize the Products list and Sheet list in the
176
main module, it is necessary to activate the corresponding options in the View menu. If activated, the
system will display the configured columns with the information of each part. By means of this option,
the user can modify the order of visualization and remove any column that is not needed, just by
making use of the different Arrow buttons provided in Customize window, as shown below:
Figure 88: Customize Details
Choose the required parameters from the available list and click Single arrow button to add the
parameters selectively one by one, or click Double arrow button in order to include all the
parameters in the list and click OK.
 In Ribbon tab the user can edit the view and the items provided in the Ribbon. Among the
customization options given in the Ribbon, now it is possible to configure the style of the controls
inserted in customized groups and tabs. This way it will be possible to select the icon size (small or
large) and the possibility to show or not the control text.
177
This contextual menu provides all the options that can be executed with each element of the menu:
create new tabs and groups, change their name, delete customized elements, change the style of
new controls and finally, reorganize the new elements changing their position.
Click right button on the ribbon and select Customize ribbon option.
Figure 89: Customize Ribbon
o New tab: Click this button to create a Main tab like Home, Manage, Utilities, etc. and
customize the group.
o New group: Click this button in order to create a Group in the particular tab. Customized
groups can be added to original or customized tabs. Select the desired tab and click New
group. Both customized tabs and groups appear in bold so that they are more easily
distinguished. New commands can be added to the customized groups (not in the tabs). In
order to do it, the user can add the selected options by double clicking on them or using the
Single arrow button in the Commands section.
178
o Delete: Click this button to delete customized tabs, groups and/or commands.
o Change name: This button allows the user changing the name of customized tabs and
groups.
o Separator: Click this button in order to include a separator between the applications in the
toolbar. The commands can be organized using separators within a customized group.
 It is not possible to add two separators together, neither at the beginning nor at the end of the
group.
o Export: By means of this option, the user can export the UI settings made in his machine.
This will be saved as *.ExportUI file in the selected location.
o Import: By means of this option, the user can import the UI settings from an *.ExportUI file.
o Restore: this button restores the default configuration. If selected the system will display a
warning window asking “Do you want to delete all ribbon customizations for this program?”.
Select Yes to delete the current ribbon configuration and select No in order to cancel the
operation.
 Each machine type offers different options, visible only when working with them in particular.
Therefore, configuration options must be customized per machine type.
3.8.7 Print
Print option enables the user to create and delete reports, configure the printing settings and visualize as
well as print reports. When selected the system displays Lists window as shown below:
179
Figure 90: Lists window
 To create reports, do the following:
1. Click Print and the system displays Lists dialog box listing various reports.
2. Click Create button. The system displays New list dialog box listing the various topics for which
the report can be generated.
3. Select a topic and enter the name for the report in Text field.
4. Click OK. The new report is created and included in the list in Print Reports dialog box.
 To delete reports, do the following:
2. Select the report which has to be deleted and then click Delete. The selected report will be
deleted.
 To configure the print settings for the report, do the following:
180
2. Select the report which has to be printed and then click Configure. The system displays Print
Setup dialog box.
3. Set the required parameters and then click OK. The print settings for the selected report will be
configured.
 To view and print reports, do the following:
2. Select the report to view/print and move it from the list to the next column.
3. Select a report in the column and click Preview to preview the selected report, click Print to print
the selected report, and click Print all to print all the reports of the column.
The different available reports are detailed below:
3.8.7.1 Factory Sheets List
This report contains information of all the sheets used in the active manufacturing order, as well as the
place occupied by each part on the sheet.
For each sheet the following information is displayed, in this order: CNC name for the sheet, reference for
the sheet followed by its identifying number, machine used, number of sheet, length, width, thickness,
material, weight, scrap utilization, sheet utilization and maximum sheet value machined.
For each part placed on the sheet the following is displayed: space occupied by the part on the sheet
(Ref.), reference, reference of the figure the part belongs to followed by the defined position,
observations, length, width and weight.
3.8.7.2 Frames Elements List
This report contains information on the elements required to manufacture the frames. The following
information is displayed for each frame in this order: the name of the frame, the length and the amount of
bar necessary to manufacture the frame. Finally, the bar length and the total number of corners are
displayed.
3.8.7.3 Canal Part List
This report lists the details of the parts that are not cut and displays information such as the reference of
the part, DIN name, DIN code, material, thickness, length, width, and quantity.
181
3.8.7.4 Labels List (149x48.8)
This report generates labels of size 149 x 48.8 for the nested parts of the current job. The information
displayed includes the serial number of the part on the sheet (this number is automatically generated
when the parts are nested), part reference, job reference, user data, date on which the part is nested,
comments, CNC reference, material, sheet dimensions, part dimensions, and DIN details.
3.8.7.5 Labels List (127x74)
This report generates labels of size 127 x 74 for the nested parts of the current job. The information
displayed includes the serial number of the part on the sheet (this number is automatically generated
when the part is nested), part reference, job reference, CNC reference, labor ticket number,
manufacturing order reference, date on which the part is nested, material, part dimensions, and sheet
dimensions.
3.8.7.6 Labels List for Remnants (149x48.8)
This report contains information of the labels for remnants of size 149x48.8 for every remnant generated
in the manufacturing order in progress. For every remnant, a span is showed containing the following
information, in this order: remnant number, reference assigned to the remnant, amount, supplier, carrier,
manufacturing date, associated comment, material, dimensions (Length x Width x Thickness), weight,
order to which it belongs, sheet used to obtain it and associated CNC.
3.8.7.7 Labels List for Sheets (149x48.8)
This report generates labels of size 149 x 48.8 for the sheets used in the current job. The information
displayed includes nesting number (this number is automatically generated when the sheets are used),
sheet reference, quantity of sheets used, user data, material, sheet dimensions, weight, job reference,
CNC reference, and remnant percentage.
3.8.7.8 Sheets List
This report lists the details of all the sheets used in the current job and displays information such as the
current job details, sheet reference, material, dimensions, dimensions along x and y axis, weight details of
the sheet, quantity of sheet used, real total weight details of the sheets, and real total quantity of sheets
used.
182
3.8.7.9 Turrets List
This report shows information of all the sheets used in the manufacturing order in progress. The user is
informed of the main data of the sheet: the CNC name for that sheet, the sheet reference followed by its
identification number, the machine used for machining, the amount of sheets, its length, width, thickness,
the material, its weight, the usage of the remnant, the usage of the sheet and the maximum dimension of
the sheet that is machined. Next, the turret data are mentioned with the following information: station
position, whether it is Multitool or not, the punch position and the matrix, as well as the angle where it is
located.
3.8.7.10 CNC List
This report lists the details of all the sheets used for machining the part and displays information such as
the nesting number (this number is automatically generated when the sheets are used), sheet reference,
material, thickness, length, width, CNC reference, maximum sheet used for machining along X axis,
maximum sheet used for machining along Y axis, and the quantity of sheets used for machining.
3.8.7.11 Remnants List
This report contains information of all the remnants generated in the manufacturing order in progress. For
every generated remnant the following information is displayed, in this order: reference assigned to the
remnant, material, dimensions: thickness, length and width, weight, reference of the original sheet and
the amount.
3.8.7.12 Cost and Time Sheet List
This report lists the details of cost and machine time of all the sheets in the current job and displays
information such as part reference, material, rectangle area, cost of material, cost of machine time, cost of
consumables, cost of planning, total cost, and manufactured quantity.
3.8.7.13 Protocol List
This report lists the details of all the parts in the current job and displays information such as current job
details, part reference, material, thickness, quantity, manufactured quantity, dimensions, machined
dimensions, weight, cost, total machined dimensions, total weight, and total cost.
183
3.8.7.14 Frame List
This report lists the details of all the frames used for the parts in the current job and displays information
such as the frame reference, length, width, quantity, cost of time, cost of corners, cost of assembly, and
total cost.
3.8.7.15 Isolate List
This report lists the details of all the isolates used in the current job and displays information such as the
reference of the isolate, cost per m2, thickness, position, DIN name, DIN code, area, and total cost.
3.8.7.16 Delivery Note List
This report lists the details of all the parts in a current job and displays information such as the current job
details, reference of the parts, DIN name, DIN code, quantity, significant values, and weight of the part. It
also includes a table which is classified by length, displaying the area machined on a channel machine,
area machined on a cutting machine, and total area.
3.8.7.17 Job List
This report lists the details of the current job and displays information such as name, reference, various
user data, comments, parts, area, quantity and price among others.
3.8.7.18 Scale 1:1 List
This report shows the drawing of a part with numbers on the most important points and is printed in scale
1:1. The user can configure the following values: Print the significant curves only, Mark lines, Cutter
radius, Eliminate white paper sheets.
3.8.7.19 Geometric List
This report lists the geometries of all the parts of the current job. It displays the current job reference, part
reference, material, dimensions of the part, DIN name, DIN code, creation date, length, weight, drawing of
the part, and position of the significant points of the geometry along X and Y.
When selecting this, the system displays Geometric list dialog box listing all the parts of the current job. It
is possible to select the required part to access its geometric report. It is also possible to click Configure
and select Print significant points only check box to print significant points of the geometry.
184
3.8.7.20 Drawing of Every Part
This report shows one sheet for each part where the drawing of the part is shown. The result is the same,
if all the parts would be printed individually in the Drawing module.
3.8.7.21 Drawing of Every Sheet

This option shows the drawing of all the sheets that are generated. The result is the same if all the sheets
would be printed individually in the Nesting and Cutting module.
3.8.7.22 Cost and Time Part Sheet
This report lists the details of cost and machine time of all the parts in the current job and displays
information such as part reference, material, rectangle area, cost of material, cost of machine time, cost of
consumables, cost of planning, total cost, and manufactured quantity.
3.8.7.23 Drawing of Every Sheet
This report shows the drawing of every sheet in the current job together with all the details related to it.
3.8.7.24 Labels List (127x74)
This report generates labels of size 127 x 74 for the nested parts of the current job. The information
displayed includes serial number of the part on the sheet (this number is automatically generated when
the part is nested), part reference, job reference, CNC reference, labor ticket number, manufacturing
order reference, date on which the part is nested, material, part dimensions, and sheet dimensions.
3.8.7.25 Protocol List (Duct figures)
This report lists the details of all the parts in the current job and displays information such as name of the
job, reference, various user data, comments, material, thickness, quantity, manufactured quantity,
dimensions of the parts, cut extension, mark extension, weight in kgs and price.
3.8.7.26 Brace List
This report provides information about the braces used in the current job together with their used face,
length, quantity, total length and price.
185
3.8.7.27 Tie Rod List
This report provides information of the tie rods in the current job. Tie rods used in braces come along with
the face used, number per brace, total, nuts, washers, seals and price. Tie rods used in connections
provide quantity, nuts, washers, seals and price. On the other hand, tie rods used in the middle come
together with length, orientation, rows, quantity per row, total, nuts, washers, seals and price.
3.8.7.28 Slip & Drive Element List
This report provides information about the slip and drive used in the current job together with the
reference, length and quantity.
3.8.7.29 Connector List
This report provides information about the connectors used in the current job, which come along with their
position, end, length and width.
3.8.7.30 Seam List
This report provides information about the seams used in the current job together with their reference
name and position.
3.8.7.31 Labels List (4x6)
This report generates labels of size 4 x 6 for the nested parts of the current job. The information displayed
includes serial number of the part on the sheet (this number is automatically generated when the part is
nested), part reference, job reference, CNC reference, labor ticket number, manufacturing order
reference, date on which the part is nested, material, part dimensions, and sheet dimensions.
3.8.7.32 Labels List (127x68)
This report generates spans of size 127 x 68 for the nested parts of the current job. The information
displayed includes serial number of the part on the sheet (this number is automatically generated when
the part is nested), part reference, job reference, CNC reference, labor ticket number, manufacturing
order reference, date on which the part is nested, material, part dimensions, and sheet dimensions.
186
3.8.7.33 Job Element List
This report provides all the information related to the current job, covering data of the sheets, parts and
nestings. The job comes together with details like reference, name, cutting time, waste, weight in kgs and
parts. Sheets provide their reference, material, thickness (mm), dimensions (mm) and quantity used.
Nestings provide details like reference, material, thickness (mm), CNC, dimensions (mm), quantity,
cutting time, waste percentage and number of nested parts. And finally, parts come together with their
reference, weight, area, quantity, dimensions, thickness, external weight, external area, unitary cutting
time, material, rectangular weight, rectangular area and total cutting time.
3.8.8 Backup
This option consists on the Backup of LANTEKPR.CFG, LANTEKIN.CNI and LFOCUS.CFG files. The
user can save a personalized and/or standard (provided during installation) configuration and recover any
of them at any time.
1. Click Backup button located in the Configuration options and the system will display the following
dialog box:
Figure 91: Backup dialog box
2. Select one of the three options provided and click OK button.
3.8.9 Currencies and Tariffs
This option is used to provide configuration information about the system related to the Database, Users
and Currency.
187
3.8.9.1 Database
Database option shows a list of all the existing databases that the user can connect to work. It is also
possible to create a new blank database using this option.
3.8.9.2 Users
By means of Users option, it is possible to add new users to the User’s List by entering User data, such
as:
Reference, Employee, User name and Password. The existing users can also be modified and deleted
from the available Work Centers and User’s List.
3.8.9.3 Currency
Click on Currency in order to add a new currency. The chosen currency type can be modified and
deleted from the existing list.
3.9 EXIT
Exit ( ) option allows abandoning Lantek Expert.
188
CHAPTER
5
4 DRAWING MODULE
The Drawing module provides different tools in order to design the parts in two dimensions. It offers a
wide range of drawing possibilities to the user. In order to access the drawing module, perform the
following steps:
Click Drawing ( ) button located in Home menu of Lantek Expert – Jobs (CAM) and the system will
open the drawing module.
4.1 DRAWING WINDOW

Lantek Expert – Drawing window consists of the Geometry toolbar, Machining toolbar, Status bar and
Drawing window. The Drawing window occupies the center of the 2D screen and represents the useful
drawing zone where the user can design a part.
4.2 STATUS BAR

The status bar provides up to date information about the steps to perform and the active coordinates of
the cursor.
 Sheets dimension: Those are the X and Y dimensions of the current sheet.
 Percent of sheet occupied by the parts: This is the size of the whole sheet occupied by the nested
parts.
 Percent of remnant occupied: In this case, referred to the size that the nested parts occupy in the
remnant.
189
 Maximum cutting coordinates: Maximum X and Y distances where the machine head will arrive.
 Sheet reference: This is the reference given when the sheet has been created.
 CNC filename: This is the name of the CNC file which will not be generated until the job is saved.
Apart from all the data shown previously located at the bottom of the window, there is also an icon
representing the active option. This icon, together with the name and group it belongs to, plus a text
displaying the user´s requirements at any time (a point, a selection, etc.) makes the program user
friendly and guides the user through the execution of the different options.
4.3 CUSTOMIZE QUICK ACCESS TOOLBAR

Customize quick access toolbar option permits the user to access the different functionality areas of
the software quickly and in a visual way, as they are coming in the drawing and nesting modules. This
frequently used toolbar is accessible on the top left corner of the window. This provides the user with one
click shortcut commands for the commonly used functions, such as creating a new job/part, opening the
selected part of the job/existing job and saving it between many other options.
By means of this option the user will also be able to include additional icons such as Print, Properties and
Projects for example. Undo ( ) and Redo ( ) options enable the user to select the number of actions
that is going to use. It is necessary to unfold the list of last performed actions and to select the action or
actions ready to undo or redo from the list.
 The user can add any frequently used commands to the quick access tool bar by right clicking on
the command icon and selecting Add to Quick Access Tool Bar.
More commands... option located in the drop-down menu provided on the right corner of the Quick
Access Toolbar, displays Customize dialog box, which includes the following tabs:
o Quick Access
o Hide options
o Shortcut keys
190
Each command displays a certain activity area. The Command button in each group carries out a
command or displays a menu of commands. Using this hierarchy, similar commands are grouped
together making the Customize access toolbar very task oriented. Because in all the modules, some
commands are available directly on each tab and it is not necessary to search for those options in
submenus.
4.4 CONTEXTUAL MENU

It is possible to access to Access to points menu through a right mouse-click. The contextual menu will
only be displayed in the following cases whenever an option is being executed (such as drawing an
element, breaking elements, inserting a rapid movement, etc.):
 When selecting a point
 When selecting a geometry element
 When executing a geometry drag/dragging
Given the case that the access to point by default is modified during the execution of an option and by
means of the contextual menu, this modification will become effective, that is, the default snap mode will
be modified for the rest of the options.
191
Figure 92: Access to points menu
 Picked Point: Select the picked point directly.
 Centre Point: Select the centre of an arc or circle.
 Centre of Contour: Select the centre of a contour.
 Near Point: Select the near point on the element.
 End Point: Select the beginning or end point of one element.
 Intersection Point: Select the intersection point between two elements.
 Double Intersection: Select the intersection point of two elements prolongation.
 Mid-Point: Select the Mid-point of an element.
 Tangent Point: Select the tangent point to one arc or circle.
 Projected Point: Select the projected point on an element.
 Quadrant Point: Select a quadrant point on an arc or circle.
 Mixed Point: Select the near point to beginning, end, intersection, centre, etc.
192
 Delete Geometry: It deletes the geometric elements.
 Default snap mode: Click this option in order to go back to the previous snap mode.
4.5 PARTS
4.5.1 New
New ( ) option enables the user creating a new part.
4.5.2 Open
Open ( ) option allows the user opening an existing part. The system will display Part selection
dialog box as shown below:
Figure 93: Part selection dialog box
Select the required part and click OK button so that the system opens the selected part in Drawing
window.
193
4.5.3 Open Parts
Open parts ( ) option allows the user to open all parts of the job, open parts with the same machine,
open parts of a subjob and open selected parts. The system will display Open parts dialog box as shown
below:
Figure 94: Open parts dialog box
4.5.4 Nesting and Machining
Nesting and machining ( ) button allows the user to access to the Nesting and Machining module.
When clicking this button, the Drawing module is closed.
194
4.5.5 Select Machine
Select Machine ( ) button enables the user to select the machine to cut the part. In order to do it,
perform the following steps:
1. Click Select Machine option and the system will display Machine select dialog box listing all
the machines available.
2. Select the required machine or include a new one by means of New button.
3. Click OK button and the part will be cut with the selected machine.
4.5.6 Save
Save ( ) option saves the current geometry in the system.
Save As ( ) button allows the user to save a part or to save the changes made to an existing part.
This is similar to the save application except for the fact that this can be used to create a new part similar
to the existing one.
When using this application to save an existing part, the system displays the Part saving dialog box. It is
possible to make the required changes and assign a new name in this dialog box.
It is possible to generate multiple image files per part and sheet. For that purpose, it is necessary to save
the image in the corresponding database table and to indicate the file type (BMP, IMGB, IMGP, etc.). This
functionality is configured in a special file called IMAGE.FMT where as many image formats as required
can be added. Allowed formats are: BMP, PNG, WMF, JPEG and GIF between many others. When parts
are created from importers their images can only be 70x60 or 700x600.
Thanks to this, it will be possible to generate better quality images as both their size and format can be
configured. Likewise, visualization type can be configured in black and white or color, to display their
filling or to show the machining.
All the information is stored on NEST_NEXT_00000xxx table and MMPP_MMPP_00000100 table, while
the other MMPP_MMPP_00000xxx tables are no longer used.
195
When saving a nesting as a multiprogram it will be marked as so, therefore the label will be shown in both
the main and nesting modules. Task nestings cannot be saved as a multiprogram if they contain order
parts.
Save by parts ( ) option enables the user to save more than one part. If there is more than one
design, then this application allows the user to save each design as an independent part. In order to save
each design as a different part, perform the following steps:
1. Click Save by parts option and the system will display Save by parts dialog box as shown
below:
Figure 95: Save by parts dialog box
2. The fields provided in Save by parts dialog box are briefly described below:
o Detect parts automatically: It indicates whether the system automatically identifies separate
designs to save them as different parts or not. Once Detect parts automatically checkbox is
selected, the user will be able to manage auxiliary geometry elements such as 2D points,
Lines, Texts and Dimensions.
196
o Prompt for data on each part: It indicates whether different data for each part will be recorded
or not. This check box is displayed only when Detect parts automatically checkbox is
selected. If this check box is selected, then Part Saving dialog box will be displayed as many
times as number of parts to save.
o Import text properties: When selecting Import text properties option, the user will visualize a
navigation button that gives access to the text definition window in order to access part data.
The auxiliary geometry element texts to be treated when saving by parts are configured in
this window. Treated texts can be kept in this window using Delete texts option. The
automatic part detection option must be disabled and the text property import option should
be used. The Selection window can be used to choose the part geometry and text properties
associated to it.
o Delete the part: It indicates whether the parts are deleted after saving or not. Whenever the
user enables Import text properties parameter, the arrow button located on the right side
becomes enabled. If selected, the system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 96: Text definition to access to part data
Once all the required data has been introduced, the user must select OK button so that Part saving
window is displayed as shown below:
197
Figure 97: Part saving window
3. Introduce the required details and click OK button. The system will save the designs as
different parts.
 If Detect parts automatically checkbox is not selected, the system allows the user to select
manually the required designs by means of Selection Toolbar and save them as different parts. In the
same way, if Delete the part checkbox is not selected, the system allows the user to select manually
the parts to delete by means of Selection Toolbar.
Save all ( ) option saves all the parts.
Save machining ( ) option allows the user saving the machining of the parts in different machines.
In order to do it, perform the following steps:
1. Select Save machining option and the system will display Machine select dialog box as shown
below:
198
Figure 98: Machine select dialog box
2. Select the required machine from the ones available in the list. Here the user can also add a
new machine to the list by clicking New. When doing so, the system will display Machine
definition dialog box where the user will be able to add a new one.
4.5.7 Import
Import option allows the user importing the Geometry of a part, Machining of a part and Parametric parts
between many others. Once selected, the system will display Import drop-down list listing the various
elements that can be imported:
4.5.7.1 DXF Files
In order to import a DXF file, perform the following steps:
1. Select DXF files ( ) option and the system will display Open dialog box. The different
fields provided in this dialog box are briefly described below:
o Directory: The path of the directory that consists of DXF files. Click the button in this field to
select the directory.
o Drawing simulation: It indicates whether to preview the drawing of the geometry or not.
199
o Parameters: Parameters of the DXF file. This tab is not available as only the geometry of the
DXF file is imported.
o Configure: Click this to configure the linear and angular tolerance as well as the extension.
o Open: Click this to open the selected .dxf.
o Cancel: Click this option in order to close the window.
2. Select the required .dxf file and click Open button so that the system imports it.
3. Mark an insertion point in the geometry. The system will display Move toolbar to move the
imported geometry.
4.5.7.2 Parametric Parts
In order to import parametric parts, perform the following steps:
1. Select Parametric parts ( ) option and the system will display Parametric parts dialog
box as shown below:
200
Figure 99: Parametric parts dialog box
 Directory: The path of the directory consisting parametric parts. Click the button in this field to select
the required directory.
 Arrow buttons: Click the arrow buttons to access the required pages of parametric parts.
 Configure…: Click this to configure the linear and angular tolerance as well as the extension.
2. Double-click the required parametric part to import and the system will show Parametric: Path
dialog box displaying the existing dimensions of the part.
3. It is possible to edit the dimensions as per your requirements and then click OK so that the
parametric part is imported.
imported geometry.
201
4.5.7.3 DWG Files
In order to import a DWG file, perform the following steps:
1. Select DWG files ( ) option and the system will display Open dialog box. The fields
provided in this dialog box are previously described in DXF files.
2. Select the required .dwg file and click Open button so that the system imports it.
imported geometry.
4.5.7.4 MEC Files
In order to import a MEC file, perform the following steps:
1. Select MEC file ( ) option and the system will display Open dialog box. The fields
2. Select the required .mec file and click Open button so that the system imports it.
imported geometry.
In order to import HPGL files, perform the following steps:
1. Select HPGL files ( ) option and the system will display Open dialog box. The fields
2. Select the required HPGL file and click Open button so that the system imports it.
imported geometry.
202
4.5.8 Machining Macros
Machining Macros ( ) option allows the user to open, save and delete machining macros. When
pointing this option, the system will display the following options:
Open ( ): Select this option in order to open an existing machining macro as follows:
1. Click Open button and the system will display Select machining macro dialog box.
2. Select the required machining macro and click OK button so that the system opens it.
Save ( ): Select this option in order to save new machining instructions as macro or save the
changes made to an existing one as follows:
1. Click Save button and the system will prompt the user to select a reference point in the
Drawing window which consists of the machined part.
2. Mark the reference point and the system will display Machining macros saving dialog box.
3. Introduce the reference of the machining macro and click OK button so that those machining
instructions are saved.
Save as ( ): Select this option in order to save the new machining instructions as macros or save an
already saved machining macro with a new reference.
Delete ( ): Select this option in order to erase a machining macro as follows:
1. Click Delete button and the system will display Delete machining macros dialog box listing all
the saved machining macros.
2. Select the one required to delete and click Delete button, so that it is erased.
3. Click Close in order to close Delete machining macros dialog box.
203
4.5.9 Lead-in/Lead-outs
Open ( ): It opens an existing machining lead-in/lead-outs from the list.
Save ( ): It allows the user saving the current lead-in/lead-out in the system.
Save as ( ): It allows the user saving the current lead-in/lead-out with a different name.
Delete ( ): It allows the user deleting the required lead-in/lead-outs by selection.
4.5.10 Remnants
Remnants option allows the user to open, save and delete remnants. If selected, the system will display
the following options:
Open ( ): Select this option in order to open a remnant as follows:
1. Select Open option and the system will display Select a remnant dialog box listing all the
available remnants.
2. Select the required remnant from the list provided and click OK button so that the system
opens it.
3. The user can also filter and look for the remnant that satisfies his conditions by selecting
Criteria checkbox. If selected, the Navigation button will be activated, which will direct the user
to Select a remnant window as shown below:
204
Figure 100: Select a remnant dialog box
4. Introduce the Reference, Material, Thickness, maximum and minimum Length, maximum and
minimum width and User data between other options as can be seen in the previous window.
5. The system will display the remnants that meet the conditions previously introduced and the
user will have to select the required one and click OK button.
Save ( ): Select Save option in order to save new remnants or to save the changes made to an existing
one as follows:
1. Click Save button and the system will display Remnant saving dialog box.
2. Introduce the Reference of the remnant, select the required Material from the drop-down list or
include a new one, introduce the Thickness, Quantity, Priority and User data if required
between other options.
205
Save As ( ): Select Save as option in order to save a new remnant or to save an already existing
remnant with different values.
Delete ( ): Select Delete option in order to erase the required remnants as follows:
1. Click Delete button and the system will display Delete remnants dialog box listing all the saved
remnants.
2. Select the remnant required to delete.
3. The user can also filter and look for the remnants to delete by selecting Criteria checkbox. If
selected, the Navigation button will be enabled, which will direct the user to Delete remnants
window.
4. Introduce the Reference of the remnant, select the required Material from the drop-down list or
include a new one, introduce the Thickness, Quantity, Priority and User data if required
between other options.
5. The system will display the remnants that meet the conditions previously introduced and the
user will have to select the remnant required to delete and click OK button so that it is erased.
4.5.11 Duct Holes
Duct Holes option enables the user to open, save and delete duct holes. When selected, the system will
display the following options:
Open ( ): Select this option in order to open an existing duct hole as follows:
1. Click Open button and the system will display Duct hole selection dialog box listing all the
saved duct holes.
2. Select the required Duct hole and click OK button so that the system opens it.
Save ( ): Select this option in order to save a specific geometry as duct hole or to save the changes
made to an existing duct hole as follows:
206
1. Click Save button and the system will prompt the user to select a Reference point.
2. Once the reference point has been marked the system will display Duct holes saving dialog
box as shown below:
Figure 101: Duct holes saving dialog box
3. Introduce the required Reference for the duct hole and click OK button so that the system
saves it.
Save As ( ): Select this option in order to save a specific geometry as duct hole or save an already
saved one with a new reference.
Delete ( ): Select this option to delete a duct hole as follows:
1. Click Delete button and the system will display Delete duct holes dialog box listing all the
saved duct holes.
2. Select the one required to erase and click Delete button in order to delete it.
3. Click Close button in order to exit from Delete duct holes dialog box.
4.5.12 Parametrics
Parametrics option allows the user to open, save and delete parametric geometry parts. If selected, the
system will the following options:
Open ( ): Select Open in order to open a parametric geometry part as follows:
1. Click Open button and the system will display Select a parametric dialog box listing all the
saved parametric geometry parts.
207
2. Select the required one and click OK button so that the system opens it.
Save ( ): Select Save option in order to save the geometry of a part as parametric geometry part or
to save the changes made to an existing one as follows:
1. Click Save button and the system will prompt the user to mark a reference point.
2. Once the reference point has been marked the system will display Parametrics saving dialog
box as shown below:
Figure 102: Parametrics saving dialog box
3. Introduce the required Reference for the parametric geometry part and click OK so that it is
saved.
 When clicking Save to save the changes made to an existing parametric geometry part, the
Parametrics saving dialog box will not be displayed.
Save as ( ): Select this option to save a new geometry as parametric geometry part or save an
already saved parametric geometry part with a new reference.
Delete ( ): Select this option to delete a parametric geometry part as follows:
1. Click Delete button and the system will display Delete a parametric dialog box.
2. Select a parametric geometry part that has to be deleted and then click Delete. The selected
parametric geometry part will be deleted.
3. Click Close button to close the Delete a parametric dialog box.
208
4.5.13 Mosaics
Mosaics option enables the user to create, save and configure mosaics. When selected, the system
displays the following options:
Create ( ): This option allows creating mosaics for a part as follows:
1. Click Create and mark the initial and end points of the area where the user wants to create the
mosaic. The system will display Create mosaic dialog box as shown below:
Figure 103: Create mosaic dialog box
2. Introduce the length of the mosaic with respect to X and Y axis in Length (X) and Length (Y)
fields as well as the Distance between the rectangles.
3. Click OK button and the mosaic will be created within the two selected points.
Save ( ): This option allows saving the mosaics as follows:
1. Click Save option and the system will display Part saving dialog box as shown below:
209
Figure 104: Part saving dialog box
2. Introduce the Reference, Machine, Material, Thickness, Date, Group and various User data as
per your requirements.
3. Click OK button in order to save the mosaic.
Configure mosaics ( ): This option configures the parameters related to mosaics as follows:
1. Click Configure mosaics button and the system will display Modify mosaics properties dialog
box as shown below:
210
Figure 105: Modify mosaics properties dialog box
2. The fields provided in the previous dialog box are briefly described below:
 Insert reference text in each part: If enabled, the system will insert the reference text in each part.
 Delete the empty files: Select this checkbox in order to remove the empty mosaics. Thanks to this
option it is possible to avoid saving empty files in the system.
 Format of reference parts: The user will be able to activate Use letters to identify the rows, Use
letters to identify the columns and Enumerate the rows of the mosaic from top to bottom checkboxes.
 Mode of create parts: The user will be able to select between Create a part by each tile and Create
several parts by each tile.
 Delete parts with perimeter less than (mm): Select this checkbox in order to delete the parts with a
smaller perimeter than the value specified in this field.
 Join the parts inside each tile whose reference text is: Select this checkbox in order to join the
parts with same reference text in each tile.
211
 Assign material to parts by reference text: In this section the user can create a new material and
modify or delete an existing one respectively by means of New, Modify and Delete buttons attached
at the bottom.
4.5.14 Help
In this section, the user will find useful information in Documents and Online Resources.
4.5.15 Print
Print option allows the user printing the details of the part.
4.5.16 Configuration Options
The Configuration Options menu includes the following sections:
Figure 106: Configuration options (Drawing module)
4.5.16.1 Draw and Nest
This option enables the configuration of the parameters that correspond to the Drawing module. These
parameters are divided into different groups and are shown through the following tabs: Auxiliar, Do All,
Print, Colors and Display.
212
AUXILIAR
 Adjust sheets to sides: If this parameter is activated, the sheets are drawn in one corner of the
graphic area. If deactivated the sheets are adjusted to the center of the graphic area. Activation of
this parameter is recommended since, if the sheets are drawn in one corner, more space is available
for the part screens.
 Work with sheet references: If this parameter is disabled all the sheets with the same thickness,
material and size will be assumed to be equal, however if it is enabled it is possible to differentiate
between sheets with the same thickness, material and size, by giving them a reference name.
When creating a new sheet, with this parameter enabled, the system will prompt for a reference. This
is used when there are sheets with a quality control. For example, with 100 sheets of 2000x1000, the
reference of the sheet to use in each job will appear in the worksheet.
If this option has been enabled, the user should create the sheets one by one so that each one has
its own reference, and this parameter works properly.
 Automatic sheet references: By means of this option the user will be able to define a specific format
for the automatic references. If enabled, the Format Navigation button will direct the user to Automatic
sheet references format dialog box, where the user can configure the required format of the automatic
references.
 Verify the machining of the sheets while saving: If enabled, the system will test if the machining
process has been done properly when saving the sheet. The system will make sure that:
o All the parts and contours are machined.
o There is no overlapping between parts.
o There are no leads, micro-joints, loops…that overlap with other elements.
The system will show a message with the result of the test. If there has been any error the warning
message will display where the error has occurred. If not the user will get the following completion
message: “All machining on the sheet has been executed”.
 Define the default snap mode: When this option is active, a new button will be displayed at the snap
mode toolbar and it will allow defining the snap mode by default. The selected option will be displayed
213
with a red frame all around the button. Each time the user uses another option different than the
default option, after applying the option selected the system will come back to the default option. To
disable any default option the user has to make double click on the New button.
 “Undo” option: This option is very useful when making changes in order to allow going back to the
previous states of the system. Here the user has to select between all levels (the system will store in
the memory the highest number of levels possible) and defined number of levels.
 Scale factor for keyboard zoom & Scale factor for mouse zoom: By means of these options the
user can configure the scale factors while doing zoom, both for the keyboard and the mouse wheel.
The value to introduce as scale factor should be in range of 0.1 to 100, being 2 the default value. A
smaller value than 1 inverts the zoom behaviour. Where the page up key makes zoom out and the
page down key makes zoom in. The same is applicable to the mouse wheel, where if value 1 is
applied the zoom will not be performed.
o Moving the mouse wheel forward, the system will perform a zoom-in and moving backward
the system will perform a zoom-out.
o If the mouse right button is pressed while moving forward the mouse wheel, the drawing will
be moved down and if the mouse right button is pressed while moving backward the mouse
wheel, the drawing will be moved up.
o If the mouse left button is pressed while moving forward the mouse wheel, the drawing will be
moved to the left and if the mouse right button is pressed while moving backward the mouse
wheel, the drawing will be moved to the right.
o Keeping the middle button pressed while dragging the mouse the user pans the screen.
o Keeping the middle button and shift key pressed while dragging the mouse the user does a
dynamic zoom. As the mouse cursor moves up the screen, the view should zoom in. As the
mouse cursor moves down the screen view should zoom out. To configure mouse sensibility
or change its behaviour it is possible to change this parameter.
 Quadrant angle: This is the angle in which the circles are going to be divided. It is only for
references, the circle is one arc. But when making a line which starts in one point of the circle, and
the Snap mode is Quadrants, then the system will catch the points which are at the angle step given
here. The value given by default is 90 degrees, therefore there are four possible points.
 Use: When calculating material optimization, the system will use the:
o Real area: External area without the interiors.
214
o External area: Area of the exterior perimeter of the part.
o Rectangular area: Area of the minimum rectangle of the part.
 Generate sheet box windows metafile while saving (WMF): If enabled, the system will generate a
WMF file with the current sheet box nesting when saving. WMF is a standard graphic format that can
be treated from many external applications. The file will be generated inside Database folder.
 Generate sheet windows metafile while saving (WMF): If enabled, the system will generate a
WMF file with the current sheet when saving. WMF is a standard graphic format that can be treated
from many external applications. This file will also be generated inside Database folder.
 Generate PDF of print sheet box while saving: With this option, PDF documents will be generated
with the Print Box of the selected document when saving the parts and nestings. Every time a part or
a nesting is saved, the corresponding print box PDF will be generated. It will be stored in the same
directory as the product it represents and will take the same name.
 Generate sheet DXF while saving: As in the previous options, if enabled, the system will generate a
DXF file with the current sheet nesting. DXF files are standard drawing exchange formats
 Generate part DXF while saving: If enabled, the system will generate a DXF file of the active part.
 Save autorecover information: This option saves the automatically recovered information of the
current work in the drawing and nesting modules. The desired time to save the auto recovered
information can be set.
 Order subjobs: Whenever entering the Nesting module the subjobs will be ordered depending on the
configuration set here.
 Contour attributes: The postprocessor will generate the proper CNC code for the attributes of the
contours here defined. The system will display Contour Attributes dialog box as shown below, where
the user will have to introduce the required data:
215
Figure 107: Contour Attributes dialog box
 Auxiliary geometry: It is possible to create non cut lines configuring their line properties as well as
their visualization. First of all, it is necessary to create the new non cut types that will be used and to
specify the name and properties of the line (color, style and thickness), as well as the possibility of
visualizing this line on the sheet. From this moment on it will be possible to modify these properties
from Colors tab located next to the rest of customizable elements.
216
Figure 108: Configure: Draw and Nest (Auxiliar) window
DO ALL
 Order of sheets: In order to select the sheets for the nesting, the system will use the type of order
set in this field. The user will be provided with the following options:
o Largest to smallest
o Smallest to largest
o By priority
217
 Remnants before sheets: In order to select the sheets for the nesting, the system will look first at the
status of Remnants before sheets parameter and given the case it is enabled, the system will
prioritize the use of existing remnants over sheets.
 Select sheets for quotation: This option enables the user selecting sheets for quotation. The drop-
down list provided on the right side of the field provides the following options:
o No
o Yes
o Only these
o If the job is for quotation
 Only use sheets according to the criteria for sheet selection: By means of this parameter, the
user can configure the required criteria for sheets selection. Once it has been enabled, the arrow
( ) button located on the right side will also become enabled.
The system will display Sheet selection window, where the user will be able to set the minimum and
maximum length as well as the minimum and maximum width of the sheets. In addition, the user will
be able to see the values previously introduced in the following fields:
o User data (1-3)
o Show the sheets with quantities equal to zero
o Select blocked sheets
o Select the remnants generated by nesting
o Select the remnants generated by user
The last two parameters previously listed will be disabled. In order to modify them, the user will have
to go to Nesting module / Sheets / New / Criteria window. Whenever Do all option is executed, the
system will use those sheets that match with the defined criteria.
 Make unitary nestings with long parts: Thanks to this parameter, it is possible to create unitary
nestings with long parts when executing Do all option. The user must introduce the required value in
Minimum length field, which must be in millimeters. This option will check all the parts that compose
the job considering their dimensions and if any of them is bigger than the value here configured, the
system will create a unitary nesting with the rotation of the dimension that exceeds the configured
218
value. Given the case both dimensions are bigger than the value specified, the part will be nested in
the original rotation. For instance, if the user wants to make a unitary nesting for all the parts of a job,
it would only be necessary to configure the Minimum length with a small enough value, as for
example one millimeter.
 Look for sheets in stored nestings: If this parameter is enabled, the system will search first for the
nestings saved as Stored nesting. When activating this parameter, the following parameters will
become enabled:
o Criteria: This field allows filtering the stored nestings that the user wants to use. Once it has
been enabled, the arrow ( ) button located on the right side will also become enabled.
Whenever this button is selected, the system will display Import stored nesting (Criteria)
window. This window allows filtering nestings by Machine, Material, Thickness, Reference,
Date, Length and Width.
o Delete existing machining: By activating this parameter, if any of the nestings to be used has
machining, it will be previously deleted before including it in the job and it will be machined
again during the process.
o Regenerate: By activating this parameter, if any of the nestings to use has machining, it will
be completely regenerated before including it in the job and it will be machined again during
the process. Remember that regenerating also supposes deleting the existing machining.
 Look for the best format of sheets: Given the case this parameter is enabled, the system will try to
nest all the parts making use of each one of the existing formats. For example, there are three
different types of formats. The system will execute three tries, by nesting all the parts of the job in
format number one, then in format number two and finally, in format number three. The system will
compare the efficiency reached by every one of the formats and will make use of the most efficient
one.
 Look for the best combination of sheets: This parameter depends on the field Minimum efficiency.
If this parameter is enabled, the system will take into account the minimum efficiency set and will look
for the best sheet per each nesting (the most efficient one). As in the previous case, imagine there
are three different type of formats. The system will test all the existing formats per nesting, and will
choose the most efficient one per nesting. For example, the system will test nesting number one, in
sheet number 1 (with an efficiency of 65%), in sheet number two (efficiency of 72%) and sheet
number three (efficiency of 85%). Since sheet number three is the most efficient, the system will save
it and start testing again with the following nesting in every sheet format following the same process
219
until all the parts have been nested. If none of the existing sheets meets the efficiency requirement
set in Minimum efficiency field, the system will keep the one that has achieved the highest efficiency.
 Minimum efficiency to eliminate each sheet: Once Do All option has been performed and the
machining has been executed, the system will test whether the sheets used meet the minimum
efficiency requirement set in this field. Those sheets whose efficiency is not bigger than the value
configured, will be deleted. In this case the system will make use of other sheets until the minimum
efficiency is exceeded.
 Minimum efficiency calculation mode: This option allows deciding the way that the efficiency
(defined in the previous point) to eliminate sheets will be calculated. The available options are:
o Real area: Sum of the real area of all parts.
o External area: Sum of the external area of all parts.
o Rectangular area: Sum of the rectangular area of all parts.
o All parts bounding box: Area of the bounding box of all parts.
 Maximum time to look for the best sheets: Here the user must introduce the maximum time that
will be taken to search for the best sheets. Remember that the time must be introduced in seconds.
During the Do All execution, once the time here specified is reached, the system will stop testing
methods and will choose the best one (most efficient) found up to that moment.
 Prenesting: This option allows creating temporary sheets with limited quantity so that it is possible to
select automatically which ones are the most adequate to execute the parts nesting of a determined
job. In order to activate this option, it is necessary to activate Look for the best format of sheets or
Look for the best combination of sheets. These options are necessary in order to test all the
temporary formats that the system can create.
Apart from temporary sheets, it is also possible to indicate if it is required to use or not the sheets
that have already been created in the system. If this option is activated, the system would use the
same sheets that would be used in the nesting of a complete job. If sheet dimensions are required as
much adjusted as possible, the user can configure Adjust final sheet dimensions to nested
dimensions option. This parameter can be defined both in X and Y or in both dimensions. This option
allows creating sheet formats that take full advantage of a coil, given that it is possible to set it to
always adjust in X.
Once the system obtains the final sheet format result, the user will be able to create the sheets in the
database or not. In this way, the user will also be able to create quotation sheets if required.
220
Finally, it will also be possible to launch the sheet list so that the user can be provided with the list of
used formats in the current job. If required, it will be possible to print directly or to get a previous
display to save the list in a determined format as, for example, PDF.
Figure 109: Prenesting dialog box
o Use fixed dimensions for width of the sheets: Indicate the length, a minimum and maximum
width and a step value for each of the two dimensions and the system will create temporary
sheet formats based on those values.
o Use a range of dimensions for widths of the sheets: Indicate a predetermined width together
with the step range for the sheet length.
o Minimum & Maximum length: Indicate the minimum and maximum length of the sheets.
o Minimum & Maximum width: Indicate the minimum and maximum length of the sheets.
o Step for length & width: Here the user will be able to define the step for legth and width in
millimeters.
o Create the used sheets in database: Once the system obtains the final sheet format result,
the user will be able to create the used sheets in database or not. In this way, the user will be
able to create quotation sheets and Save sheets as quotation sheets if required.
221
o Adjust final sheets to nested dimensions: If sheet dimensions are required as much adjusted
as possible, the user can configure this parameter. It can be defined both in X and Y or in
both dimensions.
o Use system sheets: This allows the user to use the system sheets.
o Print sheets at the end of the prenesting: This option allows the user to preview before
printing so as to get a previous display in a determined format.
o Prompt for data before prenesting: When selected, the Prenesting window is displayed when
the user performs Do All option.
 Generate remnants after nesting: Given the case this parameter is enabled, once the nesting has
been executed, the system will generate automatically the remnants of every sheet (if any).
 Cut after nesting: If enabled, the system will perform the machining operation after the nesting has
been done.
 Deal with equal sheets: Using this option, the system will calculate if the same sheet can be done
twice instead of making the nesting and machining process of the same parts in the same sheets
more than once, what will help the user save time.
If this parameter is disabled, the system will get one sheet and make the nesting and machining. Get
the following sheet and make the nesting and machining. The system will execute the same steps
once and again until the whole job has been finished even if the sheets are equal, which results in a
longer execution time.
If this parameter is enabled, after performing the first sheet and machining, the system will detect
whether the following sheet is equal to the first one (this means we have the same number of parts,
which can be placed in the same positions). Given the case it detects an equal sheet, the system will
store just one sheet, meanwhile the Worksheet will define that the sheet must be machined twice.
222
Figure 110: Configure: Draw and Nest (Do All) window
PRINT
 Print sheets while saving: If enabled, the system will print the sheets while saving.
 Print machining: If enabled, the machining will also appear in the worksheet.
 Print the full remnants: If enabled, the remnants will be filled with linear texture making easier the
differentiation between sheet and remnant when printing.
 Only the initialization: Enabled, in the worksheet will only appear the initialization. This option is
activated when Print machining is enabled.
 Prompt for sheets before printing: Do All option may generate more than one sheet. If this option is
enabled, the system will ask for the sheets required to print instead of printing all of them.
223
 Print: The system will generate the worksheet of the sheets selected here. The user can select
between; The current sheet, Every sheet of the subjob, Every sheet of the job and Select sheets.
 Prints identifiers of parts: If enabled, the identifiers of the parts will be included in the printing
worksheet.
 Identifiers: The user can select between the following options:
o Print the name: The system will include the name of the part inside the geometry.
o Print the index: The system will insert the same number to every equal part of the sheet. This
index is very useful because it will be printed in the Factory sheets list.
o Print the order: The system will include in the parts the number that corresponds to their
order.
 Line width: When printing, the width of the different elements involved can be modified in order to
make easier their identification. The user will be able to set the Line width of the Geometry part,
Geometry sheet, Machining part and Machining sheet.
 Prompt for template name before printing: If enabled the system will prompt for the template name
to use before printing. This option is useful when the user has more than one template defined. These
templates, also called boxes, can be parameterized. In other words, the user can define the line
thickness, position and dimension of the drawings, text format and database fields required in the
boxes. In order to define a new box, contact the product support team.
224
Figure 111: Configure: Draw and Nest (Print) window
COLORS
This window allows configuring the colors of the whole system. The user will get the list of
elements/aspects that can be configured by clicking the drop-down arrow located at the top of the
window. The configurable aspects are the following: Background, Cursor cross, Axis, Background of
sheets, Edge of sheet, Background of remnants, Edge of remnants, Clamps and work zone, Straight,
Point, Selection, Dragging, Machining, Machining with multitorch, From Point, Rapids, Cycles, Machining
texts, Punched, Punch attribute, Common punch attribute, Shear attribute, Mark attribute, Cut attribute,
Micro-joints attribute, Shear, Pattern, Dimensions / Text, Simulation Window-Capture, Virtual movement,
Bridges, Loops, Lead-in / Lead-outs, Micro-joints, Geometry, Upper and lower chamfering, Upper
chamfering, Lower chamfering, Remnant line, Cutting quality 1-12, Powder mark, Drill mark, Pen mark,
225
Cut mark, Rapid with head down, Suction cup, Activated suction cup, Reference point, Grid, Auxiliary
clams and auxiliary work zone, Distinguished color 1-30, Active part in part list.
Figure 112: Colors examples
The user will be able to configure the Type, Make on and Color of the previously mentioned aspects.
226
Figure 113: Configure: Draw and Nest (Colors) window
DISPLAY
 Show remnant references on screen: If enabled, whenever a remnant is generated the system will
show the assigned reference inside it.
 Show part texts on the sheet: In the Drawing window it is possible to assign a description text which
will have no machining effect. If this parameter is enabled, this text will be displayed.
 Show the dragging of the part with collision control: If enabled, the user will be able to visualize
the dragging part with the collision control.
 Show non-cut contours on the sheet: The system provides an option to assign non-cut technology
to the contours. This means that these contours will not be machined unless this assigned technology
changes. If enabled, the non-cut geometries will be shown in the configured color.
227
 Selection by window/capture/trap: If enabled, whenever the user selects parts (to erase, copy or
move them between many other options) they will get different colors so that the visualization is
easier and clearer.
 Simulate selection when mouse is moved: If enabled, whenever the mouse passes over a
segment, this segment will change color showing which contour would be selected if the mouse was
clicked.
 Show micro-joints: If enabled, the micro-joints will be shown and an exterior line will appear in the
contours. This parallel line to the external contours is the center of the exterior punch. The distance
between the exterior contours and this line is the middle of the width of the configured tool for the
exteriors.
 Display all clamp and work zones: If enabled, the nesting module will show in the screen all the
work zones as well as the clamps in the configured positions.
The clamp zone changes depending on the station the turret is working with. If this parameter is
disabled, only the clamp work zone of the current station will be shown with continuous line and the
rest with discontinuous lines.
 Simulate the full remnants: If enabled, the remnants will be filled with a green color for making the
identification easier.
 Display dimensions on the sheet: Although the dimensions made in the drawing module will be
always shown, the user can decide to keep them in the nesting module or not by activating this
parameter.
 View nesting limit: When enabled, the system will display the line that shows the end of nesting.
 Highlight selected part: When the user selects a part in the Nesting Part list window, the geometry
of the select part will be highlighted in the sheet only when this option is enabled. In the same way, it
the user select any parts on the sheet, the system will highlight them on the Parts List window as well
as all the equal parts nested on the sheet. This color can be configured in Color window.
 Show points at the center of punching instructions: This parameter allows a display of the central
point of each punch. This way, a better and faster punching interpretation can be obtained. The user
will be able to select between: No, Drawing, Nesting and Both of them.
 Text size for the quantities in the parts window: This parameter allows the user modifying the size
of the text that will appear on the sheets window of the Nesting module. The user will be able to
select between; Small, Normal, Large and Largest.
228
 Postprocessor words: From this window the user can define which text will be shown on the sheet
when a function is selected, as well as the font and size of the postprocessor words displayed on the
sheet. If none is specified, the system will use the windows standard font size configured by default
on the computer.
These parameters allow visualizing or hiding the Postprocessor words as well as changing their text.
 Move the “offset” of the part on the sheet: If enabled, when getting a part from the list, the system
will show additional lines from the margin of the part showing the minimum distance between parts.
 Selection with multitorch: When the machine has been configured as multi-torch, the system will
make the nesting trying to use the maximum number of torches. If this option is enabled, when a part
is select, the system will select the entire multi-torch group (given that the parts will be machined at
the same time as selected).
 Selection by window/capture/trap without multitorch: When Selection with multitorch is enabled

this parameter will be highlighted.
 Show selected machining: This option allows visualizing the selected machining.
 Show micro-joints with points: If enabled, the system will display the micro-joints with two points in
order to show their location.
229
 Display fixed position points of the clamp: If enabled, the system will show the fixed position
points of the clamps.
 Show part references on the screen: If this option is enabled, the part references will be included
inside the contour of the parts. It will not change the machining of the parts, it is only a visualization
option.
 Rapids:
o Show the direction of movements: If enabled, the system will show with an arrow the direction
of every rapid movement.
o Show rapids in drawing module: If the visualization is enabled in the Drawing module, the
user will be provided with three options:
 One part: It shows rapids when one part is opened.
 Multiple parts: It shows rapids when multiple parts are opened.
 Always: It shows rapids constantly.
 Show rapids in nesting and machining module: Select this checkbox to visualize the rapids in Nesting
and Machining module.
 Show chamfer information: Both in Nesting and Drawing module the user can visualize chamfer
information. The system will display Chamber information setup dialog box as shown below:
230
Figure 115: Chamfer information setup dialog box
 Text position, font and size can be selected as well as where the text will be shown: Drawing,
Nesting or Both of them.
 Simulation: When clicking this button the system will display Simulation dialog box as shown below:
Figure 116: Simulation dialog box

231
Here the user will be able to define the shear movement while the machining simulation. The user can
select between three different movements:
o On XY: The shear will move using both axes at the same time.
o First on one axis and later on the other: The shear will move first in horizontal or vertical and
then in the other way.
o Head radius (mm): Here the user can introduce the Head radius in millimeters.
o Number of milling broken segments: This option allows the user to define the number of
milling broken segments.
Figure 117: Configure: Draw and Nest (Display) window
232
4.5.16.2 Interface
The Interface option enables the user to create a new toolbar and change the existing toolbar
applications among many other options.
1. Click Interface option and the system will display Customize dialog box:
Figure 118: Customize Quick Access
o Quick access
o Hide options
o Shortcut keys
o Ribbon
233
 In Hide options tab the user can set the configuration of the commands and select between Basic,
Advanced and Customized.
If Customized option is selected the user will be able to select between Basic and All and Hide
options section will be enabled. In this section the user can select between Current machine,
Machines of same type, All machines and enable Hide options in both modules parameter.
234
Figure 119: Customize Hide options
the applications.
235
Select an application and then introduce the key from the keyboard to assign as New Shortcut key
for the previously selected application. Click Assign button and the selected key will be assigned as
shortcut key as well as visualized in Existing keys field. The user can also select an existing shortcut
key from the Existing keys field and click Delete button in order to remove it.
 In Ribbon tab the user can edit the view and the items provided in the Ribbon.
236
groups.
237
group.
Warning window asking “Do you want to delete all ribbon customizations for this program?”.
operation.
4.5.17 Exit
Exit ( ) button allows the user to close Expert-Drawing window.
4.6 HOME
4.6.1 Draw
4.6.1.1 Access to Points
Access to points ( ) option displays the following menu:
238
Figure 122: Access to points options
239
 Delete Geometry: It deletes the geometric elements.
 Default snap mode: Click this option in order to go back to the previous snap mode.
4.6.1.2 Delete Geometry
The Delete Geometry ( ) button allows the user to delete the desired geometries from the design of
the part.
In order to delete the geometry, perform the following steps:
1. Click Delete Geometry and the system will display Selection toolbar as shown below:
Figure 123: Selection toolbar
2. Select the elements that have to be deleted using Selection toolbar and then right-click or click
Accept button on the Selection toolbar. The geometry will be deleted.
4.6.1.3 Available Geometries
 2D Points ( ): It creates geometric points. Select a point by means of the mouse or keyboard.
 Line Segments ( ): It creates line segments. Select the beginning and end points.
 Continuous Line ( ): It creates polylines. Select a point by means of the mouse or keyboard.
 Arc Segments ( ): It creates arc segments. Define the arc by three points.
 Full Circles ( ): It creates full circles. Define the circle and diameter of the circle.
 Lines ( ): It creates construction lines. Define one point and the desired angle of the line.
 Squares ( ): It creates squares. Define the square by its lower-left corner.
240
 Rectangles ( ): It creates rectangles. Define the rectangle by its centre.
 Modified Rectangles ( ): It creates rectangles with modified corners. Define the lower-left
corner of the rectangle.
 Polygons ( ): It creates polygons. Define the length of the polygon side.
 Obround Slots ( ): It creates Obround Slots. Define the linear groove by one point and one angle.
 Radial Slots ( ): It creates radial slots. Define the circular groove by the beginning point, end point
and centre.
 Ovals ( ): It creates ovals.
 Ellipses ( ): It creates ellipses.
 Pulleys ( ): It creates pulleys.
4.6.2 Modify
4.6.2.1 Break Elements
Break elements ( ) button displays the options shown below:
Figure 124: Break elements options
 Break Elements: It breaks and cuts geometric elements. This button allows the user to split elements
of geometry without eliminating the parts that limit a base element and contiguous elements.
241
 Break: It breaks one element in two pieces. In order to do it, perform the following steps:
1. Select Break button and select the element that the user wants to break.
2. Click to mark the breaking point and the element will be split with a point.
 Cut 1: It deletes the end of one element by doing the following:
1. Select Cut 1 button and then select a base element.
2. Select the portion of a second element intersecting the base element and the selected portion
of the second element will be deleted.
 Cut several: It deletes the end of several elements. It deletes the selected portions of elements
intersecting the base element as follows:
1. Select Cut several button and select the required base element.
2. Select the portions of other elements intersecting the base element and those will be deleted.
 Similar to Cut 1 option except for that this application deletes portions of several elements at the
same time.
 Join: It joins two crossed elements by deleting the selected portions of elements. Perform the
following steps:
1. Click Join button and then select the portion of the first element that has to be deleted.
2. Select the portion of the second element intersecting the first one. The system will join the two
intersecting elements by deleting the selected portions.
 Bridges: It connects two elements by means of a bridge as follows:
1. Click Bridges button and then select the first element that has to be connected.
2. Select the second element and the system will prompt the user to introduce the Width value of
the bridge.
3. Click OK button and the system will connect the two elements by a bridge.
242
4.6.2.2 Fillets
Fillets ( ) option allows the user to create a fillet at the vertex of a geometry. In order to create a fillet
perform the following steps.
1. Select Fillets option and then select the first and second portions of the geometry which
constitute the corner or intersection of the geometry.
2. The system will display a dialog box asking the user the Radius value.
3. Click OK button and the system will create a fillet at the vertex.
 Once a fillet has been created at the vertex of a geometry at a specified radius, it is possible to
click the other required vertices to create fillets of the same radius.
4.6.2.3 Chamfer
Chamfer ( ) option allows the user to create chamfers at the vertex of the geometry. In order to create
chamfers, do the following:
1. Click Chamfers button and the system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 125: Chamfer values dialog box
2. The different fields in this dialog box are briefly described below:
o d1: The distance value from the vertex with respect to the first element.
o d2: The distance value from the vertex with respect to the second element.
243
o Constrain proportions: It indicates whether or not the values in ‘d1’ and ‘d2’ changes
proportionately.
3. Introduce the required values and then click OK.
4. Select the first and second element of the geometry. The chamfer is created at the vertex of
the geometry.
4.6.2.4 Offset
Select Offset ( ) option to draw a contour for a selected contour at a specified offset. In order to draw
a contour at a specified offset, do the following:
1. Click Offset button and then select the base contour.
2. Select the position of the contour and the required corner shape and the system will display the
Figure 126: Compensation mode
3. Select the required Compensation mode and click OK button. The system will display another
Figure 127: Compensation value
244
4. Introduce the Offset value in Value field and then click OK. The contour for the selected
contour will be drawn at the specified offset.
4.6.2.5 Lengthen Elements
Lengthen Elements ( ) option allows the user to lengthen two elements by joining them. In order to
lengthen elements perform the following steps:
1. Click Lengthen Elements button and then select the first element that has to be joined and
lengthened.
2. Select the second element that has to be joined with the first element. The elements will be
connected and lengthened.
4.6.2.6 Join Elements
Join Elements ( ) option allows the user to join two elements as follows:
1. Click Join Elements button and then select the first element that has to be joined.
2. Select the second element that has to be joined with the first element and the elements will be
joined.
4.6.2.7 Fitting
Fitting ( ) option creates a fitting type curve for the geometry. In order to do it, perform the following
steps:
1. Select Fitting button and the system will allow the user to select the required geometry by
means of Selection toolbar.
2. Once selected click Accept button located in the Selection toolbar and the system will display
Fitting dialog box as shown below:
245
Figure 128: Fitting dialog box
Find the different fields provided briefly described below:
o By points: It indicates whether the segments of the selected geometry are converted to an arc
or not.
o Smooth: In indicates whether the segments of the selected geometry are smoothened or not.
If selected, the user will have to introduce the required values in Minimum number of
elements, Maximum radius and Tolerance fields.
o Make tangent: It indicates whether the arc is created based on the intersection of two
tangents or not. If selected, the user will have to introduce the required values in Minimum
angular error admitted, Maximum angular error admitted, Radius error tolerance and Position
error tolerance fields.
o Smooth and make tangent: It indicates whether the segments are smoothened and if the arc
is created based on the intersection of two tangents or not. If selected the user will have to
introduce the required values in Minimum number of elements, Maximum radius, Tolerance,
Minimum angular error admitted, Maximum angular error admitted, Radius error tolerance
and Position error tolerance fields.
246
3. Select the required option and click OK button. The fitting curve will be created for the selected
geometry.
4.6.2.8 Shorten-Lengthen
Shorten-Lengthen ( ) option shortens or lengthens the selected element. In order to break elements,
do the following:
1. Click Shorten-lengthen button and then select the element that has to be shortened or
lengthened. The system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 129: Shorten-lengthen dialog box
The different fields in this dialog box are briefly described below:
o Shorten: It indicates whether the length of the element is reduced or not.
o Lengthen: It indicates whether the length of the element is increased or not.
o Middle: It indicates whether the element is shortened or lengthened in the mid-point or not.
o End: It indicates whether the element is shortened or lengthened in the end point or not.
o Picked point: It indicates whether the element is shortened or lengthened in the selected
point or not.
o Value: It indicates the length value of the element.
2. Introduce the required values and then click OK button. The length of the selected element will
be shortened or lengthened depending on the values previously set.
247
4.6.2.9 Join and Fillet
Join and fillet ( ) option joins two intersected elements with a fillet of a specified radius. In order to
break elements with Join and fillet button, do the following:
1. Click Join and fillet button and then select the first element.
2. Select the second element which is intersected to the first element. The system will display a
dialog box asking the user the required radius value.
3. Enter the Radius value in the Value field and then click OK. The two intersected elements will
be joined with a fillet.
4.6.3 One Touch Figures

This menu allows the user creating twelve different notches for geometries, as shown in the different
images provided:
Figure 130: One-touch figures
One-touch figure 1: Select this to create a notch at the vertex of the geometry. In order to create this
notch, do the following:
1. Click One-touch figure 1 button and the system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 131: One-touch figure 1
248
o d1: The distance value from the vertex with respect to the first element.
o d2: The distance value from the vertex with respect to the second element.
o Constrain proportions: It indicates whether or not the values in ‘d1’ and ‘d2’ changes
proportionately.
3. Select the first and second elements of the geometry and the notch will be created at the
vertex.
 One-touch figure 2: Select to create a notch at the vertex of the geometry. In order to create this
2. Introduce the radius value in the ‘r’ field and then click OK.
vertex.
 One-touch figure 3: Select this to create a notch at the vertex of the geometry. In order to create this
249
2. Introduce the radius in ‘r’ field and then click OK.
vertex.
 One-touch figure 4: Select this to create a notch of specified length at a specified point of the
geometry. In order to create this notch, do the following:
o l: It is the length value of the notch.
o p: It is the depth value of the notch.
3. Select the base element and the insertion point of the notch.
250
4. Select the position of the notch and the notch will be created at the specified point.
 One-touch figure 5: Select this to create a notch of specified radius and depth. In order to create this
o r: It is the radius value of the notch.
 The radius value should be less than the depth value.
3. Select the base element and the insertion point.
4. Select the position of the notch and the notch of specified radius and depth will be created.
 One-touch figure 6: Select this to create a notch of specified radius and depth. In order to create this
1. Click One-touch figure 6 button and the system will displays the following dialog box to enter
the radius and depth value (refer to One-touch figure 5):
251
2. Enter the Radius value in ‘r’ field and Depth value in the ‘p’ field and then click OK.
 The radius value should be greater than the depth value.
4. Select the position of the notch and the notch of specified radius and depth will be created.
 One-touch figure 7: Select this to create a notch of a specified width and depth. In order to create
this notch, do the following:
o l: It is the width value of the notch.
252
2. Enter the required values and then click OK.
3. Select the base element and insertion point.
4. Select the position of the notch and the notch of specified width and depth will be created.
 One-touch figure 8: Select this to create a notch of a specified radius, depth, and width. In order to
create this notch, do the following:
1. Click One-touch figure 8 button and then the system will display the following dialog box:
o r: It is the radius value of the notch.
o a: It is the width value of the notch.
2. Enter the required values and then click OK.
4. Select the position of the notch and the notch will be created.
 One-touch figure 9: Select this to create a notch of specified width, depth, radius, and width of the
base. In order to create this notch, do the following:
253
2. Introduce the radius value in ‘r’ field, width value in ‘a’ field, width of the base value in ‘l’ field,
and depth value in ‘p’ field. Click OK.
4. Select the position of the notch and the notch of specified radius, width, width of the base, and
depth will be created.
 One-touch figure 10: Select this to create a notch of specified width, depth, and depth up to the base
point of the notch. In order to create this notch, do the following:
1. Click One-touch figure 10 button and the system will display the following dialog box to enter
the width and depth value (refer One-touch figure 7):
2. Enter the width value in ‘l’ field, depth value in ‘p’ field, depth up to the base point of the notch
in ‘pm’ field. Click OK.
4. Select the position of the notch and the specified notch will be created.
254
 One-touch figure 11: Select this to create rectangular or circular notches at the vertex of geometries.
In order to create this notch, do the following:
The different fields in this dialog box are described as below:
o d1: It indicates the depth value of the notch.
o d2: It indicates the width value of the notch.
2. Introduce the required values and then select between Rectangular or Circular shape of notch.
Click OK.
3. Select the first and second element of the geometry.
4. Select the position of the notch and the notch will be created at the vertex of the geometry.
 One-touch figure 12: Select this to create a notch at the vertex of a geometry. In order to create this
255
The different fields provided in this dialog box are briefly described below:
o d1 to d6: It is the distance values of the notch.
o 2 Distances: It indicates whether or not only the values of the ‘d1’ and ‘d2’ fields are used.
o 6 Distances: It indicates whether or not all the distance values from ‘d1’ to ‘d6’ fields are
used.
2. Introduce the distances of the notch and select the number of distances to be entered. Click
OK.
3. Select the first and second element of the geometry. The notch will be created at the vertex of
the geometry.
4.6.4 Transform
Transform menu allows the user to edit the design of the part such as copying or stretching the elements
and rotating or moving the geometry, between many other options which are listed below:
4.6.4.1 Copy
Copy ( ) button allows the user making copies of the selected geometries. In order to make copies,
1. Select Copy button and the system will display Selection toolbar.
256
2. Select a geometry using Selection toolbar and click Accept button. The system will display the
following dialog box so that the user selects the type of copying:
Figure 143: Copy types
The different types of copying geometries are explained below:
 : Select this option to make one copy of the selected geometry and move it by means of
Dragging options.
 : Select this option to make the required number of copies of the selected geometry and move
them by means of Dragging options.
 : Select this option to make the required number of copies of a geometry at a specified angle
and distance. When selected, the system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 144: Copy values 1
Find the fields provided in this dialog box briefly described below:
257
o n: Number of copies to be made.
o a: Angle at which the copy is created.
o d: Distance between the consecutive copies of the geometry.
Introduce the required values and then click OK button in order to apply them.
 : Select this option in order to make the required copies of the selected geometry maintaining
the specified angle between the geometries. It is also possible to rotate the geometries. When
selected, the system will display the following dialog box:
o n: Number of copies to be made.
o a: Angle between the geometries.
o Yes: Select this to rotate the copies of the geometry.
o No: Select this if the rotation of the copies is not required.
Introduce and select the required values and click OK button to apply them.
 : Select this option to make the required number of copies of the selected geometry
simultaneously in two directions. The copies will be created in the form of a grid. When selected the
system will display the dialog box shown below:
258
o n1: Number of copies in the first direction.
o n2: Number of copies in the second direction.
o a: Angle value at which the copies are created.
o d1: Distance between the consecutive copies in the first direction.
o d2: Distance between the consecutive copies in the second direction.
Introduce the required values and click OK button in order to save them.
 : Select this option in order to make copies of the selected geometry in a rectangular area.
This rectangular area is defined by two points. When selected, the system will display Copies dialog
box as shown below:
Figure 147: Copies dialog box
259
o Horizontal separation: Horizontal separation distance between the copies.
o Vertical separation: Vertical separation distance between the copies.
Introduce the required values and click OK button in order to save them.
 : Select this option this option to make copies of the selected geometry in a rectangular area.
This is similar to the previous option except for the fact that the first point of the rectangular area is
considered from the first selected geometry and the end point has to be defined. When selected, the
system will also display Copies dialog box (previously displayed).
 : Select this option in order to make copies of the selected geometry in an existing rectangular
area. The selected geometry should be inside a rectangle. When selected the system will display
Copies dialog box as shown below:
Figure 148: Copies dialog box 2
o Offset in X: Separation distance between the copies in X axis.
o Offset in Y: Separation distance between the copies in Y axis.
 : The user will have to click on the required arrows in order to select the directions. If the
center is clicked, all the directions will be selected.
Introduce the required values and click OK to apply the changes.
260
3. Select the required type of copying, introduce the required data and click OK button in order to
save the changes. The copies of the selected geometry will be created.
4.6.4.2 Move
Move ( ) button allows the user moving elements or the entire geometry of the part. In order to move
an element or geometry, do the following:
1. Click Move button and the Selection toolbar will be displayed.
2. Select the required element using the Selection toolbar and then right click or click Accept
button.
3. Mark a reference point to move the selected element. The system will display the Dragging
options to help the user rotate the selected element in different degrees, angles, and so on.
4. Mark an insertion point and the selected element will be moved to that point.
4.6.4.3 Stretch
Stretch ( ) button allows the user to stretch and modify the geometry. In order to stretch and modify
the geometry, do the following:
1. Click Stretch button and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select two or more joined elements of the geometry required to stretch and click Accept
button.
3. Mark a reference point to start stretching the selected elements.
4. Move the cursor till the desired point and then click again to mark an insertion point. The
geometry will be modified and stretched.
4.6.4.4 Rotate
Rotate ( ) button allows the user to rotate the geometry at specified angles, position, and so on. In
order to rotate the geometry, do the following:
1. Click Rotate button and then the system displays the Selection toolbar.
261
2. Select the geometry required to rotate using the Selection toolbar and click Accept button.
3. Mark a center point of rotation and the system will display the following dialog box to select the
required type of rotation.
Figure 149: Rotation options
4. Select the required type of rotation. The different types of rotation are as follows:
 : Click this to rotate the selected geometry at a specified angle. The system will display the
following dialog box, where the user will have to select between Degrees, Radians, Degrees,
minutes, seconds and Centesimal degrees and introduce the required Angle.
Figure 150: Rotation values
Click OK button in order to save the changes and rotate the geometry as specified.
262
 : Click this to rotate the selected geometry to form a minimum rectangle. The system will
display the following dialog box:
Figure 151: Minimum rectangle
Select the Favorite position for minimal rectangle between the options provided in the drop-down list
and introduce the Angle step value. Finally, click OK button in order to rotate the geometry as
specified.
 : Click this to rotate the selected geometry at a specified angle with respect to a selected
auxiliary segment.
The user will have to select between Degrees, Radians, Degrees, minutes, seconds and Centesimal
degrees and introduce the required Angle in the dialog box displayed. Finally, click OK button in
order to rotate the geometry as specifies.
4.6.4.5 Scale
Scale ( ) button allows the user to enlarge or reduce the size of a selected element. In order to
enlarge or reduce the size of a selected element, do the following:
1. Click Scale button and the system displays the Selection toolbar.
2. Select the geometry using the Selection toolbar and click Accept button.
3. Mark the Base point of the scale and the system will display the following dialog box:
263
Figure 152: Scale values
4. Select Apply different factor to X and Y checkbox in order to have different size values on X
and Y axis. When selecting this, the system will allow the user to enter different values for X
and Y axis.
5. Enter the new values in the first box and the existing values will be displayed in the second
box.
6. Click OK button and the geometry will be enlarged or reduced.
4.6.4.6 Place Near
Place near ( ) option allows the user to increase or decrease the distance between geometries.
When selected, the system will display the following dialog box providing the different ways available to
increase or decrease the distance as follows:
Figure 153: Place near options
264
: Select this option to increase or decrease the distance between two parallel geometries. In
order to increase or decrease the distance between two parallel geometries, do the following:
1. Click this button and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select an element using Selection toolbar and click Accept button.
3. Select the initial and final elements that are parallel to each other. The system will display a
dialog box.
4. Introduce the separation distance value between the initial and final elements in Value field.
5. Click OK. The distance between the selected parallel elements will increase or decrease
accordingly to the values previously introduced.
: Select this option to increase or decrease the distance between two perpendicular
geometries. In order to increase or decrease the distance between two perpendicular geometries, do
the following:
3. Select the initial and final elements that are perpendicular to each other. The system will
display a dialog box.
5. Click OK. The distance between the selected perpendicular elements will increase or decrease
accordingly to the values previously introduced.
: Select this option to increase or decrease the distance between two geometries
irrespective of their positions. In order to increase or decrease the distance between them, do the
following:
265
3. Select the initial and final elements. The system will display a dialog box.
5. Click OK. The distance between the selected elements will increase or decrease accordingly to
the values previously introduced.
: Select this option to increase or decrease the distance between two geometries based on
the clicked points while selecting the elements. In order to increase or decrease the distance
between them, do the following:
3. Select the initial and final elements. The system will display a dialog box.
5. Click OK. The distance between the clicked points will increase or decrease accordingly to the
values previously introduced.
: Select this option to increase or decrease the distance between a circular element and two
perpendicular elements. In order to increase or decrease the distance between elements, do the
following:
3. Select the initial and final elements.
4. Select a tangent perpendicular to the final element and the system will display a dialog box.
5. Introduce the separation distance in Value field and click OK button. The distance between the
clicked points will increase or decrease accordingly to the values previously introduced.
266
: Select this option to increase or decrease the distance between the minimum rectangle of
a geometry and a defined point. In order to increase or decrease the distance between minimum
rectangle and a point, do the following:
1. Click this button and the system displays the Selection toolbar
2. Select an element using the Selection toolbar and then click Accept button.
3. Select the destination point. The distance between the minimum rectangle of the selected
element and the destination point will increase or decrease accordingly.
4.6.4.7 Mirror
Mirror ( ) button allows the user to copy the selected geometry symmetric to an axis or line. In order
to copy the selected geometry symmetric to an axis, do the following:
1. Click Mirror button and then the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the geometry to copy using the Selection toolbar and then click Accept button.
3. Select the first and final point of an axis or select a segment or line. The copy of the selected
geometry is created symmetric to the axis or line.
4.6.4.8 Break Parts
Break parts ( ) button allows the user breaking the selected geometry. When selected, the system
will display Break Parts dialog box as shown below:
267
Figure 154: Break parts dialog box
Between the different options provided in the previous window to break the parts the user will have to
select between Equal parts, Middle points, Defined geometry, Tracts by length and Number of tracts.
Find briefly described below the different fields provided in Break parts dialog box if equal parts
option is selected:
o Break by
 Equal parts
 Middle points
 Defined geometry
 Tracts by length
 Number of tracts
o Number of parts: Number of parts of the geometry to be broken.
o Seams: Type of seam for the corners of the broken part.
o Respect minimum width of notches: It indicates whether the minimum width of notches will be
considered while breaking the part or not.
268
4.6.4.9 Union
Union ( ) option enables the union between different elements of geometry. In order to do it
1. Click Union button.
2. Select the base contour and the second contour that are required to be united.
3. The system will merge the selected contours.
4.6.4.10 Subtraction
Subtraction ( ) option subtracts the intersected portion of the first and second element and
the portion of the second element that is outside the first element. In order to do it, perform the following
steps:
1. Click Subtraction button.
2. Select the base contour.
3. Select the second contour and the system will delete the intersected portion of the first and
second elements, as well as the portion of the second element that is outside the first element.
4.6.4.11 Intersection
Intersection ( ) option retains the intersection contours and deletes the other elements. In
order to break elements with Intersection, perform the following steps:
1. Click Intersection button.
2. Select the base contour.
3. Select the second contour intersected with the base contour and the system will delete the two
contours except the intersected one.
4.6.4.12 Change Cutting Direction
Change cutting direction ( ) option allows the user changing the cutting
direction of the contours. In order to do it, perform the following steps:
269
1. Select Change cutting direction button and the system will display the current cutting
direction of the part by means of pink arrows.
2. Select the contours for which to change the cutting direction and it will automatically change.
4.6.4.13 Contour Ordering
Contour Ordering ( ) option allows the user setting the cutting order for the contours.
In order to do it, perform the following steps.
1. Select Contour ordering button and the system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 155: Contour ordering dialog box
2. Select between Clock wise and Counter clock wise options for Outside and Inside contours.
3. Click OK button and the system will set the cutting order accordingly.
4.6.4.14 Transform One-touch Figures
Transform One-touch figures ( ) option converts One touch figures to

open contours or holes. In order to do it perform the following steps:
1. Click Transform One-touch figures button and the system will display Transform One-touch
figures dialog box as shown below:
270
Figure 156: Transform One-touch figures dialog box
2. In Mode section the user will be able to select between By part and By selection options.
3. The user selects whether to convert the one touch figures to Holes or Open contours from the
drop-down list provided in Transform in field. Find briefly explained below the fields provided if
Open contours option is selected:
o R: The distance value of the open contour from the one-touch figure.
o O: The extension value of the open contour from the one-touch figure.
o L: The length of the lead-in of the open contour.
o Compensation mode: It is possible to select the corner shape of the open contour.
o Apply quality: It indicates whether or not the cutting quality is applied to the holes or open
contours. This option allows the user to navigate to the Cutting quality dialog box and select
the required quality.
271
4. Introduce the required values and click OK button. The One-touch figures will be converted to
open contours or holes as previously set.
4.6.5 Review
4.6.5.1 Verify Part
Verify Part ( ) button allows verifying a part as follows:
1. Click Verify Part button and then the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the part required to verify using Selection toolbar and click Accept button. The system
will display the following dialog box:
Figure 157: Verify part values
3. Find briefly described below the different fields provided in this dialog box:
o R: Radius of the part. By default, the system displays the current radius of the selected part.
o D: Distance value of the part. By default, the system displays the current distance of the
selected part.
o Cut Contours: It indicates whether the points are in open cut contours or not.
272
o Mark Contours: It indicates whether the points are in open mark contours or not.
o Non cut contours: It indicates whether the points are in open non cut contours or not.
o Cutter Radius: It indicates whether the length for the small elements is based on cutter radius
or not. If not enabled, Length field is available.
o Length: Length value for the small elements.
4. The user can visualize and change the values and click OK. The part will be verified and the
system will display Verify Part dialog box.
Figure 158: Verify part dialog box
o Number of parts: Number of parts in the Drawing window.
o Number of close contours: Number of contours of the part that are closed.
o Number of open contours: Number of contours of the part that are opened.
o Put points in open contours: It indicates whether any points are marked in open contours.
o Close open contours: It indicates whether or not the open contours are to be closed. This
checkbox is displayed only if Put points in open contours parameter is enabled.
o Tolerance: Tolerance value for closed contours. This field is displayed only if Close open
contours checkbox is selected.
273
o Modifying the geometric elements is allowed: This option enables modifying geometric
elements in order to match both initial and final points of an open contour. This parameter will
take into account the specified tolerance. Therefore, it will be only useful in open contours by
a very little distance. It is activated when the option Close open contours is selected.
o Number of small elements: Number of small elements in the part.
o Put points in small elements: It indicates whether or not points are marked on the small
elements.
o Close: This button closes Verify part dialog box.
4.6.5.2 Time and Cost
Time and Cost ( ) option allows visualizing all the data related to the Time and Costs involved in
the active job. When this option is selected the system will display Part data window as shown below.
Figure 159: Part data window
Find briefly described below the different fields provided in the previous window:
274
 Machine: Select the required machine from the drop-down list or include a new one.
 Material: Select the required material from the drop-down list or include a new one.
 Thickness: Introduce the thickness of the material.
 Sheets: Select the required sheet from the drop-down list or create a new one. If new button is
selected the system will display Create and modify sheets dialog box. The reference, material and
thickness of the sheet will be automatically generated based on the selected sub-job. Introduce the
required data in the rest of the fields provided and click OK button to create the sheet.
 Area: Select the required area. The user can select between Rectangle, External, Real, Rectangle
with offset, External with offset and Real with offset options.
 Form factor: Select the required form factor.
 Material area cost: Visualize or edit the cost of material per unit. Select the Navigation button
provided in this field in order to visualize the weight and area of the material.
 Machine time cost: Visualize or edit the cost the machine per unit. Select the Navigation button
provided in this field in order to visualize Start time of cut, Normal cutting time, Rapid displacements
length and Number of cut starts fields between many others.
 Total: It displays the total cost.
 Print: Select this button located at the bottom in order to print all Cost and Time details.
4.6.5.3 View Geometry
View Geometry ( ) option visualizes the different measurements of the geometry. In order to visualize
them perform the following steps:
1. Select View Geometry option located in Review menu and the system will display Selection
toolbar.
2. Select the geometry to visualize by means of the options provided and click Accept button.
3. The system will display View Geometry window as shown below:
275
Figure 160: View geometry dialog box
4. Here the user can visualize the specific characteristics and measurements of each element
that compose the geometry and the total perimeter of the selected geometry. After the selected
list of elements it shows the specific Number of segments, circles, arcs, lines and points.
5. Select Modify button in order to modify the desired geometric elements. Select the required
element from the list and click Modify button, so that the system displays Modify geometry
window, which contains all the values stored for the selected element.
6. Click Delete button to delete the required elements from the list. Select the required element
from the list of geometric elements and click Delete. The system will display a Warning window
as shown below, where the user will have to select Yes in order to erase it and No to cancel
the operation.
276
Figure 161: Deletion warning message
7. Click Print button to print the measurements and click Close button in order to close View
Geometry dialog box.
4.6.5.4 Distances and Angle
Distance and Angle ( ) button allows visualizing the distance and angle measurements between two
selected points as follows:
1. Click Distance and Angle button and mark the first point.
2. Move the cursor till the desired point and mark the second point. The system will display
Distance and Angle dialog box as shown below:
Figure 162: Distance and angle dialog box
o D: Distance between the two marked points.
o X: Horizontal distance between the two marked points.
o Y: Vertical distance between the two marked points.
o W: Angle at which the second point is marked with respect to the X.

277
4. Click OK in order to close the dialog box.
4.6.5.5 Angle between Three Points
Angle between three points ( ) button allows the user to view the angles of three points as follows:
1. Click Angle between three points button and then mark the first point.
2. Move the cursor till the desired points and mark the second and third points. The system will
display Angle between three points dialog box as shown below:
Figure 163: Angle between three points dialog box
3. It is possible to view the interior angle of the three points in ‘a1’ field and the exterior angle of
the three points in ‘a2’ field.
4. Click Cancel button in order to close Angle between three points dialog box.
4.6.6 Orthogonal
Select Orthogonal ( ) button in order to draw vertical and horizontal geometries by means of
Dragging toolbar. This application will be active until the user clicks again on it to disable it.
 Press F2 key on the keyboard in order to enable and disable this application.
278
4.6.7 Macros
Macros ( ) option enables the creation, deletion and execution of application macros. A macro is an
option that enables the sequential execution of several options of the system. This option is available in
Drawing and Nesting and Machining modules. The created macros will only be useful for the module in
which they have been created. Macros option contains a drop-down list that displays the existing macros
of the system plus the following two options:
 Macro creation: Click Record a macro and all the options clicked afterwards will form part of the
macro. The order will be defined during the options selection. To stop recording click Stop recording
or press Escape.
 Macro edition: Click Macro and the system will display a window that shows the existing list of
macros with the options corresponding to each. A macro can be created, deleted or executed from
this window.
 Macro execution: In order to execute a Macro lick Macro drop-down list and select Macro or execute
from edition window. It is possible to add buttons to the options ribbon or quick access bars. When
executing a macro:
o By pressing ESC, the option in execution will stop and the next will be executed.
o By executing another option macro execution will stop.
o By pressing Return when the macro finishes, it will be executed again.
4.7 TECHNOLOGY
Technology menu allows making use of the different technologies available to cut parts, which include
the following:
Lead-in / Lead-outs menu encompasses all the options related to the Lead-ins and Lead-outs and their
configuration.
279
4.7.1.1 Automatic
Select Automatic ( ) option in order to introduce the lead-in/out in the parts automatically.
4.7.1.2 Delete
Select Delete ( ) option in order to erase the required lead-in/outs of a part. In order to do it perform
the following steps:
1. Click Delete and the system will display Selection tool bar.
2. Select the lead-in/lead-out that has to be deleted using the Selection toolbar and then click
Accept button. The selected lead-in/lead-out will be deleted.
4.7.1.3 Semi-Automatic
Select Semi-Automatic ( ) option in order to introduce the Lead-in/outs semi-automatically. In this

case, it is only necessary to select the base contour in which the lead-in/out has to be introduced.
4.7.1.4 Configure Automatic
Configure automatic ( ) option configures the parameters for automatic lead-ins and lead-outs. If
selected, the system will display Automatic lead-in/lead-out values window as shown below:
280
Figure 164: Automatic Lead-in/Lead-out values window
Here the user will be able to modify the provided parameters as per his requirements and set them by
means of OK button located at the bottom of the window.
4.7.1.5 Lead-in/Lead outs
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 1 ( ): Perpendicular Lead-in/Lead-outs.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 2 ( ): Perpendicular Lead-in and inclined Lead-out.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 3 ( ): Perpendicular Lead-in and tangential Lead-out.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 4 ( ): Inclined Lead-in and perpendicular Lead-out.
281
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 5 ( ): Inclined Lead-in/Lead-outs.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 6 ( ): Inclined Lead-in and tangential Lead-out.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 7 ( ): Tangential Lead-in and perpendicular Lead-out.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 8 ( ): Tangential Lead-in and inclined Lead-out.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 9 ( ): Tangential Lead-in and Lead-outs.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 11 ( ): Tangential Lead-in/Lead-out with beginning and end path.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 12 ( ): Tangential Lead-in/Lead-out with beginning and end parallel path.
The previously listed are different types of lead-in/lead-outs that can be introduced manually.
The following two types of lead-in/lead-outs (10 and 13) can only be introduced at the corner of a
closed geometry with sides.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 10 ( ): Straight Lead-in/Lead-out on outer corner.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 13 ( ): Straight Lead-in/Lead-out on inner corner.
The following lead-in/lead-out is just for circles:
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 14 ( ): Special Lead-in/Lead-outs for circular holes.
 Dynamic Lead-in/Lead-outs ( ): Lead-in/Lead-outs by rubber band.
 Put the Lead-in/Lead-outs in bisector ( ): It puts the Lead-in/Lead-outs in a bisector or

intersection point.
 Move point of lead-in or lead-out ( ): It allows moving the point of a Lead-in or Lead-out.
 Put the lead-out like the lead-in ( ): It puts the Lead-out in the direction of the Lead-in.
282
 Modify tangent arc lead-in by 2 segments ( ): It modifies the tangent arc Lead-in by two
segments.
 Add element ( ): It adds an element to the Lead-in or Lead-out as follows:
1. Click Add element button and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the required lead-in/lead-out by means of the options provided, click Accept button and
the system will display Add element to Lead-in/Lead-out dialog box as shown below:
Figure 165: Add element to Lead-in/Lead-out dialog box
3. Find briefly described the fields provided:
o Lead-in: Indicates whether the element is added to a lead-in or not.
o Lead-out: Indicates whether the element is added to a lead-out or not.
 When any of the options above is selected the system will display Direction sections, Always like
segment parameter and Length field.
o Lead-in auxiliary element: Select this to add the element in the lead-in direction.
o Lead-out auxiliary element: Select this to add the element in the lead-out direction.
o Longer element: Select this to add the element in the direction of the longer side where the
lead-in/lead-out is introduced.
283
o Always like segment: It indicates whether the additional element is added like a segment or
not.
o Length: Length value of the additional element.
4. Select and introduce the required values in the given fields and click OK button in order to save
them. The additional element will be added to the lead-in/lead-out as set by the user.
4.7.2 Micro-Joints
Micro-joints section allows the user to introduce different types of micro-joints in the parts. When
pointed, the system will list the different micro-joints that can be introduced between many other options.
4.7.2.1 Delete
Select Delete ( ) option in order to erase the required micro-joints as follows:
1. Click Delete option and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the micro-joint required to delete by means of the options provided in Selection toolbar
and click Accept button located in the same menu.
3. The micro-joint will be deleted.
4.7.2.2 Micro-joints
 Micro-Joints 1: It introduces an inclined micro-joint on a corner of a closed geometry.
 Micro-Joints 2: It introduces a perpendicular micro-joint on a corner of a closed geometry.
 Micro-Joints 3: It introduces a perpendicular micro-joint to the geometry of a part.
 Micro-Joints 4: It introduces an inclined micro-joint to the geometry of a part.
 Micro-Joints 5: It introduces an inclined micro-joint on the right side.
 Micro-Joints 6: It introduces an inclined micro-joint on the left side.
4.7.2.3 Move Point of Lead-in or Lead-out
This option allows moving the point of lead-in or lead-out of a micro joint.
284
4.7.2.4 Transform to Geometry
This option converts the selected micro-joints to geometry by means of the selection toolbar.
4.7.2.5 Configure
This option configures the parameters of the micro-joints. The system will display Micro-joints Values
dialog box:
Figure 166: Micro-joints values dialog box
Introduce the required values in the fields provided and click OK button to save the changes.
4.7.3 Loops
4.7.3.1 Automatic
Select Automatic ( ) option in order to introduce the loops automatically to all the corners of a closed
geometry. The introduced automatic loop may be a normal or curved loop, based on the configuration
previously set in Loop values.
4.7.3.2 Delete
Delete ( ) option erases the loops selected by means of Selection toolbar. Once the required loop is
selected click Accept button located in the same toolbar and the system will delete it.
285
4.7.3.3 Loop1
In order to introduce a Loop1 ( ) perform the following steps:
1. Select Loop1 option located in Loops menu.
2. Select the required corner of a closed geometry.
3. The system will insert a normal loop in the selected point of the geometry.
4.7.3.4 Loop2
In order to introduce a Loop2 ( ) perform the following steps:
1. Select Loop2 option located in Loops menu.
2. Select the required corner of a closed geometry.
3. The system will insert a curved loop in the selected point of the geometry.
4.7.3.5 Round Angles
Round angles ( ) option introduces round angles at the vertices of the geometry. The radii of round
angles can be set in Loop values dialog box.
4.7.3.6 Configuration
Configuration ( ) option enables modifying the different parameters of all loops. The system will
display Loop values dialog box as shown below:
286
Figure 167: Loop values dialog box
In order to configure the loop values, specify the following parameters:
1. Introduce the maximum angle of the loop in Maximum angle (W) field.
2. In (0-W) Loops section select Loop values check box to set a fixed radius for the loop and enter
the radius value in R field. The user can select the required type of automatic loops to
introduce by means of 1 and 2 checkboxes.
3. Select the required option from the drop-down list provided in Automatic loops field, where the
user will be able to select between In chamfers or in round angles, Only in chamfer elements
and Only in round angles.
4. Located in Round angles section select Radii button in order to set the radius of the round
angles and manage them by qualities if required.
287
5. Introduce the limit angle in Limit Angle (Z) field.
6. In W-Z section, select the required position of the radius for W-Z range and then click Radii
button in order to set the radius for W-Z range of the loops.
7. Select Do loops in the whole part in automatic checkbox in order to introduce loops to the
entire part when automatic loop is selected.
8. Select Round angles in the whole part in automatic checkbox in order to introduce round
angles to the entire part when automatic loop is selected.
9. Click OK button and the parameters will be saved as configured.
4.7.4 Chamfers
The Chamfers section includes the following:
4.7.4.1 Delete
This option deletes chamfers as follows:
1. Click Delete ( ) button located in Chamfers menu and the system will display Selection
toolbar.
2. Select an element of the part by means of the options provided in Selection toolbar and click
Accept button.
3. The selected chamfer will be deleted.
4.7.4.2 Chamfer
This option chamfers an element as follows:
1. Click Chamfer ( ) button and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select an element of the part by means of the options provided in Selection toolbar and click
Accept button. The system will display Chamfer values dialog box as shown below:
288
Figure 168: Chamfer values dialog box
3. Select the required type of chamfering and click OK button.
4. The selected element will be chamfered as configured.
4.7.4.3 Chamfer on Contour
This option chamfers a selected contour as follows:
1. Click Chamfer on contour ( ) button and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the required contour by means of the options provided in Selection toolbar and click
Accept button. The system will display Chamfer values dialog box as shown below:
289
Figure 169: Chamfer values dialog box 2
3. Introduce the required values and click OK button in order to save the changes. The selected
contour will be chamfered.
4.7.4.4 Configure
Select this option in order to configure various parameters for the chamfers as follows:
1. Click Configuration ( ) button and the system will display Chamfer values dialog box.
2. Introduce the required angle values in Initial and Final angle fields and introduce the depth
values in Initial and Final depth fields for both Upper and Lower chamferings.
3. Click OK button and the parameters will be set accordingly.
4.7.5 Cut Technology
Cut Technology section allows the user to introduce different technologies to cut a part. When pointed,
the system will display different types of cut technologies that can be assigned, which are listed below:
290
4.7.5.1 Automatic
Select Automatic ( ) button in order to assign technology automatically based on the previously set
configuration in the Tables of Technology.
 Automatic Technology will only be applied if it is configured in the machine.
4.7.5.2 Delete
This option deletes an assigned cut technology as follows:
1. Click Delete ( ) button and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the assigned Cut technology required to delete by means of the options provided and
click Accept button provided in the same toolbar.
3. The cut technology assigned to the selected element will be erased.
 If the user does not want the marked text to be treated as a unity, it will be necessary to activate
the option Delete cut technology having previously selected the marked text.
4.7.5.3 Marking
This option assigns marking technology to a part as follows:
1. Select Marking ( ) option and the system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 170: Marking technology
291
2. Click on the drop-down list provided in Technology field, select between Powder, Drill, Pen or
Cut and click OK button.
3. The system will display Selection toolbar. Select the geometry where the selected technology
is required by means of the options provided and click Accept button.
4. The selected marking technology will be assigned to the selected element.
4.7.5.4 No Cut
In order to assign No Cut technology to a required geometry, perform the following steps:
1. Click No Cut ( ) button and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the extension to which the user wants to apply No cut by means of the options provided
and click OK button in order to apply it.
4.7.5.5 Dynamic
This option assigns a cut technology of a specified quality between two points of a contour based on the
cutting direction as follows:
1. Select Dynamic ( ) button and the system will display the following dialog box:
292
Figure 171: Dynamic technology
2. Select the required Cutting Technology and Cutting quality and click OK button.
3. Mark the Initial and End points of a contour. The selected cutting technology and quality will be
assigned to the selected extension.
4.7.5.6 Cutting
This option assigns cutting technology of a specified quality to a part as follows:
1. Select Cutting button and the system will display the following dialog box:
293
Figure 172: Cutting Qualities
2. Select the required type of Cutting quality.
3. By selecting Modify button the system will display Tables of technology dialog box. Here the
user will be able to include, modify or delete the material, thickness and other details. Click OK
button in order to save the changes.
4. The system will display Selection toolbar. By means of the options provided select the
extension to which the user wants to apply the selected technology.
5. Select Accept button located in the same toolbar and the cutting technology of the specified
quality will be assigned to the selected geometry extension.
4.7.5.7 Microjoint
This option assigns Microjoints as follows:
1. Select Microjoint ( ) button and select where the user wants to assign the microjoint.
2. Select the position of the micro-joint and the system will display the following dialog box:
294
Figure 173: Micro-joint values
3. Introduce the required value and click OK button in order to assign the microjoint to the
selected point.
4.7.5.8 Auxiliary Geometry
Auxiliary Geometry ( ) option allows the user to create, modify and delete the non-cut lines. It is also
possible to customize the non-cut lines by specifying their color, style and thickness and configuring their
line properties, as well as their visualization in Draw and Nest view.
In order to enable this option In the Drawing module, it is necessary to create it first from Auxiliary
geometry definition window, which is displayed from Configuration options/Configure: Draw and Nest/
Auxiliar section. Here the user will be able to specify the name and properties of the line (color style and
thickness).
4.7.6 Text
Text section allows assigning Marked text, Written text and Vectorized text.
4.7.6.1 Marked Text
In order to assign marked text to a geometry perform the following steps:
1. Select Marked text ( ) option and the system will display Text definition dialog
box as shown below:
295
Figure 174: Text definition dialog box
2. Define the Text, Size, Technology, Thickness and Fonts directory and click OK button in order
to save the changes made.
3. Mark the insertion point and the text will be inserted. The system will display the available
Dragging options in order to move the text and position it correctly if required.
 Symmetry will not be applied to the geometry of marked texts, that is, the text will be marked
correctly when the part is placed symmetrically on the sheet.
4.7.6.2 Written Text
In order to introduce a text in a part perform the following steps:
1. Select Written Text ( ) button and the system will display Text definition dialog
box as shown below:
296
Figure 175: Text definition dialog box 2
2. Select the required Font, introduce the required Text and the Orientation and finally click OK
button.
3. Mark the insertion point and the text will be inserted. The system will display the Dragging
options to move the text if required.
4.7.6.3 Vectorize Text
In order to convert the selected texts to geometry perform the following steps:
1. Select Vectorize text ( ) option and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the required text to vectorize by means of the options provided and click Accept button.
3. The system will display Vectorize text dialog box as shown below:
Figure 176: Vectorize text dialog box
4. Introduce the Number of tracts for the Beizer curves required and click OK button.
5. The selected text will be converted to geometry.
297
4.8 MACHINING
The Machining menu includes the following:
4.8.1 Machining
4.8.1.1 Automatic
By means of Automatic ( ) option the part will be automatically machined.
4.8.1.2 Delete Instructions
In order to erase the desired machining instructions perform the following steps:
1. Select Delete Instructions ( ) button located in Machining menu and the system will
Figure 177: Delete instructions options
2. Select between the following options:
o Current instruction
o Machining by selection
o Machining by selection of geometry
o From-to
o All machining
298
o Configuration
3. Depending on the option selected, select the contours, machinings or instructions to delete and
click OK button in order to erase them.
4.8.1.3 Rapids
A rapid movement is the displacement of the head without cutting. This option inserts a rapid movement
from the current machining coordinates to the desired point. In order to insert a rapid movement, perform
1. Select Rapid ( ) button and the system will initialize the rapid movement.
2. Select the Destination point and the rapid movement will be inserted between the initial point
and destination point. The user can select as many points as required to insert rapid
movements.
3. Press ESC key on the keyboard in order to exit this option.
4.8.1.4 GoTo
This option allows cutting between the desired points. In order to do it, perform the following steps:
4. Click Goto ( ) button and the system will initialize the machining.
5. Select the Destination point and the extension between the initial point and destination point
will be machined. The user can select as many points as required to continue the cut operation.
299
4.8.2 Contours
Figure 178: Contours options
4.8.2.1 Manual Contours
In order to cut the selected elements of the contour perform the following steps:
1. Point Contour option located in Contour menu and the system will display the options
available.
2. Select Manual Contours option and the system will display Selection toolbar.
3. Select the first element of the contour by means of the options provided.
4. Select the remaining elements of the contour if required.
5. Click Accept button located in the same menu and the selected elements of the contour will be
machined.
4.8.2.2 Automatic Contours
In order to cut the contours automatically, perform the following steps:
available.
2. Select Automatic contours option.
300
3. Select the required contour to machine.
4. The system will automatically machine the contour.
4.8.2.3 Parts
In order to machine the entire part, perform the following steps:
available.
2. Select Parts option.
3. Select the part required to machine and the system will machine the whole part automatically.
4.8.2.4 All Drill Cycles
Select All Drill Cycles option located in Contour menu in order to drill all the points on the contour.
4.8.2.5 All Marks
Select All Marks option located in Contour menu in order to machine the contours with mark technology.
4.8.2.6 All Cut
Select All Cut option located in Contour menu in order to cut all the contours.
4.8.2.7 All Contours of One Quality
This option will machine all the contours of a specified cutting quality. For example, if the user executes
this semiautomatic option selecting cutting quality 2, the system will make the machining of these
contours. In order to do it, perform the following steps:
available.
2. Select All Contours of one Quality option and the system will display the following dialog box:
301
Figure 179: Cutting qualities
3. Select the required cutting quality and the system will machine all the contours of the selected
cutting quality.
4.8.2.8 Automatic Cycles
If selected the system will display Automatic Cycles dialog box with the following parameters:
302
Figure 180: Automatic cycles dialog box
o Type: The user will be able to choose between Simple Drill cycle, Drill cycle with breaking of
shaving, Deep drilling cycle, Tap cycle, Ream cycle, C. Sink cycle, Special cycle of cut,
Special punching cycle and Simple milling cycle.
o Only the circles with no cut technology: If this parameter is selected, only the circles with no
cut technology will be drilled.
o Delete the circles with cycles: By using this option, the user can decide to leave geometry on
the drawing after machining or not.
o Minimum & Maximum radius: The user will be able to define the maximum and minimum
radius.
o Test if the tool exists: If this option is enabled, the system will look for a determined tool. For
example, if we find a drill of the same size as the circle’s tool, the system will make the
drilling; if not, the system will cut it.
o Use the tool data: If enabled, the system will use the properties of the tool.
4.8.2.9 Flying Cut in Holes
Flying cut in holes option allows making the flying cut in selected contours.
When selecting this option, the window of flying cut configuration will be displayed. The values displayed
by default are the ones configured in the system and can be updated when necessary.
 These new values will not be saved in the system and they will have effect only during the
execution of the option.
303
Figure 181: Fast cut mode in holes (flying cut) window
Once the configuration values of flying cut mode have been edited, it is possible to select the contours
where they should be applied. And finally, it is also possible to select new contours to make a multiple
flying cut.
304
Figure 182: Flying cut in holes example
 Once the flying cut mode has been applied, the part can be machined manually or automatically.
 If the part contains manual flying cut machining, when applying automatic machining to the
other contours being activated the option of flying cut in automatic mode, this will not be applied
(respecting that way the flying cut manually made).
Whenever the machining instructions of a part are deleted in Drawing Module, all those instructions that
correspond to fast cut will also be deleted and the original geometry will be restored with the existing
technology prior to the machining.
305
4.8.2.10 Manual Hole Destruction
Manual Hole Destruction option allows manual hole destruction.
When selecting this option, the user can start drawing the cutting lines for the holes destruction.
Selecting two points of the same internal contour (hole) a cutting line will be created. In addition, if it
moves to another contour, a rapid movement will be created.
Figure 183: Manual hole destruction example 1
 If the part (or the contour in which the user makes the cuts) is already machined, the cutting
instructions for the hole will be inserted just before the first instruction of contour machining.
306
Figure 184: Manual hole destruction example 2
It is possible to define a distance upon which the destruction of holes will be applied. In order to do it,
the user will have to select the option and define the required value. Find below the result:
307
Figure 185: Offset for manual destruction of holes
4.8.3 Cycles
Cycles menu contains the following options:
4.8.3.1 Simple Cycle
This option allows machining with a center punch the machining points by inserting rapid movements
between the selected points. In order to do it perform the following steps:
1. Select Simple Cycle ( ) button and the system will initialize the machining.
2. Select the Destination point. A rapid movement will be inserted between the initial point and the
selected point. The user will be able to insert as many points as required by selecting more
points.
4.8.3.2 Linear Cycle
Linear cycle ( ) option allows the user to machine the part by inserting punching machining
points in a sequence. When selected the system will display the following options:
308
Figure 186: Linear cycle options
 Beginning point and distance: Select this option in order to machine a part by inserting the
punching machining points in a sequence at a specified angle and distance as follows:
1. Select Beginning point and distance button and then mark the first punching machining
point.
2. The system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 187: Beginning point and distance
Find briefly described below the fields provided in the previous dialog box:
o n: The number of punching machining points.
o a: The angle at which the punching machining points are to be placed.
o d: The distance between the punching machining points.
3. Introduce the required values and click OK button. The machining will be carried out by
inserting punching machining points at the specified angle and distance.
 Ends and number of points: Select this option in order to machine the part by inserting punching
machining points in a sequence between specified initial and end points as follows:
1. Select Ends and number of points option and select the initial and end points.
309
Figure 188: Ends and number of points
3. Introduce the number of punching machining points required in n field.
4. Click OK and the part will be machined inserting the specified number of punching machining
points between initial and end points.
 Distance between two points: Select this option in order to machine the part by inserting three
punching machining points in a sequence as follows:
1. Select Distance between two points option and mark the first machining point.
2. Mark the second and destination points and the part will be machined along the selected
machining points.
4.8.3.3 Circular Cycle
Circular cycle ( ) option allows you to machine a part by inserting a circular punching machining
sequence. When selected the system will display the following options:
Figure 189: Circular cycle options
 Centre and angles: Select this option in order to machine by inserting a circular sequence of
punching machining points at a specified angle as follows:
310
1. Select Centre and angles option and mark the center point.
Figure 190: Centre and angles
o r: Distance value from the center point.
o n: Number of machining points.
o a: Angle value between the machining points.
o ai: Initial angle value of the first machining point in the circular sequence.
3. Introduce the required values and click OK button. The part will be machined by inserting a
circular sequence of punching machining points.
 Centre and beginning point: Select this option in order to machine a part by inserting a circular
sequence of punching machining points form a specified initial point as follows:
1. Select Centre and beginning point and mark the centre and initial points.
311
Figure 191: Centre and beginning point
3. Introduce the required values in “n” (number of punching machining points) and “a” (angle
between machining points) fields and click OK button.
4. The part will be machined by inserting a circular sequence of the machining points with an
initial point and at a specified angle.
 Distance between two points: Select this option in order to machine a part by inserting the initial
and end punching machining points as follows:
1. Select Distance between two points option and mark the Initial point.
2. Mark the second and end points.
3. The part will be machined from the initial point to the end point.
 Arc: Select this option in order to machine an arc by inserting a specified number of punching
machining points as follows:
1. Select Arc button and select the arc required to machine.
312
Figure 192: From point dialog box
3. Introduce the number of machining points required in “n” field and click OK button.
4. The arc will be machined with the specified number of machining points.
4.8.3.4 Grid Cycle
Grid cycle ( ) option allows machining a part by inserting punching machining points in two different
directions if the form of a grid.
Figure 193: Grid cycle options
 Corner and number: Select this option in order to machine a part in the form of a grid at a specified
angle and distance as follows:
1. Click Corner and number button and then mark the initial point from where the user wants to
machine the part.
313
Figure 194: Corner and number
o n1: Number of machining points in the first direction.
o n2: Number of machining points in the second direction.
o a: Angle value in which the machining is done.
o d1: Distance value between the consecutive machining points in the first direction.
o d2: The distance value between the consecutive machining points in the second direction.
3. Introduce the required values and click OK button. The part will be machined in the form of a
grid.
 Corner and distances: Select this option in order to machine a part in the form of a grid with five
points at a specified distance as follows:
1. Select Corner and distances option and select or mark an origin point.
2. Select or mark initial and end points in X axis. The end point must be at a distance that is an
exact multiple of the initial point in X axis.
3. Select or mark initial and end points in Y axis. The end point must be at a distance that is an
exact multiple of the initial point in Y axis.
4. The part will be machined with the five points at the specified distances.
314
4.8.3.5 Milling Nibblings
Milling nibblings ( ) option allows a nibbling in any type of contour with a milling tool and by using
one only instruction. It is possible to select a contour and configure a machining instruction. The system
will nibble the whole contour using this configuration:
Figure 195: Milling nibblings example
The whole process for making this operation is shown below:
1. Select the option Contour among the available options for nibbling:
Figure 196: Contour option
2. A configuration window will be displayed then. In this window the user should define all the
properties of the new instruction: milling tool, depth level, etc.
315
Figure 197: Milling cycle window
3. Once the configuration has been validated, now the user should select an element of the
contour. This element will be later used as the base element in the selection of the relative
position of the nibbling cycle.
316
Figure 198: Milling nibblings example 2
4. Select the rest of elements to nibbling in the contour.
 The user can select as much elements as desired but the system will only
nibble those which are part of a contour next to the first selected element (either
open or closed).
317
Figure 199: Milling nibblings example 3
5. Finally, establish the relative position (with respect to the base element that was selected in
the first step) of the milling nibbling.
The final result is a new machining instruction that allows to nibble any type of contour and an easier
management in case of, for example, its properties has to be modified from the machining tree.
318
Figure 200: Machining explorer (Milling nibbling)
4.8.3.6 Irregular Cycle
Irregular cycle ( ) option allows machining a part by inserting a cycle on a lead-in/lead-out or on the
points of different selected elements. When selected the system will display the following options:
Figure 201: Irregular cycle options
 Cycles on Lead-in/Lead-out: Select this option in order to machine a part by inserting a cycle on the
existing lead-in or lead-out as follows:
1. Select Cycles on Lead-in/Lead-out button and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the required lead-in/lead-out by means of the options provided and click Accept button
located in the same toolbar.
319
3. The cycle will be created in the selected lead-in/lead-out.
 Cycles on points: Select this option in order to machine a part by inserting a cycle on selected points
of existing elements as follows:
1. Select Cycles on points option and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the required points of the existing elements by means of the options provided and click
Accept button located in the same toolbar.
3. The cycle will be created within the selected points.
4.8.3.7 Milling Pockets

Milling pockets ( ) option allows pocketing any type of irregular geometry using a milling tool.
With this option, the user can pocket any type of geometry using a milling tool.
Figure 202: Milling pockets example
In order to do so, the user should perform the following steps:
1. Select the Irregular Geometry option available in the pocket options.
2. The system displays the configuration window where all the pocket parameters should be
defined, both the general parameters and the parameters corresponding to the phases of
roughing and finishing.
320
Figure 203: Milling cycle window
3. Now select the geometry to be pocketed. The user should only select one element of the
geometry and the system will try to locate a closed contour from this element.
 Besides being a closed contour, this contour cannot have any internal hole.
Once this process has been finished, the final result is a machining instruction that allows to pocket
irregular geometries independently of the shape of the contour, as shown on the image below:
321
Figure 204: Machining explorer (Milling pockets)
4.8.4 Modify
Modify ( ) option allows the user to modify all the machining aspects. This option will only be
available when the parts have already been machined. When selected, the system will display the
following list providing the options available:
Figure 205: Modify options
322
4.8.4.1 Micro-Joints
By means of Micro-joints option, the user can insert micro-joints in the parts although the machining
process has been done as follows:
1. Point Modify button, select Micro-joints option and the system will display Micro-joints dialog
box as shown below:
2. Introduce the Width value of micro-joint in millimeters, select the Position of the micro-joint
between Middle, End and Picked point and click OK button.
o Middle: In the center of the clicked contour.
o End: The micro-joint will be placed in the nearest segment end of the clicked point.
o Picked point: The micro-joint will be inserted in the picked point (if possible).
3. The system will insert the micro-joint in the selected point.
323
4.8.4.2 Automatic Micro-Joints at End of Contour
By means of this option, the user can place automatic micro-joints at the end of contours, which have
been already machined, as follows:
1. Point Modify button, select Automatic Micro-joints at End of Contour option and the system
will display Automatic Micro-joints at End of Contour dialog box as shown below:
Figure 207: Automatic Micro-joints at End of Contour dialog box
2. Select By quality checkbox in order to base the micro-joint on the cutting quality.
3. If By quality checkbox is not selected, the system will display Width value of micro-joint field
where the user will have to introduce the required width value.
4. In Apply in contours section, select the required size of Inside and Outside contours to
introduce the micro-joints.
5. Introduce the Maximum length and Maximum width of Small contours.
6. Introduce the Maximum length and Maximum width of Big contours.
324
7. Click OK button and the micro-joints will be automatically introduced in the machined part.
4.8.4.3 Order Machining
This option allows modifying the order in which the contours of the part have been machined as follows:
1. Point Modify button, select Order Machining option and, when choosing the Order cut
sequence option, the system will display Order Cut Sequence dialog box as shown below:
Figure 208: Order cut sequence dialog box
2. Select Show the direction of movements parameter in order to indicate the direction when
modifying the machining order.
3. In Order mode field, select between Before and After.
o Before: It indicates whether the machining order is modified from last to first or not. The first
selected contour will be the last to be machined.
o After: It indicates whether the machining order is modified from first to last or not.
4. After selecting the required values click OK button.
5. Select the base contour and the next contour whose machining order has to be changed.
Continue to select the contours whose order has to be changed.
6. Press ESC key located on the keyboard in order to stop the selection and the machining order
will be changed.
4.8.4.4 Regenerate by Selection
This option allows selecting a group of instructions using a selection toolbar to create a structure as
follows:
325
1. Point Modify option, select Regenerate by Selection option and the system will display
Selection toolbar.
2. Select the required contour by means of the options provided and the system will display
Regenerate dialog box as shown below:
Figure 209: Regenerate dialog box
3. The user can activate the following parameters which are briefly described below:
o Simple punching operations => Linear patterns: It restores single punching in linear patterns.
o Linear patterns => Linear nibble cycles: It restores linear patterns in nibbling if the punching
of the pattern are lapped.
o Linear patterns => Grid patterns: It restores linear patterns in grid patterns if the punchings of
the patterns are not lapped.
o Pattern of only two points => Simple punching operations: It exploits patterns of two points as
they are more easily created as simple punching processes.
4. Click OK button in order to save the changes and regenerate the selected extensions.
4.8.4.5 Modify Lead-In/Outs
By means of this option the user can set the Lead-in/outs as follows:
1. Point Modify option, select Modify Lead-in/outs option and the system will display Modify
Lead In/Outs dialog box which is divided in two different tabs: General and Apply a GAP.
326
APPLY A GAP
 Apply a gap in lead in/outs: With this option the user can apply a GAP (Micro-joints at the end of the
contour) in all the contours of the part. The system will leave a GAP before ending each contour.
There are two restrictions:
o The type of lead in-out:
- Lead in = Segment – Lead out = Segment
- Lead in = Segment – Lead out = Arc
- Lead in = Arc – Lead out = Segment
- Lead in = Arc – Lead out = Arc
o The angle between the lead in and the contour.
The GAP value can be fix, a percentage of the sheet thickness or an automatic value depending
on the cutter radius (with this option the system allows the user to add an offset in the GAP).
This option is available for cutting and combined machines and it is available in CAD module and
nesting module.
 Maximum angle to apply the GAP: Introduce the maximum angle to apply the gap.
 Value (d1):
o Fixed: It is possible to select the required type of gap value in the Value (d1) section. If you
want the gap to be based on a fixed value then select Fixed value. You can enter the
required fixed value in Value field.
o Percentage of sheet thickness: If the user wants the gap to be based on the sheet
thicknesses then select Percentage of sheet thickness. The Modify leads in/outs dialog box
allows the user to enter a percentage of sheet thickness in Value field.
o Automatic depending on cutter radius: If the user wants the gap value to be calculated
automatically based on the radius value then select Automatic depending on cutter radius,
then Modify leads in/outs dialog box allows the user to set the offset distance.
327
 Offset (d2):
o No: Select No if the offset is not required
o Fixed: Select Fixed to set a fixed offset distance
o Percentage of cutter radius: Select Percentage of cutter radius to set the offset based on
cutter radius percentage
o Percentage of sheet thickness: Select Percentage of sheet thickness to set the offset based
on sheet thickness percentage.
 Offset: It is possible to enter the fixed value or percentage of cutter radius or percentage of sheet
thickness in the Offset field.
4.8.4.6 Avoid Any Holes Already Cut
This option helps the user avoid the collision of the head with the holes that have already been cut as
follows:
1. Point Modify option, select Avoid any holes already cut option and the system will display
Avoid any holes already cut dialog box as shown below:
Figure 210: Avoid holes already cut dialog box
Find the fields and parameters provided in the previous dialog box briefly described below:
328
 Maximum hollow: It indicates whether the head is allowed to enter the hole or not. In this case, the
user can enter the maximum distance value the head can pass inside the hole.
 Offset: It indicates whether an offset distance value is set between the head and hole or not. In this
case, the user can enter the maximum distance value between the head movement and the hole.
 Maximum length with head down: Introduce the maximum length value when the head is down
(mm).
 Maximum number of rapid tracts: Introduce the number of rapid tracts inserted to avoid collision of
head and holes.
 Modify Lead in/Outs: The user can modify the lead-in/lead-out by selecting the required option from
the drop-down list:
o No: Select this not to modify the lead-in/lead-out.
o By parts: Select this to modify the lead-in/lead-out and positioned in the rapid movements to
avoid the already cut holes.
o By contours: Select this to modify the lead-in/lead-out and positioned based on the contours
to avoid already cut holes on the rapid movements.
 When selecting By part or By contours, then the system displays ‘Retain lead-in/outs defined in
parts’ field.
 Retain lead-in/outs defined in parts: Select this to retain the lead-in/lead-out that is defined in a
part.
 Apply head up at end of each contour: It indicates whether the head is positioned upwards at the
end of the machined part or not.
 Head up for common cut elements: It indicates whether the head is positioned upwards for all
common cut elements or not.
1. Select and introduce the required values and then click OK. The already cut holes will be
avoided based on the above set parameters.
329
4.8.4.7 Modify Head Management of Rapids
This option allows introducing head up/head down instructions in rapid movements of the machining as
follows:
1. Point Modify option and select Modify Head Management of Rapids option.
2. Select the machining to transform the head up/head down instructions and the head up/head
down will be introduced.
4.8.4.8 Continuous Cut Semiautomatically
This option allows converting the rapid movements in continuous cuts as follows:
1. Point Modify option and select Continuous Cut Semiautomatically option.
2. Select the machining of the part that has to be converted to cutting and the system will display
Continuous cut dialog box as shown below:
Figure 211: Continuous cut dialog box
3. Select Delete cycles on lead-ins parameter, if cutting the cycles on lead-ins is required.
4. Click OK button and the rapid movements will be converted to cutting. The user can select as
many rapid movements as required.
4.8.4.9 Transform Machining
This option allows moving the machined part as follows:
1. Point Modify option, select Transform machining option and the system will display Selection
toolbar.
2. Select the required machined part to move by means of the options provided and click Accept
button located in the same toolbar.
330
3. Mark a Reference point and the system will display Dragging options in order to move it as per
your requirements.
4. Move the cursor until the required point and mark an Insertion point. The machining will be
successfully moved to the selected point.
4.8.4.10 Copy Machining
This option allows copying the machining of a part as follows:
1. Point Modify option, select Copy machining option and the system will display Selection
toolbar.
2. Select the required machining of a part that has to be copied by means of the options provided
and click Accept button located in the same toolbar.
3. The system will display the following dialog box, which displays the different copy types
available:
Figure 212: Copy machining options
4. Select the required Copy type.
5. Mark a reference point and the system will display Dragging options in order to move the
selected machining.
6. Move the cursor till the required point and mark an Insertion point. The machining will be
copied in the selected point.
4.8.4.11 Modify Movements
This option allows modifying the movements of the machining as follows:
331
1. Point Modify option and select Modify movements option.
2. Select the machining whose movements are required to be changed.
3. Move the cursor till the required point and mark it.
4. The movement of the machining will be modified. The user can continue to select as many
machining movements as required to modify.
4.8.4.12 Modify Compensation of a Contour
This option allows modifying the existing compensation parameters of a contour as follows:
1. Point Modify option and select Modify compensation of a contour option.
2. Select a Base element for which the contours compensation parameters have to be modified
and the system will display Modify compensation dialog box as shown below:
Figure 213: Modify compensation dialog box
Find briefly described below the different fields provided in the previous dialog box:
332
 Only the selected contour: It indicates whether the changes in compensation of the contour are only
applied to the selected contour or not.
 All the part holes: It indicates whether the changes in compensation of the contour are only applied
to the holes in the part or not.
 All the part outsides: It indicates whether the changes in compensation of the contour are only
applied to the outsides of the part or not.
 All the contours (Insides and outsides): It indicates whether the changes in compensation of the
contour are only applied to all the contours, comprising both insides and outsides, of the part or not.
 System compensation: It indicates the compensation side in System compensation.
 CN compensation: It indicates the compensation side in CN compensation.
 In CN compensation, if the second or third option is selected, the system will display “Corrector
number” field.
 Corrector number: Compensation index value.
3. Select and introduce the required values and click OK button in order to save the changes. The
system will modify the contour compensation.
4.8.5 Options
4.8.5.1 Optimize
Customize ( ) option allows making the CNC code simpler and shorter by deleting the repeated
instructions as follows:
1. Click Optimize button and the system will display Optimize corrector changes ( ) option.
2. Select Optimize corrector changes option and click OK. The machining instructions will be
automatically optimized by the system.
333
4.8.5.2 Speed Rates
Speed rates ( ) option allows setting the different speed rates for the machine. When selected the
system will display Feed rates dialog box as shown below:
Figure 214: Feed rates dialog box
Here the user will be able to modify and set the different speed rates of the machine as required.
 Wheel-tool speed parameter will only be activated if the configuration is for punching machines.
4.8.5.3 Postprocessor Words
Postprocessor words ( ) option allows introducing postprocessor instructions in the machining

program. The postprocessor words are special instructions. When selected the system will display
Postprocessor words dialog box as shown below:
334
Find the different special instructions provided in the previous dialog box briefly described below:
 OPSTOP: Select this to introduce a Conditional stop instruction in the machining program. When
selecting this, the system displays ‘OP_stop’ word near to the machined part and is also included in
the Instruction list.
 STOP: Select this to introduce an Unconditional stop instruction in the machining program. When
selecting this, the system displays Stop word near to the machined part and is also included in the
Instruction list.
 AUXFUN: Select this to introduce an Auxiliary instruction in the machining program as follows:
1. Select AUXFUN Auxiliary function and then click OK. The system will display the AUXFUN,
Auxiliary function dialog box.
2. Select Assign value manually checkbox in order to assign a numeric value to the auxiliary
function. When selecting this, Value field will be enabled.
3. Enter the numeric value in Value field and then click OK. The assigned number will be
displayed along with the letter M near to the machined part and will also be included in the
Instruction list.
335
 PREFUN: Select this to introduce a Preparatory instruction in the machining program as follows:
1. Select PREFUN Preparatory function and then click OK. The system will display the
PREFUN, Preparatory function dialog box.
2. Select Assign value manually checkbox in order to assign a numeric value to the auxiliary
function. When selecting this, Value field will be enabled.
3. Introduce the numeric value in Value field and then click OK. The assigned number will be
displayed along with the letter G near to the machined part and will also be included in the
Instruction list.
 DELAY: Select this option to introduce the program delay time instruction in the machining program
as follows:
1. Select DELAY Program dwell time and then click OK. The system will display a dialog box.
2. Introduce the delay time value in Value field and then click OK. The program delay time will be
recorded in the Instruction list.
 OPSKIP: Select this option to enable or disable skipping the optional blocks in the machining
program as follows:
1. Select OPSKIP Optional block skip option, click OK button and the system will display the
Figure 216: Optional block skip options
2. Select ON checkbox in order to enable skipping the optional block or select OFF in order to
disable it.
3. Click OK button. The OPSKIP Optional block skip program will be recorded in the Instruction
list.
336
 PPRINT: Select this option in order to introduce a Comment text in the machining program as follows:
1. Select PPRINT Comment text, click OK button and the system will display the following dialog
box:
Figure 217: Comment text
2. Introduce the required comments in Text field and then click OK. The comment will be included
in the Instruction List.
 INSNC: Select this option to insert a text in the machining program as follows:
1. Select INSNC Insertion block CN, click OK button and the system will display the following
dialog box:
Figure 218: Insertion block CN
2. Introduce the required text in Text field and click OK button. The text will be displayed near the
machined part and also recorded in the Instruction List.
 CLAMP: Select this option in order to introduce clamp management instructions in the machining
program as follows:
1. Select CLAMP Management of clamps option, click OK button and the system will display
the following dialog box:
337
Figure 219: Management of clamps
2. Select the required checkbox to manage the clamps and click OK button.
3. The clamp instructions will be recorded in the Instructions list.
 HEADZ: Select this option in order to introduce cutting head instructions in the machining program as
follows:
1. Select HEADZ Head up/down option, click OK button and the system will display the following
dialog box:
Figure 220: Head up/down
2. Select whether the user wants the head up or down and click OK button.
3. The cutting head instruction will be displayed near to the machined part and also recorded in
 TRAP: Select this option in order to introduce trap instructions in the machining program as follows:
338
1. Select TRAP Open/close trap option, click OK button and the system will display the following
dialog box:
Figure 221: Open/close trap
2. Select whether the user wants to Open or Close the trap, introduce the Number of traps and
click OK button.
3. The trap instruction will be displayed near to the machined part as well as recorded in the
Instruction list.
 COOLNT: Select this option in order to introduce refrigeration instructions in the machining program
as follows:
1. Select COOLNT Refrigeration option, click OK button and the system will display the following
dialog box:
Figure 222: Refrigeration
2. Select the required refrigeration option and click OK button.
339
3. The refrigeration instruction will be displayed near to the machined part and also recorded in
4.8.5.4 Contour Attributes
Contour attributes ( ) option allows assigning contour attributes which are the postprocessor
instructions in the machining program as follows:
1. Select Contour attributes option located in Options menu.
2. Select a base contour and the system will display Contour attributes dialog box as shown
below:
Figure 223: Contour attributes dialog box
Find the different fields provided in the previous dialog box briefly described below:
 Corner management: It indicates whether the corner values are assigned or not. If selected, the
system allows introducing the corner values.
 Microjoint at contour´s end: It indicates whether the micro-joint is assigned at the end of the
contour or not. If enabled, the system will display By quality checkbox.
340
 By quality: It indicates whether the micro-joint value is based on quality. If enabled, the system
allows introducing the micro-joint value manually.
 User attributes (1-5): Indicate the rest of the values that are assigned to the contour.
1. Select and introduce the required values, click OK button and the system will display Contour
attributes dialog box as shown below:
Figure 224: Contour attributes; Make on
 Picked contours: Select this to assign the attributes to the selected contours.
 All the contours: Select this to assign the attributes to all the contours.
 The contours with same technology: Select this to assign the attributes to contours of same
technology.
 The contours with same technology, form and dimensions: Select this to assign the attributes to
contours of same technology, form and dimensions.
 The contours with same technology and quality: Select this to assign the attributes to the
contours of same technology and quality.
 The contours with same technology, quality, form and dimensions: Select this to assign the
attributes to the contours of same technology, quality, form, and dimensions.
341
4.8.5.5 CN Compensation
CN Compensation ( ) option allows selecting the side of compensation and index for numeric control.
It will be only applicable if the compensation type is Numeric Control. When selected the system will
display CN Compensation dialog box as shown below:
Figure 225: CN Compensation dialog box
Select the Compensation side, introduce the Compensation index and click OK button so that the
changes are saved.
4.8.5.6 System Compensation
System Compensation ( ) option allows selecting the side of compensation and introducing the cutter
radius. This is only applicable if the compensation is made by the system. When selected the system will
display System Compensation dialog box as shown below:
Figure 226: System compensation dialog box
342
Select the Compensation side, introduce the Cutter radius and click OK button in order to save the
changes.
4.8.6.1 Part Extraction
Part extraction ( ) option allows the user to evacuate the machined part manually or by means of traps
by performing the following steps:
1. Select Part extraction option, located in Component removal menu and the system will display
Extractor dialog box as shown below:
Figure 227: Extractor dialog box
343
2. In type field select STOP option in order to evacuate the machined part manually. Select TRAP
in order to trap and evacuate the part.
 TRAP type of evacuation will only be available if it is previously configured in the Machine
Configuration.
3. If TRAP option is selected the system will display TRAP dialog box as shown below:
Figure 228: TRAP dialog box
4. Introduce the Number of traps, Number of boxes, the Increment X and Y and select Move the
part after opening the trap, Fasten the part during the extraction and Vacuum parameters if
required.
4.8.6.2 Assign Extractions
Assign extractions ( ) option allows assigning the evacuation type of the machined part as follows:
344
1. Click Assign extractions option and the system will display Extractor dialog box as shown
below:
Figure 229: Extractor dialog box
Find the fields provided in the previous dialog box briefly described below:
 Type: Type of extractor assigned for evacuation. It is possible to select the required type of extractor
from the drop-down list:
o Stop
o Trap
o None
 Manual: Select this to manually select the evacuation method/position.
345
 Semi-Automatic: Select this and the system displays the Position section.
o Middle: The Extractor is positioned at mid-point.
o End: The Extractor is positioned at the end-point.
o Picked point: The Extractor is positioned at a selected point.
 Automatic: Select Automatic to evacuate the part automatically.
2. Select the required values and then click OK. The evacuation type will be assigned.
4.8.6.3 Assign Boxes
Assign Boxes ( ) option allows assigning a box to evacuate the machined parts as follows:
1. Select Assign Boxes option and the system will display Boxes dialog box as shown below:
Figure 230: Boxes dialog box
346
2. Enable Assign boxes checkbox and Normal and Symmetric fields will be activated in order to
introduce the different angles.
3. Introduce the number of boxes to assign in 0º, 90º, 180º, 270º and Others.
4. The user can click the required arrow buttons in order to assign the same number of boxes at
all angles/symmetrically.
5. Click OK button and the boxes will be assigned at specific angles.
4.8.7 View
4.8.7.1 Current Status
Select Current Status ( ) located in View menu and the system will display Current Status dialog box
as shown below:
Figure 231: Current status dialog box
This dialog box displays data such as the Units, Cutter radius, Compensation, X and Y.
If Feed rates button is selected the system will display Feed rates dialog box, providing the user with Cut
speed, Chamfered speed, Powder mark speed, Drill mark speed, Pen mark speed, Cut mark speed,
Wheel-tool speed and Rapid speed, all of them by millimeters per minute.
347
4.8.7.2 Verify Machining
Verify machining ( ) option the system will test if the machining process has been done properly
looking if:
 All the parts and contours are machined
 There is no overlapping between parts
 There are no leads, micro-joints, loops, etc. that overlap with other elements
If any of the previous situations is given the system will display the following completion message: “All
machining on the sheet has been executed”. The dark grey color in the contours means that the test has
been successful.
If the system finds any problem, it will display a warning message, marking the problematic zones with
other color, or if the visualization is too small, with green points.
4.9 VIEW
4.9.1 Display
4.9.1.1 Part Machining List
Part machining list ( ) option allows the user to decide from what machine the user wants to use
machining on the part. The user will need to draw and save a part and then save machining so as to
display the Part machining list window when clicking on Part Machining list display:
348
Figure 232: Part machining list window
4.9.1.2 Simulation Window
Click Simulation window ( ) button to visualize the Simulation window of the machined part. It is
possible to set the speed, view the cutter radius, and so on.
Figure 233: Simulation window
Find the different sections provided in this dialog box briefly described below:
 In the first section it is possible to set the percentage of speed.
349
 The Operation section displays the Cutting quality, Cutting operation with respect to X axis, Y axis,
and the Cutter radius.
 The next section provides information about the torches used and their positions, compensation
system and control.
 Use the arrow buttons to view the required simulation process.
 Use the other buttons at the bottom of the window to pause, stop the operation, fast forward the
simulation, move to the previous operation, current operation, and so on.
4.9.1.3 Machining Explorer
Click Machining Explorer ( ) option in order to visualize a panel on the left side of the window with a
tree structure that displays the machining instructions of the active part. This option helps interpreting by
converting the sequential instruction list into a structure. Each element of this list can be visualized
sequentially or grouped on several levels for a better comprehension depending on the case.
According to the behaviour of the views in relation to synchronization between them, any machining view
allows modification thereof, originating an update of the rest, so that system status is coherent in all the
views.
Any tree node can be selected with the mouse or keyboard. If the selected node corresponds to an
instruction it will be highlighted in the drawing view. To display the corresponding information of that
instruction in the machining window, enable the visible option panel from the options ribbon. Therefore
navigating the instruction tree will display data in the machining window.
If the selected node in the Machining Explorer corresponds to a classifying group or node all instructions
hanging from the same will be highlighted. In this case the machining window will not show information
unless this group has a single instruction.
Besides visualization per selection, the desired instructions can be highlighted by moving the mouse over
the tree without clicking. This function enables a quick visualization of the desired instruction or instruction
group in the main view without being necessary to select it for edition.
350
4.9.1.4 Machining Window
The aim of the Machining Window ( ) is based on a detailed visualization of instructions and
modifications at the same time. This view allows modifications and updates the rest of the views so that
the system status is coherent all the time.
In the edition panel of the machining instruction properties, the instruction data can be visualized in detail
and modified. Changes made can be visualized from Drawing window simultaneously.
It is possible to delete the changes made at any time using Undo option.
4.9.1.5 Change Co-ordinates
Change Co-ordinates ( ) button allows the user to change co-ordinates of the geometry with respect
to an axis. When pointing to this application, the system lists different ways to change the co-ordinates as
follows:
 Move to a point ( ): Click this to move the co-ordinates of the geometry to a point.
 Rotate by an element ( ): Click this to change the co-ordinates by rotating an element.
 Rotate an angle ( ): Click this to change the co-ordinates at a specified angle.
 Symmetry on axis X ( ): Click this to change the co-ordinates symmetrically with respect to X
axis.
 Symmetry on axis Y ( ): Click this to change the co-ordinates symmetrically with respect to Y
axis.
 Symmetry on axis XY ( ): Click this to change the co-ordinates symmetrically with respect to X
and Y axis.
 Make by default ( ): Click this to consider the current co-ordinates as the default co-ordinates
whenever opening the CAD module.
351
 Restore ( ): Click this to replace the current co-ordinates are replaced with the default co-
ordinates.
4.9.1.6 Axis
Select Axis ( ) button to display the X and Y axis on the Drawing window. This application will be
active until the user clicks it again in order to disable it.
4.9.1.7 Sheet Simulation
Select Sheet Simulation ( ) option in order to simulate the sheet of the part. This application will be
active until the user clicks it again in order to disable it.
Figure 234: Sheet simulation example
 The user can also press F12 key on the keyboard to use this application.
4.9.1.8 Special Display
Special Display ( ) option enables visualizing the parts by color as per tools used, organizing the
color by part reference, shape or type as follows:
1. Select Special display option located in Display menu and the system will display Color
display dialog box as shown below:
352
Figure 235: Color display dialog box
2. Select the required option from the ones provided in Fill the part and By tool fields.
3. If Fill parameter is enabled, the part will be filled with the corresponding color.
4.9.1.9 Auxiliary Geometry
Auxiliary Geometry ( ) option allows the user to create, modify and delete the non-cut lines. It is also
possible to customize the non-cut lines by specifying their color, style and thickness and configuring their
line properties, as well as their visualization in Draw and Nest view.
In order to enable this option In the Drawing module, it is necessary to create it first from Auxiliary
geometry definition window, which is displayed from Configuration options/Configure: Draw and Nest/
Auxiliar section. Here the user will be able to specify the name and properties of the line (color style and
thickness).
4.9.1.10 Show Parts
Show parts ( ) option enables opening and visualizing the several parts of a job simultaneously in
the Drawing module. This functionality allows modifying aspects such as the geometry and machining of
many parts, with no need of opening them one by one separately.
1. Select Show parts option and the system will display a list with the following options:
 All parts: This option displays all the parts included in the job.
 Selected part: With this option it is possible to view all the parts associated to the same
machine as selected part.
353
 First part: This option allows the user to open the initial part from the parts opened.
 Previous part: With this option it is possible to open the preceding part.
 Next part: This option helps the user to open the succeeding part.
 Last part: It displays the final part among the opened parts.
2. Once the required parts to open have been selected, it will be possible to navigate through them
individually as per the requirements.
4.9.1.11 Redraw
Redraw ( ) option allows visualizing the drawing of the machined part as shown below:
Figure 236: Redraw example
4.9.2 Zoom
4.9.2.1 Zoom All
Select Zoom All ( ) option in order to zoom the part to the maximum size of the screen.
354
4.9.2.2 Zoom Window
Select Zoom Window ( ) option in order to zoom the selected part as follows:
1. Click Zoom Window option and mark the first point of the window to select the part that has to
be enlarged.
2. Move the cursor till the desired end point and mark the end point of the window.
3. The selected part will be enlarged.
4.9.2.3 Zoom Previous
Select Zoom Previous ( ) in order to go back to the previous screen.
 The user can also press F7 key on the keyboard to use this application. +
4.9.2.4 Zoom Dynamic
Select Zoom Dynamic ( ) option in order to zoom the part to a required size as follows:
1. Click Zoom Dynamic button and the system will display a pink window on the part.
2. Click and move the cursor until getting the desired window size and then right click.
3. You can repeat the steps 1 and 2 until getting the desired size and the right-click. The part will
be enlarged based on the window size.
4.9.2.5 Zoom Scale
Select Zoom Scale ( ) option in order to zoom the part based on proportionate values as follows:
355
1. Click Zoom Scale button and the system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 237: Zoom scale values
2. Introduce the proportionate values and then click OK button.
3. The part will be enlarged based on the specified proportionate values.
 The user can also press F7 key on the keyboard to use this application
4.9.2.6 Zoom Base
Select Zoom Base ( ) option in order to zoom the part within the default limits.
 The user can also press F6 key on the keyboard to use this application
4.9.2.7 Define Limits
Define Limits ( ) option allows the user to define the limits of the screen for Zoom Base view. The
user will have to select the required part of the screen by clicking two points to set the limit.
4.9.2.8 Full Screen
Select Full Screen ( ) option in order to visualize the full drawing screen without the tool bars. The
system will display Full Screen button on the drawing window, which the user will have to click in order to
return to the normal screen.
356
4.10 SIMULATION
4.10.1 Simulate
Simulate section allows simulating the required machining instructions. It is possible to visualize the
machining instructions and the position of the required machining instructions between many other
options. It includes the following:
4.10.1.1 Program
Select Program ( ) button in order to visualize all the instructions of a machining program. When
selected the system will display Instruction list dialog box as shown below, listing all the machining
instructions:
Figure 238: Instruction list dialog box
Here the user can visualize the position number of the machining instruction together with the type and
the specific text of the instructions. It is possible to print these instructions by means of Print button
provided at the bottom of the dialog box.
357
4.10.1.2 ISN Position
ISN Position ( ) option allows simulating the machining instruction of the selected program line
number as follows:
1. Click ISN Position button and the system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 239: ISN Position value
2. Introduce the required program line number of the machining instruction in Value field and click
OK button.
3. The machining instruction of the selected program line will be simulated.
4.10.1.3 Mouse Positioning
Select Mouse Positioning ( ) option in order to simulate the machining instruction up to the selected
machining position as follows:
1. Click Mouse Positioning option.
2. Select the point on which the user wants to position himself.
3. The system will simulate the machining instruction up to the selected machining position.
4.10.1.4 Begin
Select Begin ( ) button in order to simulate the first machining instruction.
4.10.1.5 Previous
Select Previous ( ) button in order to simulate the previous instruction.
358
4.10.1.6 Next
Select Next ( ) button in order to simulate the next machining instruction when having previously
moved from the current instruction to the previous one or first one.
4.10.1.7 End
Select End ( ) button in order to simulate the last machining instruction when having previously
moved from the current instruction to the previous one.
4.10.1.8 Run
Select Run ( ) option in order to visualize the simulation of the machining process including the rapid
movements, evacuation and so on. When selected, the system will display Simulation window as shown
below:
 This application will only be enabled once the part is machined.
4.10.1.9 Previous Tool
Select Previous tool ( ) button in order to move to the previous tool.
359
4.10.1.10 Next Tool
Select Previous tool ( ) button in order to move to the next tool.
4.11 NOTES
4.11.1 Dimension Notes
4.11.1.1 Automatic
Select Automatic ( ) option in order to visualize the dimensions of the geometry automatically.
 The user will only be able to visualize the dimensions if Texts and dimension option is enabled on
the View menu.
Select Semi-automatic ( ) option to view the dimensions of the selected element of the geometry
automatically.
 If Prompt for text checkbox is enabled in Dimension definition dialog box, the system will allow the
user editing the dimension text by displaying Text dialog box.
4.11.1.3 Delete
Select Delete ( ) option in order to erase an existing dimension as follows:
1. Click Delete button and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. By means of the options provided select the dimensions required to delete and click Accept
button.
360
3. The selected dimension note(s) will be deleted.
4.11.1.4 Dimension Notes (1-7)
The different Dimension notes provided below display the dimensions selected between two points of
different type:
 Dimension Notes 1 ( ): It visualizes horizontal dimension notes of the geometry.
 Dimension Notes 2 ( ): It visualizes vertical dimension notes of the geometry.
 Dimension Notes 3 ( ): It visualizes inclined dimension notes of the geometry.
 Dimension Notes 4 ( ): It visualizes radius dimension notes of the geometry.
 Dimension Notes 5 ( ): It visualizes diameter dimension notes of the geometry.
 Dimension Notes 6 ( ): It visualizes angle dimension notes between three points.
 Dimension Notes 7 ( ): It visualizes angle dimension notes between two elements.
Select Configuration ( ) option in order to configure the dimension notes as follows:
1. Click Configuration button and the system will display Dimension definition dialog box as
shown below:
361
Figure 241: Dimension definition dialog box
 Font: Font of the dimension notes. Click the button in this field to select the type, style, and size of
the font.
 Decimal places in text: Number of decimals to be displayed in the dimension note.
 No decimal places for exact dimension notes: It indicates whether or not the dimension notes are
displayed with decimals.
 Put bench marks: In this section, it is possible to select the required check box to align the bench
marks according to dimensions. The different options include the following:
362
o According to minimum dimension
o According to maximum dimension
o According to diagonal dimension
 Percentage: Percentage value of the dimension note, which is the maximum text size with respect to
the part size.
 Automatic text: In this section, it is possible to enter the before and after text for the linear, radius,
diameters, and angle dimension notes.
 Prompt for text: It indicates whether the before and after text is displayed automatically or not. If this
check box is selected, when using the semi-automatic and manual dimension notes, the system
displays a dialog box allowing the user to change the dimension text.
 Set dimension attributes a dependent scale factor: It indicates whether the dimension attributes
(lines and arrows of the dimension notes) are dependent on the geometry and based on the Put
bench marks section or not. If the Select dimension attributes as a dependent scale factor check box
is not selected, the length value of the dimension attributes has to be entered. In this case, the
Dimension definition dialog box allows the user the user entering the length value for the attributes.
Enter the length of the dimension attributes in ‘a’, ‘b’, ‘c’, and ‘d’ fields.
 Automatic dimension notes: Select the required type of geometries for which the dimension notes
have to be displayed. The different types are:
o Horizontal
o Vertical
o Radius
o Diameters
 Only one radius if there are several elements: It indicates whether or not the dimension note is
displayed for only one element in case there are several elements of equal radius.
 Only one diameter if there are several elements: It indicates whether or not the dimension note is
displayed for one element in case there are several elements of equal diameters.
 Prompt for this data: It indicates whether or not the system allows the user to calculate the co-
ordinates for the Horizontal and Vertical dimension notes. It is also possible to set this data by
selecting the required co-ordinate system in the Vertical and Horizontal section.
363
2. Select and introduce the required details and click OK button. The parameters will be set
accordingly.
4.11.1.6 Change Data
Select this option in order to change the parameters of the manual dimension notes (dimension notes 1-
7) as follows:
1. Click Change data ( ) button and the system will display Dimension definition
window as shown below:
Figure 242: Dimension definition dialog box (Change data)
2. Edit the required data.
3. Click OK button in order to set the parameters accordingly.

364
 In order to activate all the fields Change data checkbox must be selected.
4.11.1.7 Modify Dimension
Select this option in order to change the position of the dimension notes to a desired position as follows:
1. Click Modify dimension ( ) button and select the bench mark to modify.
2. Place the bench mark in the desired place and the system will display a dialog box.
3. Introduce the required value in Text field and click OK button in order to save the changes.
 The system will only display the dialog box with Text field if Prompt for text checkbox is enabled
in Dimension definition dialog box.
4.11.1.8 Dimension Size
Select this option in order to modify the dimensions of the parametric geometries as follows:
1. Click Dimension size ( ) button, select the dimension that has to be modified
and the system will display a dialog box.
2. Introduce the new dimension value in Text field.
3. Click OK button in order to set the value introduced.
4.11.1.9 Dimension Constraints
Select this to set the dimension constraints for the geometry of the part as follows:
1. Click Dimension constraints ( ) button and the system will display

Parameterizations settings dialog box as shown below:
365
Figure 243: Parametrizations settings dialog box
 Standard geometric constraints: In this section, select the required constraints for the geometry as
follows:
o Horizontally: Select this check box to set the horizontal constraints for geometries.
o Vertically: Select this check box to set the vertical constraints for geometries.
o Parallelism: Select this check box to set the parallel constraints for geometries.
o Concentricity: Select this check box to set the concentric constraints for circles and arcs.
o Perpendicularity: Select this check box to set the perpendicular constraints for geometries.
o Tangency: Select this check box to set the tangent constraints for geometries.
o Length equality (lines): Select this check box to set the length constraints for lines.
o Radius equality: Select this check box to set the radius constraints for circles.
 Auxiliar parameters: In this section, the user can enter the absolute resolution value for linear
tolerance.
 Create errors log file: It indicates whether an error log file is created or not.
366
3. Select the required values and click OK button. The constraints will be set for the geometries of
the part.
4.11.1.10 Explode Dimensions
Select this option in order to convert the dimensions geometry to an uncut geometry as follows:
1. Click Explode dimensions ( ) button and then the system will display
Selection toolbar.
2. Select the dimension note that has to be exploded by means of the options provided and then
click Accept button.
3. The dimension note will be exploded and converted to an uncut geometry.
4.11.2 Text
4.11.2.1 Text
This option allows the user to introduce a text as follows:
1. Click Text ( ) button and the system displays Text definition dialog box as shown below:
Figure 244: Text definition dialog box
 Font: Font of the text. Click the button in this field to select the required type, style, and size of font.
367
 Text: Text that is introduced on the part.
 Orientation: Angle value of the text. The user can select the required angle from the drop-down list.
 Vectorize: It indicates whether the text is converted automatically to geometry or not. When selecting
this field, then the system displays Number of tracts for the Beizer curves field.
 Number of tracts for the Beizer curves: Select the number of tracts for the Beizer curves.
2. Select and introduce the required values and then click OK button. The text will be displayed in
the Drawing window.
3. Mark an insertion point to insert the text. The system will display the Dragging options in order
to place the text in the desired point.
4.11.2.2 Modify
Select this option in order to modify the required text as follows:
1. Select Modify ( ) option and select the text to modify.
2. The system will display a dialog box providing Text field, where the user will have to introduce
the required text.
3. Click OK button and the new text will replace the old one.
 Marked texts can be modified in the same way as informative texts and writings. The option
Modify text allows selecting a marked text to replace the current text with another. In this case, the
system will replace the geometry of the current marked text by the geometry of the new one.
4.11.3 View
4.11.3.1 Text and Dimensions
Select Text and Dimensions ( ) option in order to display or hide the texts and dimension notes from
the geometry.
368
 This option will only be applicable for those texts that have not been converted to geometry by
means of Vectorize option.
4.12 UTILITIES
Utilities menu provides the following options:
4.12.1 Cut of Double or Triple Chamfers
Cut of double or triple chamfers ( ) option allows the user to cut the edges with the same kind of
chamfer (For example: triple with triple, double with double) from the start point value entered and hence
the system automatically machines the selected part.
Double chamfer: The machine must have three heads, one for vertical cut, one for upper chamfer and
the third for lower chamfer. In this case all the values must be filled, and for variable chamfers the values
must be different from left to right side.
The chamfers must be assigned manually to each part using one of the four kinds of chamfers on the
chamfers toolbar.
4.12.2 Partial Cut or a Contour
With this option, the user can only cut part of a contour in cutting and combined machines. The part of the
new contour to be cut will be defined dynamically with the snap mode. Perform the following steps:
1. Select Partial Cut of a Contour ( ) option and the system will display the Partial cut of a
contour dialog box as shown below:
369
Figure 245: Partial cut of a contour dialog box
2. Select Lead-in/Lead-out length is fixed checkbox, if the user wants to enable the D field. With
this option, it is possible to specify D, A, and F (distance, angle and length) for lead-in and/or
lead-out.
 Compensation mode: Select the required type of compensation mode.
 Head radius: Introduce the required radius value.
 Apply quality: Select this checkbox to assign cutting technology of a specified quality.
By clicking the Navigation button, the system will display Cutting quality dialog box. Select the
required type of Cutting quality and click OK button.
Click Modify button in order to modify the material, thickness, and so on. If selected, the system will
display Table of technology dialog box to include, modify, delete the material, thickness, and other
details.
370
Click OK and the system will display Selection toolbar. Select the required element using the options
provided and Accept button located in the same menu. The selected element will be assigned with
the cutting technology of the previously specified quality.
4.12.3 Open Drafting
Open drafting ( ) option will open the drafting module without closing the drawing/nesting ones. If the
system detects changes in the machining when selecting this option, it will prompt for saving them. If the
user performs changes in the drafting module, the system will ask to save them again before going back
to the drawing/nesting module.
4.12.4 Compare Geometries
Compare Geometries ( ) option allows the user comparing two different geometries.
 If two identical geometries are compared, the system will display a warning message stating that
the geometries are identical.
In order to compare two geometries, perform the following steps:
1. Select Compare Geometries option and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the first geometry by means of the options provided and click Accept button.
3. Select the second geometry that has to be compared with the first and click Accept button one
more time.
4. The differences between the geometries will be highlighted.
4.12.5 Bitmap
Bitmap ( ) option allows visualizing a Bitmap image on the Drawing window as follows:
1. Select Bitmap option and the system will display Open dialog box.
371
2. Select the required bitmap image ant click Open button.
3. The system will display the selected bitmap image on the Drawing window.
4.13 DRAGGING OPTIONS

The Dragging toolbar enables the rotation of the selected elements in the desired angle and direction.
Figure 246: Dragging options
This button sets the step angle, for rotating the selected geometry using the mouse.
 Step of rotation: The selected geometry will rotate in the angle indicated in the displayed dialogue.
 Step angle: Clicking on one of these buttons or the keys that appear in lower case at the bottom of
each button (Ctr - 1, Ctr - 5, Ctr - 0, Ctr - 3, Ctr - 4, Ctr - 9), the selected geometry will rotate in the
corresponding angle.
 Rotate (1-5-10-30-45-90) degrees: Clicking on this button or Ctr - A, the selected geometry will rotate
until reaching the symmetrical geometry with respect to the vertical axis of the mouse position.
 Symmetry X: Click on this button to choose the rotation direction.
 Finish: Validates the selection. The same effect can be achieved by clicking the right mouse button
or pressing the <INTRO> key.
When dragging a part in automatic and it needs to be rotated in order to fit in a gap, the system
automatically detects if there are collisions when rotating, and if so, it will look for a closer point
without collision. This automatic detection works when rotating a part using the keys Ctrl+Q or
Ctrl+W and clicking the left mouse button.
Moreover, when right mouse button is held down and the part is dragged, the system automatically
looks for better rotation for each position so it is easier to fit a part in a gap. In case of the same
behaviour as until now when rotating the part with the right mouse button, press Ctrl button.
372
4.14 SELECTION OPTIONS
The different program options and operations require elements selection. In order to select elements, the
button bar with different selection options appears. The options provided on this bar change according to
the actions that can be applied at each moment. The most common selection button bar is the following:
Figure 247: Selection options
 Element: Selection of elements by clicking the mouse on them (or deselection if they are already
selected).
 Window-Capture: Selection of elements with a rectangular window. The same effect as clicking the
left mouse button in an area in which there are no elements.
 Trap: Selection of elements by means of an area generated by polylines. All the elements trapped
inside this area will be selected.
 Join: The elements whose ends coincide with the last element selected are selected. The same
effect can be produced by clicking the middle mouse button.
 All: Selection of all the drawing elements.
 Dots: Selection of all the drawing points.
 Line segments: Selection of all the drawing segments.
 Arc segments: Selection of all the drawing arcs.
 Full circles: Selection of all the drawing circumferences.
 Lines: Selection of all the drawing lines.
 Invert selection: It inverts the current selection.
 Accept: It accepts the selection.
 Finish: It finishes the execution of the option.
373
CHAPTER
5
5 NESTING AND MACHINING MODULE
The Nesting and machining module is the area of the program, which is most directly related to the final
machining of the part. It is in charge of the right positioning of the parts in the sheet and calculating the
machining sequence and creating the CNC program among other things.
In order to gain access to the nesting and machining module, select the option Nesting and machining in
Parts menu or press the corresponding button in the buttons bar. While going into the nesting module, the
status bar will display the progress and information bar of the part that is being processed.
5.1 TITLE BAR

The Title bar located in Nesting and machining window helps to identify the work in progress at any time.
The three factors that define a particular job (Machine, Material and Thickness) are displayed in the
center of the title bar. In addition, the user will also be provided with the name of the active Module, the
name of the active/current Job and the active Database.
5.2 DRAWING WINDOW

The Drawing window is located in the center of the cutting and machining window. This is the drawing
operative area where the nesting and machining of sheets can be visualized.
374
5.3 STATUS BAR
The status bar provides up to date information about the steps to perform and the active coordinates of
the cursor.
 Sheets dimension: Those are the X and Y dimensions of the current sheet.
 Percent of sheet occupied by the parts: This is the size of the whole sheet occupied by the nested
parts.
 Percent of remnant occupied: In this case, referred to the size that the nested parts occupy in the
remnant.
 Maximum cutting coordinates: Maximum X and Y distances where the machine head will arrive.
 Sheet reference: This is the reference given when the sheet has been created.
 CNC filename: This is the name of the CNC file that will not be generated until the job has been
saved.
Apart from all the data shown previously located at the bottom of the window, there is also an icon
representing the active option. This icon, together with the name and group it belongs to, plus a text
displaying the user´s requirements at any time (a point, a selection, etc.) makes the program user friendly
and guides the user through the execution of the different options.
5.4 CUSTOMIZE QUICK ACCESS TOOLBAR

Customize quick access toolbar option permits the user to access the different functionality areas of
the software quickly and in a visual way, as they are coming in the nesting and machining module. This
frequently used toolbar is accessible on the top left corner of the window. This provides the user with one
click shortcut commands for the commonly used functions, such as creating a new job/part, opening the
selected part of the job/existing job and saving it between many other options.
By means of this option the user will also be able to include additional icons such as Print, Properties and
Projects for example. Undo ( ) and Redo ( ) options enable the user to select the number of actions
that is going to use. It is necessary to unfold the list of last performed actions and to select the action or
actions ready to undo or redo from the list.
375
 The user can add any frequently used commands to the quick access tool bar by right clicking on
the command icon and selecting Add to Quick Access Tool Bar.
More commands... option located in the drop-down menu provided on the right corner of the Quick
Access Toolbar, displays Customize dialog box which includes the following tabs:
o Quick Access
o Hide options
o Shortcut keys
o Ribbon
Each command displays a certain activity area. The Commands section in each group carries out a
command or displays a menu of commands. Using this hierarchy, similar commands are grouped
together making the Customize access toolbar very task oriented. Because in all the modules, some
commands are available directly on each tab and it is not necessary to search for those options in
submenus.
5.5 CONTEXTUAL MENU
5.5.1 New
New ( ) option enables the user to create a new element.
5.5.2 Open
Open ( ) option allows the user to open the selected element.
5.5.3 Open Parts

Open parts option allows the user to open All parts of the job, open parts with the Same machine, open
parts of a Same subjob and open Selected parts.
376
Figure 248: Open parts options
5.5.4 Block
Block ( ) option allows the user to block the selected element.
5.5.5 Delete
Delete ( ) option allows the user to delete the selected elements. When selected, a warning message
asking whether the user wants to delete the selected element will be displayed:
Figure 249: Warning message (Delete)
5.5.6 Import
Import ( ) option allows the user to Import pending parts of manufacturing orders list, Import parts
from database and Import DXF files.
1. If the user wants to import pending parts of manufacturing orders list, it will be necessary to select
Pending parts of manufacturing orders list option. The following window will be displayed:
377
Figure 250: Manufacturing products window
2. If the user wants to import parts from database, it will be necessary to select Import parts from
database option so as to display the following window:
Figure 251: Import parts window
3. If the user wants to import DXF files, it will be necessary to select Import DXF files option. The
following window will be displayed:
378
Figure 252: Open window
5.5.7 Quantity
Quantity ( ) option allows the user to change the quantity of the selected element. When selecting this
option, the following window will be displayed:
Figure 253: Number of parts window
379
5.5.8 Priority
Priority ( ) option allows changing the priority of the selected element. When selecting this option, the
following window will be displayed:
Figure 254: Priority window
5.5.9 Information
Information ( ) option displays the properties of the selected element. When selecting this option,
Part parameters window will be displayed, in which the user will be able to visualize the following data:
Figure 255: Part parameters window
380
5.5.10 Part Rotations
By clicking Part Rotations, the user will be able to choose between following options: 0º, 90º, 180º, 270º
and Others. It will also be possible to make some configurations. In order to do so, the user will need to
click on Configure button so as to display the following window:
Figure 256: Part rotation window
5.5.11 Properties
When clicking Properties option the user will be able to choose between the following options:
 Assign boxes to parts: From this option the user can assign the boxes from where the parts will
be evacuated. When selected, the following window will be displayed:
381
Figure 257: Boxes dialog box
There are two different sections: Normal and Symmetrics. On both, the user can configure
different boxes depending on the angle they are placed on the sheet.
The arrow buttons allow making this configuration faster if the box is the same. For example,
filling the 0 degrees normal position with the box number 2 and clicking on the down button will
make the system to fill all the rotation fields with the same number.
Also, the user can choose to apply the changes just in the current sheet or for every sheet of the
job. In addition, it is possible to activate the default box when selecting Assign boxes option.
 Valid part for nest in common cut: This option is used to define whether this part can have a
common cut or not despite of the nesting for common cut turned on. With this option turned on
the common cut between the parts are made. If this is turned off and even though the nesting for
382
common cut is turned on there will be no common cut for this part. But the common cut will be
there for other parts.
 Automatic round angles: It indicates whether to include the round angles automatically
 Machine with cut fast options: This option allows doing the automatic flying cut machining. It is
useful in two contexts:
- When the flying cut is not activated automatically a part that can be
machined in this way.
- When the flying cut is activated automatically and the user does not want
to activate it in a part machined this way.
If the part contains automatic flying cut machining, the option will appear selected and the part will be
machined again but without flying cut.
If the part does not contain flying cut machining, the option will appear unmarked. If it is selected, the
part will be machined with flying cut according to the configuration set.
If the part has been previously machined in the drawing module, the option will appear disabled
because the system prioritizes manual machining.
If the part contains manual flying cut machining, the option will appear selected.
 If this option is selected for parts already nested on a sheet, the new machining will not be
applied on them. It will only be applied on the new sheets. If the user wants to apply the new
machining on already nested parts, it will be necessary to regenerate the nesting.
5.5.12 Group
When clicking here, Block on select option is displayed. This option allows the user to block the selected
elements.
5.5.13 Order
It allows the user ordering by name, by size, by quantity and by priority.
383
5.5.14 View
When clicking here, Only pending parts option will be displayed.
5.5.15 Size
When clicking Size, Bitmaps size dialog box is displayed:
Figure 258: Bitmaps size dialog box
5.5.16 Cancel
Cancel ( ) option closes the contextual menu.
5.6 SUBJOBS
Subjobs tab includes the following options:
5.6.1 Open
The manufacturing order can be divided into different jobs which include all the parts made with the same
material and thickness for one machine.
From this option of the menu, the system will show all the jobs of the current manufacturing order into a
list allowing the user to select one for being opened and edited. When selecting Open ( ) option, the
system will display Subjob selection dialog box.
When clicking New button, the user can create a new subjob without any part on an order. In order to
open a new subjob, the user has to define a machine, material and thickness. The parts can be imported
directly on the sheet.
384
5.6.2 Previous
This option allows going through the subjobs following a creation order. Whenever Previous ( )
option is selected, the system will open the subjob previously created. If the option is disabled in the
menu, this means that the current manufacturing order is only made of one subjob.
5.6.3 Next
Next ( ) option allows going through the subjobs following a creation order. Whenever this option is
selected, the system will open the next subjob in the list that was previously created. If the option is
disabled in the menu, this means that the current manufacturing order is only made of one subjob.
5.6.4 Save
Save ( ) option allows saving all the jobs of the current manufacturing order. The sheet that is going
to be saved will appear in the status toolbar. With this protected option the user is allowed to
automatically generate a text file with many machining and nesting information. This application uses the
file FMecData.tem as template, where the user can define the information and the format of the output.
In order to provide a WOS oriented configuration, the default image format is PNG and is automatically
generated in color. Images can be saved with or without filling, sheet geometry, machining initialization or
machining up to the current instruction.
It is also possible to generate the image size in proportion with the minimum rectangle of the geometry to
be drawn so that bland spaces are avoided. In addition, an XML document will be generated in order to
store the position of the clamps and the color of each nesting part when saving. The background in which
the images are stored can also be defined with or without background and with sheet simulation
background.
5.6.5 Save All
Save all ( ) option allows saving all the parts, taking into account all the specifications previously
made.
385
5.6.6 Save As
Save as ( ) option allows saving a part or saving the changes made to an existing part. This is
similar to the Save application except for the fact that this can be used to create a new part similar to an
existing one.
When selecting this option the system will display Part saving dialog box. The user will be able to make
the required changes and assign a new name to the part.
It is possible to generate multiple image files per part and sheet. For that purpose, it is necessary to save
the image in the corresponding database table and to indicate the file type. BMP, PNG, WMF, JPEG and
GIF formats are allowed. When parts are created from importers their images can only be 70x60 or
700x600.
Visualization type can be configured in black and white color, as well as showing the filling and the
machining.
5.6.7 Drawing
Drawing ( ) option will open the Drawing module (previously detailed) without closing Nesting and
Machining module. If the system detects changes in the machining when selecting this option, it will
prompt for saving them.
If the user does any modification in the drawing module, the system will ask to save them before going
back to the Nesting and Machining module.
5.6.8 Import Stored Nesting
By means of Import Stored Nesting ( ) option the user can load a previously saved nesting in the
active order. When selected the system will display Import stored nesting dialog box as shown below:
386
Figure 259: Import stored nesting dialog box
Perform the following steps in order to import a stored nesting:
1. Select the nesting type (Stored nesting or Nesting from database).
2. Select the nesting from the table and introduce the number of sheets to import in the quantity
column. By selecting the Load nesting data checkbox the drawing would be shown indicating
whether the nesting is done or not. The references of the parts included in the nesting, as well
as, the quantity of nested parts appear in the Parts list table. When selecting a row in this table,
the system will show the image of the selected part.
3. If the user wants the system to display only the nested parts of the selected job to be
displayed, then it will be necessary to select Only nestings with parts of the job checkbox. A list
of stored nestings or nestings from the database will be displayed containing only the parts
available in the job. Selecting this option, the user is able to select At least one or All the
387
nesting parts related to a particular job where it is possible to edit the quantities of each nesting
parts from the displayed list.
4. Select Modify the zero point of the sheet in order to modify the initial point of the nesting.
5. The following conflict situations could arise:
 Not enough parts in job: The part or parts involved in nesting appear highlighting the parts in the
table. Click OK button to import the nesting part and even the necessary parts of a job can be
imported by selecting the Add parts option. This adds to the job the necessary parts before importing.
 Not enough sheets in database: In this the nesting part is highlighted in the nesting table. Click OK
button to import the nesting part and even the necessary parts of a job can be imported by selecting
following options: Add sheets or Create sheets. If the first option is selected, the system will adds to
the database the required quantity of sheets before importing. If the Create new sheets option is
selected, the system shows, before importing the nesting, a sheet creation window with the sheet
dimensions.
 Machined: If the selected nesting is machined and the Load nesting data option is activated, the
system displays a span indicating this situation and two new options: Delete existing machining and
Regenerate. By selecting any of them the system performs the corresponding operation on the
selected nesting before importing it to the order. The Regenerate option includes Delete the
machining.
6. It is possible to make filters on the Nesting list by using the Criteria option. When selecting the
Navigation button provided in Criteria field the system will display Import stored nesting
[Criteria] dialog box as shown below:
388
Figure 260: Import stored nesting [Criteria]
It is possible to select the required machine, material, thickness, reference, user data, length and width of
the parts. The import stored nesting parts can be viewed by selecting the Creation date and Last
modification date from the From date and To date calendar checkbox. After entering the required
criteria’s, click OK button. Only those parts will be displayed that meet the specified criteria.
The parts lists allow indicating that the user wants to view the nestings which contain the parts of the list
in the right and with the specified quantity. The list on the left side initially shows all the parts of the job,
and, by default, it shows all the nestings that contain any of these parts and any that is not in the list.
389
5.6.9 Store Nesting
Store Nesting ( ) option allows the user to store the nesting. When selected, the following window
will be displayed:
Figure 261: Reference
5.6.10 Export Nestings to File
Export nestings to file ( ) option allows exporting the parts of the nesting to a file and the selected
files that can be exported from a database to the local directory. This option provides information about
machines, materials, sheets, products and designs to carry out the exportation. When selected, the
system will display Export nestings dialog box as shown below:
Figure 262: Export nestings dialog box
390
By means of this option, the user will be able to configure the following:
 Configuration files and machine tools: This option allows exporting files and machine tools from
the database to a specified .bck (backup) file to a local directory. If selected, the system will carry out
this option automatically.
 The current sheet: The user will be able to visualize and export the job of the current sheet to a file.
 Every sheet of the subjob: Select this option in order to export all the sheets of the subjob to the file,
 Every sheet of the job: Select this option in order to export all the sheets of the current job to a file.
 Display drawing: By means of this option the user will be able to visualize the sheet of the job, as
well as every sheet of the database. Therefore, when selecting the nesting to be exported, the user
will be able to select nestings from other jobs apart from the active job.
 Criteria: This option will be enabled once Every sheet of the job option is activated. If selected, the
user will be able to visualize all the parts that belong to the nesting and to modify details like material,
machine, thickness, reference, date, length, jobs and parts.
5.6.11 Import
5.6.11.1 Import Pending Parts of Manufacturing Orders List
Thanks to Import pending parts of manufacturing orders list ( ) option, the user can import parts
pending in manufacturing orders list. When selected, the system will display Manufacturing products
Figure 263: Manufacturing products dialog box
391
A list of parts will be displayed together with their Reference, Machine, Material, Thickness, Delivery date,
Quantity, Dimensions, Order, Customer and User data.
By clicking Criteria Navigation button, the user can create new parts by assigning the required machine,
material, thickness, reference, user data, length and width.
Select the required part from the list and click OK button in order to import it.
5.6.11.2 Import Parts from Database
Import parts from database ( ) option enables the user to import parts from the existing list or Part
list to the current manufacturing order section. When this option is selected the system will display Import
parts dialog box as shown below:
Figure 264: Import parts dialog box
This dialog box displays the list of parts available in the database and each part provides the Reference,
Quantity, Delivery date, Order and Manufacturing order.
By clicking Criteria Navigation button, the user can create new parts by assigning the required machine,
material, thickness, reference, user data, length and width among other aspects.
392
Select the required part from the list and click OK button in order to import it.
5.6.11.3 DXF Files
DXF files ( ) allows importing geometries of a DXF file. If selected, the system will display Open dialog
box, which lists all the .dxf files available. This window provides a drawing simulation located on the right
side. In addition, Configure button directs the user to Import configuration window, where all the
parameters related to importations can be configured.
Select the required .dxf file and click OK button so that the system imports it to the current job.
5.6.12 Help
In this section, the user will find useful information in Documents and Online Resources. For further
information, please refer to 3.6. Help section.
5.6.13 Print
5.6.13.1 Print
This option allows printing all the details of the required part.
The system allows calculating sums with respect to the numerical properties of cutting parts from a sheet.
These fields offer the possibility to calculate the total number of cutting parts from a sheet or the total
weight of these parts. The user can check the whole list of existing fields and their respective identifiers
as well as a small description of them in the technical help.
The image of the parts can be displayed either in color or in black and white, depending on “V080”
parameter of LantekPr.cfg configuration file.
393
Figure 265: Print
5.6.13.2 Print Preview
By means of this option the system will generate the Workshop Sheet containing the following
information:
 Sheet reference
 Order name, date and time
394
 CNC file name
 Sheet dimensions
 Nesting representation
 Machine, material, weight, height, sheet usage percentage, remnant
 Total time
 Supplier, transporter
 Part references and information
Figure 266: Print preview
The information here displayed depends on the configuration made for each machine in Work centers /
Utilities / Configure / Machines / General Properties / Boxes.
5.6.14 Configuration Options
When selecting Configuration options, the system will show the following options:
395
Figure 267: Configuration options (Nesting and Machining)
5.6.14.1 System
5.6.14.1.1 Common Cutting Parameters
There are different options to set up if the user wants to use common cut.
 Common cut: This section configures how the common cut is going to be done:
o Between two parts: When this option is selected, a new button will appear for configuring the
lead in/out values for the common cut.
o Using button the user can configure the lead outs of the auxiliary contours in common
cut.
o Between several parts: The common cut will be done between more than two parts, if
possible.
 Order by lead-in/lead-out position: When making common cuts among various parts, it is possible
to order these cuts so that the last part cut finishes in the same area where the automatic placement
of part lead-ins/lead-outs are configured. If this parameter is enabled it arranges the part cutting order
with the common cut in order to optimize the number of startups so that the part cut always finishes in
the same side or corner of the part. This option is mainly used to get an optimum position for
evacuation when part cutting is finished.
396
 Length of pre-cutting elements: If the system is cutting parts together sometimes it happens that
already cut parts should move or incline a little, which is dangerous for the head because of collision.
To avoid this kind of situations, the system allows introducing a security value that will be used so that
there are no collisions.
 It is allowed to reverse contours: If enabled, the system will reverse the contour sense of the cut if
it suits the process.
 Using button user can configure the lead in/outs of the auxiliary contours in common cut. When
selected the system will display Lead-in/Lead-out values dialog box as shown below:
will leave without cutting when using the common cut feature. This prevents situations like the figure,
where the machining starts from the smaller parts, and once they are cut, the machine cuts the small
segment between the two parts. With a small factor value, the system will leave it without cut.
 Execution mode: This option allows to choose the common-cut order that the machine will follow.
 Nesting for common cut: All the next options change the nesting process for allowing automatic
common place of the parts on the sheet. For working automatically properly, the user should
configure the same settings on nesting for common cut and on common cut, and then, use automatic
397
nesting and machining. The other way is to place the parts manually on the sheet and, if the common
cut is enabled, the user can make the automatic machining allowing the system to try to apply the
common cut to the manual nesting.
o Between two parts: The nesting will be optimized for placing parts together two by two.
o Between several parts: The system will try to use the common cut at most possible parts.
 Minimum length: The value given here is the minimum length that the contours must have to apply
the common cut.
 Only between same length elements: If enabled, the common cut will only be applied if the
common contours have the same length.
 Only place on nesting direction: If enabled, the nesting will be done optimizing the common cut
instead of lower sheet usage.
 Always respect the distance between parts: If enabled, this option makes the system test the
minimum separation between parts among certain elements when performing the common cut. This
option also tests whether the other elements not involved in the common cut respect the minimum
separation between parts. In some cases, it is more restrictive than the user might expect, since two
elements not respecting this minimum distance, prevent parts entering the common cut, when the
user had no problem in bringing these elements closer than that separation between parts.
 System compensation: The compensation can be treated by the program or by the numeric control.
When using common cut, it is possible to determine if the compensation is not going to be used, if it is
going to be used only in the main contour of the common cut parts, or in all the contours. When using
any of the system compensation modes, be sure that the machining is configured to use system
compensation: Utilities / Configure / Machines / Automatic Machining / Cut - System
compensation.
o Main contours: The compensation will be applied to the common cut main contours.
o All the contours: All the contours will use the system compensation.
 Islands: Because of the use of common cut, some holes between parts may appear. The system
provides two different treatments for them.
o No treatment: Do not apply any treatment.
o Cut the parts inside the islands first: If the island is big enough, it may contain another part
nested inside, with this enabled, the system will cut first these parts before cutting the island.
398
o Cut all the islands first: The machining will start always for cutting all the islands, and then the
part's contours.
o Cut islands when cutting the parts: If this option is enabled islands can be cut when parts are
cut. Cutting an island will not be finished until all the parts within this island are cut. The islet
will be cut as the parts generated by the islet are cut.
5.6.14.1.2 Automatic Nesting
The configuration here made will be applied when the nesting process is carried out automatically.
GENERAL
 Level of optimization: In this field the user can select any of the predefined levels of optimization
from the drop-down list provided. The system provides five predefined levels, each one with their own
set of parameters. The execution time and result of these predefined levels is balanced, that is, the
longer the execution time, the better result. Every one of the predefined levels corresponds to a
predefined Level of optimization configuration. The user can modify the configuration of any of the
existing predefined levels and save it as a user defined level of optimization. The configuration of the
existing predefined levels will not be modified.
In order to visualize the parameters of any of the predefined levels or to modify them and save them
as user customized level of optimization, it will be necessary to click on the arrow button provided
next to the drop-down list ( ). If this button is selected, the system will display Level of
optimization window. In this window the user can configure all parameters related to the level of
optimization. Between the fields provided in this window, the user will only find enabled the ones that
correspond to the user optimization and not system optimization.
399
Figure 269: Level of optimization window
o Use modules: If the user enables this parameter, the system will generate modules of two
parts in Nesting module whenever it is possible. However, the parts in question must fit
together very well so that the system considers them as a module. The system will only use
those ones that provide a good performance.
o Test starting from a different corner for each part: If the user enables this parameter, the
system will use a specific algorithm that places the parts automatically in the different corners
of the sheet. If this parameter is disabled, this is how these parts would be placed in the
sheet.
400
If this parameter is enabled, it will place each part in a different corner of the sheet, achieving
an exceptional efficiency.
o Rotate parts to maximize holes between them: As the name indicates, this parameter will
rotate in order to try creating bigger holes between them. This way, if there is any part that
may fit in the gap created, the user will be able to place more parts and therefore will get a
better efficiency.
If this parameter is disabled, parts are not being rotated and therefore the space t hat may
be formed inside is clearly not being exploited fully.
If this parameter is enabled, the system will rotate the parts, maximizing the hole between
them. This way it is possible to introduce another part inside and increase the efficiency
of the nesting.
401
o Define the number of irregular methods to apply: The bigger number specified by the user,
the more methods the system will test in order to place the parts and look for the best result.
The system will try several algorithms looking for the best sheet advantage and will use the
ones on which the space profit is best. The number of methods applied will depend on the
number of irregular methods to apply defined by user, which will consequently result in a
longer execution time. Setting a higher value ensures a better result. There are eighteen
irregular methods. The user must try with different values and check the efficiency
percentage in order to select the most suitable one. This option is useful for those cases in
which there are different parts with irregular geometries and small quantities.
o Use regularity method: This parameter adds regular methods to the previous irregular ones.
Both parameters can be enabled at the same time if required. As in the previous case, the
bigger the level selected, the more possibilities to get a better nesting. However, it adds more
testing time to the nesting. This method basically looks for part modules towards a better
sheet efficiency. This parameter is useful for those cases in which there is a big quantity of
the same part (at least to fill half the sheet).
 Level 1: The system will create column modules and apply them with basic
criteria.
 Level 2: The system will modify the column modules created initially, looking for a
better sheet advantage.
 Level 3: The system will create different column sizes. This level will suppose
more testing, therefore the automatic nesting will take more execution time.
No regularity: Without any regularity method, the nesting of the following part would be as
shown below:
402
Level 1: Once Regularity method level 1 is activated, the difference would be remarkable.
o Try to nest in horizontal and vertical: Sheets can be nested horizontally (nesting the sheets
by rows) or vertically) nesting the sheet by columns). If this parameter is activated, the
system will test both horizontally and vertically and will use the one on which the best
efficiency is reached.
o Force a specific precision: If this parameter is enabled, the system will force the precision set
in this field by the user. Whenever activated, the system will display a drop-down list with the
following options:
 Very low (fastest)
 Low
 Normal
 High
 Very high (slowest)
403
 Value: In this case, the user will be provided with a precision bar in order to set the
required value:
Figure 270: Precision bar
o Force a specific rotation angle: Whenever this parameter is enabled, the system will display
the following fields:
 Rotation angle for parts: Select between the provided options in the drop-down list
(15, 30, 45, 90 and 180).
 Search special rotation angles for the parts: If enabled, the system will execute
various tests and search for the most appropriate rotation angle for the parts, which
will result in a better efficiency.
o Force a specific type of modules: If this parameter is enabled, the arrow ( ) button located
on the right side will also become enabled. Whenever the user selects this button, the system
will display Modules window, where the user can select between the provided options, which
are divided into Simple modules, Complex modules and Special modules.
Once the user has defined the required parameters in Level of optimization window, it is possible to
save them for a later use by means of Save as… button located at the bottom of the window. The
system will display New reference window where the user will have to introduce the required name for
the level of optimization that has been defined and click OK button in order to save it.
 Maximum time to calculate the best efficiency: Here the user must introduce the maximum time
that will be taken to test the methods (that have been previously set). Remember that the time must
be introduced in seconds. During the automatic nesting execution, once the time here specified is
reached, the system will stop testing methods and will choose the best one (most efficient) found up
to that moment.
 Precision: This field allows the user setting the required exactitude or preciseness of the automatic
nesting. The user will be provided with a drop-down list with the following five options:
404
o Very low (fastest): In the case of all those elements that are not neither horizontal nor vertical,
the less precision applied, the system will apply more distance between parts.
o Low
o Normal
o High
o Very high (slowest): With more precision, the distance between parts will be closer to the
minimum distance between parts.
The higher the precision level selected, the longer it will take the system to execute the automatic
nesting.
 Allow part rotations: Depending on the shape of the part it may be very useful to rotate it in order to
get a better nesting. For example, in case of circles, it would not make any sense since their output is
the same whichever the angle the user chooses.
o Rotations: Here the user can select the rotation angle required. The drop-down list provides
the following options: 15, 30, 45, 90 and 180 degrees. For example, given the case 15
degrees is selected, the system will test placing the part on every 15 degrees position, which
will result in 24 tries.
o Search special rotation angles for the parts: Whenever this parameter is enabled, the system
will look for special angles that may be useful for the parts as well as result in a better sheet
efficiency. This parameter will test more rotation angles than in the previous case, and
therefore will result in a longer execution time.
 Separation of parts: Here the user must introduce the required value to use as separation between
parts. This separation value is intended to safeguard the quality of parts. Usually, this value is defined
by the restrictions of the machine that is being used.
 Allow different separation in Y: This parameter is aimed at those cases in which the user works
with big thicknesses. It allows setting a different separation in Y in order to avoid putting a
disadvantage (penalizing) both dimensions due to the auxiliary elements (such as lead-in/lead-outs,
loops and micro-joints).
If this parameter is disabled, the separation between parts either in X or in Y is exactly the same.
The separation between parts will correspond with the value introduced in the previous field.
405
Whenever the user enables this parameter and introduces a different value for the separation in Y
axis, after performing the automatic nesting the difference will be very obvious (as shown in the
image below).
 Allow mirroring: If this parameter is enabled, the system will place the parts in the nesting with
symmetries. However, this parameter is usually restricted by the material that is being used since the
quality is not always the same in both sides of the sheet.
 Fit every part to sheet borders: If this parameter is enabled, as the name indicates, parts will be
fitted to sheet borders. If disabled, the system will always maintain half of the separation set between
parts (based on the value given in Separation of parts field). However, this condition may be
restricted by the machine that is being used.
If this parameter is enabled, the part will adjust either to the sheet margin (in case there is any) or to
the sheet border. If it is disabled, the system will always leave half of the separation between parts
(half of the value given in Separation of parts field).
 Create equal sheets: Here the user will be able to select the required option between the three
options provided in the drop-down list: No, Yes and Ask. Given the case either Yes or Ask option is
selected, the system will check whether it is possible to generate repetitions of the current nesting
(which is already very efficient) if the existing quantity of parts and sheets so permits.
406
 Corner: Here the user will be able to select the required corner from which the system will start
placing the parts. The nesting process will start from the selected corner and continue in the opposite
direction.
ADVANCED
 Calculate modules for parts: Whenever the user activates this parameter, the system will calculate
modules of two parts always looking for the best efficiency. Once this parameter has been enabled,
the arrow button ( ) located on the right side will also become enabled. Whenever this button is
selected the system will display Modules window. Modules window displays the existing types of
modules, which are divided into three different groups: Simple modules, Complex modules and
Special modules:
407
Figure 271: Modules window
o Simple modules:
 Basic: It is formed by the same part.
 Advanced: It is formed by a basic module and other parts. Once the basic module
has been calculated, the system will fill in the holes left in the nesting with other parts.
o Complex modules:
 Multi-part: It is formed by several parts, which also tries fitting the parts together.
 Staggered: It consists in a staggered combination of the parts.
o Special modules:
 Multitorch: This type of module is specific for machinery with multitorch and will only
be displayed whenever the machine that is being configured has them.
 Nesting priority direction: Sheets can be nested horizontally (nesting the sheet by rows) or
vertically (nesting the sheets by columns). Depending on the measures of the sheet it might be more
efficient to nest in one direction or the other. This parameter provides a drop-down list and allows the
user selecting between Horizontal and Vertical.
o Horizontal: As shown in the nesting below, parts will be placed horizontally.
408
o Vertical: In this case, parts will be placed vertically.
 Rectangular mode is allowed: By means of this parameter, the system allows treating those parts
that are almost rectangular in order to improve the speed of nesting calculations. Given the case this
parameter is enabled, it would be the very first algorithm to execute whenever performing an
automatic nesting.
Once this parameter has been enabled, the arrow button ( ) located on the right side will also
become enabled. Whenever this button is selected, the system will display Rectangular nesting
setup window:
Figure 272: Rectangular nesting setup window
o Type: It provides a drop-down list where the user can select the type of rectangular nesting
between the following options:
409
 Normal: The system will treat parts as rectangles as will search for the best
combination of those rectangles (the ones that meet the Squareness percentage) in
the sheet.
 Optimize for linear cut of parts: In order to optimize linear part cutting, the user must
get the largest number of parts of the same size (both length and width) nested in
columns. This parameter aims to look for part columns with the same width and is
very useful for machines with common cut. Once this option has been selected, the
arrow ( ) button located on the right side will be enabled. If the user selects this
button, the system will display Optimize for linear cut of parts window, where it will be
possible to set the following parameters: Minimum height of the column relative to the
sheet and the Separation of parts in millimetres.
 Optimize for chain cut: In order to optimize chain cutting, nesting will be done in
columns by parts of the same length. The system will apply special bridges between
the parts so that the parts remain in the sheet until the last vertical cut is executed.
Once this option has been selected, the arrow ( ) button located on the right side
will be enabled. If the user selects this button, the system will display Optimize for
chain cut window, where the user will have to configure the following parameters:
 Minimum height of the column relative to the sheet: Here the user must introduce the
minimum height of the column by introducing a percentage. This percentage will be
applied to the sheet measures in order to calculate the value in question.
 Separation of parts: The separation of parts can be set either by the Default value,
the Cutter diameter (multiplied by a number) or a fixed Value. Remember that this
separation must be set in millimetres.
 Part time: The user will be provided with the following four options:
 Bridges automatically: If this parameter is enabled, the user can select between the
following two options:
410
 Bridge width parameter: This parameter will also be enabled. Here the user will be
able to select between The semi-separation of part, Cutter radius (multiplied by a
number) and a fixed Value. Remember that this separation must be set in millimetres.
o Squareness percentage: The user can introduce the required squareness percentage that will
be used in the system to consider parts as rectangular. If a part does not reach the
percentage set, it will not be considered as rectangular.
o Optimize remnant of the last sheet: Thanks to his parameter, parts can be placed using the
minimum X in order to generate the best remnant possible. Usually, when there is a big job
which includes more than one sheet, this optimization is applied to the last sheet of the job.
o Calculation level: This field provides a drop-down list where the user can select between 0, 1,
2 and 3.
 Minimum usable area to insert parts in apertures: Whenever the area of a hole is big enough, if
possible, the system places parts inside them. In this field, the user can introduce the minimum area
required in order to consider a hole as valid for placing parts inside.
 Nesting for kits: This parameter allows prioritizing those parts that compose kits during the
automatic nesting execution. Once this parameter has been enabled, the arrow ( ) button located
on the right side will also become enabled. Whenever this button is selected, the system will display
Nesting for kits window:
Figure 273: Nesting for kits window
411
o Mix different kits in same sheet: If this parameter is disabled, the system will wait until the
whole kit has been nested in order to start nesting the following kit. On the other hand, the
system will incorporate parts which belong to different kits in the same sheet.
o Use nestings of original kits as modules: Thanks to this parameter if a kit has already
nestings which are very efficient, given the case the measure of the existing sheets and the
number of parts allows it, the previous nestings will be used as modules.
 Part order in nesting: This parameter set how parts will be placed in the nesting. It provides a drop-
down list where the user will be able to select between the following options:
o By area: From the biggest area to the smallest area.
o By rectangular area: Based on external area.
o By perimeter: From the biggest perimeter to the smallest perimeter.
o By length: From the longest to the shortest.
 Group parts with similar order value: Whenever this parameter is enabled, the system will prioritize
those methods that introduce the highest number of big parts instead of the ones that place small
parts, regardless of their efficiency.
UNITARY
 Sheet margins: Here the user can introduce the required margins for the sheets. These margins will
ensure that the machine does not work outside the sheet as well as leaving enough material so as to
support the parts. The value must be introduced in millimeters.
 Ignore open contours: Whenever this parameter is enabled, the system will not take into account an
open contour (such as, for example, lead-ins) in order to estimate the sheet required.
412
 Create the sheet in database: If enabled, whenever creating a new sheet for the unitary nesting, the
system will introduce the sheet in question in the database and therefore, it will be displayed in the
sheets list.
 Prompt for this data: If this parameter is enabled, the system will prompt a window asking for this
data whenever automatic nesting option is selected and prior to executing it so that the user can
select the required parameters in each case.
5.6.14.1.3 Automatic Machining
Refer to 2.24 Automatic Machining section located in this manual.
5.6.14.2 Draw and Nest
5.6.14.2.1 Auxiliar
Refer to 4.5.2 Auxiliar section.
5.6.14.2.2 Do All
Refer to 4.5.3 Do All section.
5.6.14.2.3 Print
Refer to 4.5.4 Print section.
5.6.14.2.4 Colors
Refer to 4.5.5 Colors section.
5.6.14.2.5 Display
Refer to 4.5.6 Display section.
5.6.14.3 Interface
Interface option enables the user to create a new toolbar and change the existing toolbar applications
among many other options.
1. Click Interface button and the system will display Customize dialog box as shown below:
413
Figure 274: Customize Quick access
o Quick access
o Hide options
o Shortcut Keys
o Ribbon
414
 In Hide options tab the user will be able to select between Basic, Advanced and Customized
Configurations. On the other hand, in Hide options section, the options available are Current
machine, Machines of same type and All machines.
Figure 275: Customize Hide options
the applications.
415
Select an application and then introduce the key from the keyboard which the user wants to assign
as New Shortcut key for the previously selected application. Click Assign button and the selected
key will be assigned as shortcut key as well as visualized in Existing keys field. The user can also
select an existing shortcut key from the Existing keys field and click Delete button in order to remove
it.
 In Ribbon tab the user can edit the view and the items provided in the Ribbon.
416
groups.
417
group.
Warning window asking “Do you want to delete all ribbon customizations for this program?”.
operation.
5.6.15 Exit
Exit ( ) option allows abandoning the nesting and returning to the Main module. If the system
detects changes in the job, it will prompt for saving them.
5.7 HOME
5.7.1 Sheets
5.7.1.1 New
If New ( ) option is selected the system will display Sheet selection dialog box as shown below:
418
Figure 278: Sheet selection dialog box
This window displays the list of sheets applicable to the active job according to some defined viewing
criteria. Between the information displayed the user will find the length, width, quantity, reference and
required user data of the sheet, and will be able to know whether the sheet is a remnant or it is blocked.
In order to select a new sheet, double click on it or select it, click OK button, and the system will open it.
 OK button will be disabled if the number of the selected sheet is “0”.
 Add: With this button, the user can add quantities of a previously defined sheet. Just select the sheet
from the list, click the button and input the number of sheets to add.
 Remove: It removes a number of a previously defined sheet. For making this, select the sheet from
the list, click this button and input the number of sheets to subtract to the current quantity. If the
resulting quantity is 0, the system will delete the sheet from the database.
 Blocking: This option allows blocking and unblocking all the sheets of the corresponding subjob.
419
If this option is selected, the system will display a window asking if the user wants to block or unblock
the sheets from the list (all sheets will be blocked or unblocked). This functionality is similar to the
one existing in the sheets management window of the Main Module.
It is also possible to carry out this action using a shortcut: pressing Control button while clicking on
the checkbox of a sheet to change its block status. This change will be applied on the rest of the
sheets.
 Create: This option creates a new sheet using the current job´s material and thickness. When
selected, the system will display Create and modify sheets dialog box as shown below:
Figure 279: Create and modify sheets dialog box
o Reference: This is the reference for the sheet. The system will show the name given here
always in the sheets list.
o Length and width: The system needs the length and width.
o Quantity: Add the quantity of sheets to include into the database.
o Priority/Block: The system provides two parameters to configure how each sheet will be used
in the automatic process (like in Do All). The user can assign a priority to the sheet. Those
whose priority value is higher will be used the first when doing the Do all process
automatically. If the sheet has been blocked, it will not be used in automatic processes until is
unblocked again. The previous data must be filled for creating the sheet.
420
o User data (1-3): Data of the sheet. It is possible to navigate to the existing Data list and select
the required element or enter a new element. The new element will be added in the Data list
for future use. Configure this field in Expert – Jobs (CAM) / Start menu / Configuration /
Identifiers tab.
5.7.1.2 The Current Sheet
5.7.1.2.1 The Current Sheet
By means of The current sheet ( ) option, all the active jobs, subjobs and order of the jobs of the
current sheet can be removed.
5.7.1.2.2 Every Sheet of the Subjob
By means of Every sheet of the subjob ( ) option, the user can delete every sheet of the subjob that
has been created.
5.7.1.2.3 Every Sheet of the Job
By means of Every sheet of the job ( ) option, the user can delete every sheet of the job that has
been created.
5.7.1.3 Previous
With Previous ( ) option it is possible to go back to the previous sheet or remnant used in the active
job.
5.7.1.4 Next
With Next ( ) option it is possible to advance to the next sheet or remnant used in the active job.
5.7.1.5 Change Data
Change data ( ) option allows modifying the user data, margin and dimensions of the current sheet, of
all the sheets of the subjob or of all the sheets of the job. In order to do it, perform the following steps:
1. Select Change data option and the system will display the following options:
421
Figure 280: Change data options
2. Select the required option to specify which sheets to change so that the system displays
Change data dialog box as shown below:
Figure 281: Change data dialog box
3. Introduce the required Length, Width and Remnant margin as well as User data and
Description if required.
4. Click OK button in order to save the modifications and Cancel button in order to discard them.
5.7.1.6 Change Quantity
Change Quantity ( ) option displays Number of sheets dialog box as shown below:
422
Figure 282: Number of sheets dialog box
This dialog box provides the current amount of sheets and the maximum amount that can be assigned,
depending on the number of sheets left to place and the number of sheets available in stock. The user
will specify the number of equal sheets, taking into account the specified maximum limit.
If equal sheets can be done, the system will generate a CNC but will increase the times this CNC must be
done in the work sheet.
Click OK to save the changes and update the rest of the quantities.
5.7.1.7 Go to
Go to ( ) option allows going through the different sheet and remnants used in the active job. It
displays Sheet selection dialog box providing a list with all the sheets used as shown below:
423
 Display drawing: If enabled, the system will show the nesting of the selected sheet.
 New: By means of this option the user can insert a new sheet in the current job.
5.7.2 Nesting
Nesting menu includes the following options:
5.7.2.1 Do All
By means of Do all ( ) option, once a sheet has been selected and depending on the configuration
previously set on Automatic Nesting configuration, automatically performs all the jobs of the
manufacturing order. It will nest and machine all the parts of every job if the amount of sheets allows it.
424
5.7.2.2 Active Subjob
Active subjob ( ) option allows performing the nesting and machining of the active subjob. If any
sheet was previously machined, the system will allow keeping the previous machining or recording the
previous machining.
5.7.2.3 One Sheet
5.7.2.3.1 One Sheet
By means of One sheet ( ) option, once a sheet has been selected and depending on the
configuration set on the Automatic nesting section of the machine configuration, the system will insert into
the sheet as many parts as possible.
5.7.2.3.2 Redo One Sheet
By means of Redo one sheet ( ) option, it is possible to redo a nesting that was already carried out
in a sheet. In order to enable this option, it is necessary to have at least one part in the sheet.
5.7.2.4 One Window
Thanks to One window ( ) option the user can perform a nesting inside a window. The system
defines a window from its upper-left and lower-right corners, and the system will make the nesting of the
parts inside. When selecting this option the system will display the following dialog box:
425
Figure 284: One window
The way this nesting will be done depends on the configuration of the following parameters:
 Type: Select between the following options:
o All: the system will use all the parts of the job for the nesting inside the window.
o Part selection: The system will make the nesting inside the window only with the selected
part.
 Nesting method: The user will have to configure here how the nesting will be done inside the
window:
o Rectangular
o True shape
 First point: When creating the window, the system needs two points (upper-left and lower-right
corners). Depending on the option here selected, the first point could be:
o Picked point
o Corner of the sheet
o Corner of the nesting
426
5.7.2.5 Unitary
By means of Unitary ( ) option, the system can create automatically sheet with the length of the part’s
exterior rectangle. When selected, the part list will be displayed and once one is selected, the sheet will
be automatically created with the part nested inside.
5.7.2.6 Delete
5.7.2.6.1 Delete
Delete ( ) option allows deleting parts nested on a sheet. In order to do it, the user will only have to
select the parts required to remove by means of the options provided in Selection toolbar and click
Accept button.
5.7.2.6.2 Delete Every Part
Delete every part ( ) option allows removing all the parts from the current sheet, from all sheets of the
subjob or from all sheets of the job, without removing the sheets. In order to do it, select the required
option between:
 The current sheet
 Every sheet of the subjob
 Every sheet of the job
Once selected click OK button in order to delete the parts of the selected option.
By means of Semi-automatic ( ) option, once the user has selected the job sheet, it is possible to
make the automatic nesting part by part every time this option is executed. With this method, the user can
follow the automatic nesting process enabling a better interaction with the parts placement.
427
5.7.2.8 Place
Place ( ) option works like semi-automatic option, except for the fact that the user can select which
part to nest into the sheet. Once the sheet has been selected, the user will have to execute the option
from the menu o click Place button and then select the part to nest from the Part list provided.
5.7.2.9 Grid
Grid ( ) option allows selecting the most similar sheet to the part size and placing it on the sheet.
5.7.3 Transform
5.7.3.1 Collisions
Collisions ( ) option enables and disables the part collision control for manual nesting. If activated,
the user will not be able to nest a part that overlaps an already nested one. The system will respect the
distance between parts in semiautomatic or manual nesting operations. Although the user tries to place
one part inside other, the system will move it until the correct distance.
Figure 285: Collisions example
Disabling Collisions control may be useful in cases like when the system does not place the part
automatically because it does not fit in the sheet due to the sheet margins.
5.7.3.2 Copy
Copy ( ) option allows the user to copy a group of nested parts in a nesting. In order to do it perform
1. Select Copy option located in Transform menu and the system will display Selection toolbar.
428
2. Select the required parts to be copied by means of the options provided and click Accept
button.
3. The system will display Selection options dialog box where the user will have to select the
desired part. When clicking Accept button, Drag options will be displayed so as to move and
copy this part.
5.7.3.3 Advance Copy

Advance copy ( ) option facilitates the copy of the parts of a sheet. The user will only have to select
the required parts to copy, and once the selection has been executed, it will be possible to start copying.
In the case of working without collisions, the system will ask for a point in order to reference the selected
parts.
Figure 286: Copies dialog box
 Window: The copies of the selected parts will be place in a user-defined window. If selected, the
following parameters will be activated:
 Visualize: When drawing the rectangle, the system will show the possible result in every moment if
this option is enabled.
 Horizontal and vertical separation: These are the separation between parts that will be used when
making the copies. The meaning of these values will change depending on the parameter.
429
 Copy by rectangles: Enabled, the distances will be the separation between the minimal rectangles
of the parts.
 Copy with the part technology on sheet: Using this option, the copies will be made including the
applied technology to the original parts (leads, micro joints, etc.).
 Copy with the part machining on sheet: If this has been enabled, the copies will be made including
the machining.
 Multiple: After selecting the parts to copy the user should point with the mouse where to place the
copies or input the coordinates.
 Grid: The user can make copies of the selected parts in a grid disposition starting from the initial part
position, going in the copy direction and making the horizontal and vertical specified copies (limited by
the number of available parts.).
If the Horizontal and Vertical copies value is 0, the system will insert as many parts as possible until
arriving to the sheet limits and there are available parts.
 Multitorch: If the machine has been configured as multitorch, this option will be enabled. The system
will try to make copies using the maximum number of torches possible. The user will have to select
between the two copy directions available:
5.7.3.4 Place Near
From Place near ( ) option the user can access to different manual nesting possibilities which allow
attaching a part to a group of parts with other parts in a specific way. When selected the system will
430
Figure 287: Place near options
: This option attaches the source and target elements in parallel mode. The system will ask
for the distance between the initial and final elements.
: This option attaches the source and the target elements in perpendicular mode. The system
will prompt for the distance between both elements.
: This option is a generalization of the two previous ones. It allows attaching source to a target
element but not only with parallel or perpendicular motion. It literally attaches the top-bottom or right-
left area of the source elements to the top-bottom or right-left area of the target element. When the
user selects the initial and final elements, it is also very important to click the required side of the
geometry. The system will prompt for the distance.
: By means of this option the user can attach two parts, in case of from the sides, it will take
into account the clicked points. In this case, the system will not only get the sides, it will use the
clicked points and the distance given by the user in order to move the parts.
: This option allows attaching a circular element to two target elements that are perpendicular.
This can be done establishing the initial and final element. The user will have to select the required
parts, the tangent element and introduce the distance value.
431
: This option attaches the imaginary lower-left vertex of the minimum rectangle of the part to a
defined point. The user will have to select the parts required to lean and the destination point.
5.7.3.5 Move
Move ( ) option allows moving and rotating a group of parts previously nested in a sheet. In order to
move a group of parts perform the following steps:
1. Select Move option located in Transform menu and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the required group of parts by means of the options provided and click Accept button.
3. Select the Reference point by means of the Moving options provided by the system.
4. Select the Insertion point using the mouse and the Dragging options and click Accept button
one more time. The group of parts will be successfully moved.
5.7.3.6 Fit
Fit ( ) option adjusts a nesting to one of the sides of a sheet. The user must select the side of the
sheet where the adjusting will take place by clicking with the mouse near to the required side. The nesting
will be automatically adjusted to the selected side.
5.7.3.7 Margins
Margins ( ) option allows temporarily deactivating the use of sheet margins when the user makes a
manual nesting of parts. This utility can be useful in case the nesting is better when exceeding the
established margins.
If the user deactivates the use of margins, these margins will disappear and the user will be able to nest
parts exceeding them. When the use of margins is activated again, the system will use the values that
were configured before in the current sheet.
 The user is responsible to make sure that the sheet can be cut without any problem when
exceeding margins.
432
The use of margins will always be active by default and its deactivation will be temporary: it will not
be saved with the sheet and it will be automatically active when changing sheet or subjob. Besides, it will
be automatically reactivated when making an automatic nesting. The use of margins will always be active
when accessing the Nesting and Machining module.
5.7.4 Remnants
5.7.4.1 Create Remnant
Create remnant ( ) option generates remnants automatically depending on the configuration

previously made on the machine’s sheet remnant configuration section.
5.7.4.2 Delete
Delete ( ) option allows deleting the remnants generated in a sheet. In order to do it, the user must
select the remnants required to erase by means of Selection toolbar and click Accept button.
5.7.4.3 Configure
Configure ( ) option the user can configure the parameters of a machine’s Remnant data section.
When the machining of a sheet only takes up a small part of the total area (which normally happens with
the last sheet of a nest) sometimes there is a piece of the sheet the user is interested in keeping for future
use, which is referred as a remnant. The system can automatically generate these remnants and manage
them in the database. When selecting Configure option the system will display Sheet Remnants dialog
box as shown below:
433
Figure 288: Sheet Remnants dialog box
 Generate remnants when you save: Enabling this function, the system will automatically generate a
remnant for the current sheet when saving. There are two ways to generate a remnant. The first one
is to use the original sheet taking away the machined areas. The second method adds one or more
cut lines creating remnants for the remaining areas.
 Generate remnants with the completed sheets: The system will keep on the database the whole
sheet after cutting the parts. Sometimes this is useful if the sheet has been machined with a few parts
and is better not to cut it for remnants. The user can get this sheet for nesting and machining more
parts taking advantage of the remaining space of the sheet.
 Create the cutting line of the remnant automatically: This function allows generating remnants
following the options shown in the bitmaps. Each option will generate different number of remnants
with different remnant shapes as well.
Figure 289: Cutting line types
434
Regarding the remnant shape, the system decides what kind of remnant will create depending on the
area value.
All the shapes and cutting lines depend on the values of the offset between the parts and the lines, the
minimum width of hollows and the minimum area of the remnant.
 Minimum X and Minimum Y: The system will not create a smaller remnant than the configure values
for X and Y. If the remnant is smaller, the system will use these values to create the remnant. This
option is only valid for the 6 firsts options on the menu.
 Offset between the parts and the line: This value will determine the distance between the
remnant's cutting line and every part nested on the sheet.
 Minimum width: The value of this parameter is the minimum allowed for using a little space of the
sheet which is between parts in the limit of the remnant's cutting line.
 Round the remnant line and Radius: With this option the user can round the remnant line
automatically when it is generated. The first parameter allows to active this option and the second
one asks the value for the round radius. This option is also available for combined machines.
 Delete the remnant area around parts: With this parameter disabled, the system will use as
remnant any area of the sheet including those which are inside parts like holes. If the user doesn't
want to use these areas, this parameter must be enabled.
 Minimum area of remnants: The value of this parameter is going to be used to generate remnants
always bigger that the given square meters.
 Consider the auxiliar geometry: If this check is deactivated remnants will be generated without
considering auxiliary geometry. On the other hand, if it is activated remnants will be generated taking
into account auxiliary geometry. This option is configurable so it creates a contour on auxiliary
rectangular geometry so that:
o 0: The base has a value 10 times linear tolerance.
o Cutter diameter: The base has this value.
 Remnants can be rotated: The remnant will be generated as configured, but with this parameter
enabled, the system will look for the best position of the remnant for placing the cutting head (from-
point) of the machine into the sheet.
435
 Prompt for references when generating remnants: The system generates a reference
automatically for each remnant. But if this checkbox is enabled, at the moment of generating a new
remnant from the sheet, the system will ask for the reference.
5.7.4.4 Draw the Edge
Draw the edge ( ) option allows drawing a polylines using dots and arcs in order to limit the remnant.
The polylines must start and finish in the external area of the sheet so that the remnant is valid. It must
also meet some requirements such as minimum area and not trespassing the cutting margins of the
parts. In order to draw the edge, perform the following steps:
1. Select Draw the edge option located in Remnants menu and the system will display Remnant
line drawing options as shown below:
Figure 290: Remnant line drawing options
2. Define it as a dot, as an arc or as a dynamic remnant line.
3. Given the case the remnant line is defined by dots or arcs, follow the instructions given in the
status bar.
4. If Dynamic remnant line option is selected, the system will display Sheet Remnants window,
where the user will have to introduce the following values:
436
Figure 291: Sheet remnants dialog box
 Offset in the parts: It is the minimum distance between the cut and the parts.
 Offset in the edge of the sheet: It configures the distance between the cut and the edge of the
sheet.
 Cut in holes: This checkbox will determine if the holes are going to be cut or not.
 Horizontal
 Vertical
5. Click Finish option so that the system considers the created line as valid.
5.7.4.5 Draw the Exact Edge
Draw the exact edge ( ) option enables the user creating a remnant line between parts in
semiautomatic. The remnant is created drawing manually cutting lines between the gaps created when
cutting the parts.
The first and last point of the remnant must be placed out of the sheet. In each part there must be two
points defined, the entry point and exist point.
5.7.4.6 Automatic Edge
Automatic edge ( ) option creates the cutting line of the remnant automatically depending on the
configuration previously set on the machine’s sheet remnant configuration section.
437
5.7.4.7 Delete the Edge
Delete the edge ( ) option removes all remnant lines generated in the sheets, if they are not machined.
If the remnant has already been generated, the correct option to delete it is Delete Remnant.
5.7.4.8 Remnant Reference
Remnant reference ( ) option allows defining the reference points of the remnant to place on the
machine.
5.7.4.9 Rotate Remnants
Rotate remnants ( ) option allows flipping a remnant in X or Y axis or rotating it in a defined angle,
which must be multiple of 90º. When selected the system will display Rotate remnants dialog box as
shown below:
Figure 292: Rotate remnants dialog box
Select the Rotation type and click OK button.
 In order to be able to execute this action, the sheet must be a remnant and it cannot contain
geometry, otherwise the option will be disabled.
438
5.7.5 Review
5.7.5.1 Time and Cost
When selecting Time and cost ( ) option the system will display the dialog box shown below where
the user will be able to visualize the following data:
Figure 293: Machine Time and Cost
The user will be provided with the Machine hourly rate, Employee hourly rate, Total time and Cost of
material between other information. The user will get the Cost of material, Cost of machine time,
Employee cost, Cost of consumables and Total cost of the Markup, Sheet, Remnant and Scrap. The
provided quantity and manufactured quantity of each part will be provided together with the time required.
The system will also provide the sheet reference along with its length, width, quantity and CNC. The user
will be able to visualize a drawing of the sheet by activating the check provided.
439
Between the options available the user will be able to print the part, sheet, part list and sheet list as well
as being able to Create a quotation.
5.7.5.2 Export Data
Export Data ( ) option allows exporting information from the system to an Excel document. The
information that the user can export is the one related to the time and cost calculation of the nestings and
parts of the current job. This option is protected.
The user will select the template that will be used to export the data, and will define the data to export as
well as an Excel document that will work as a template to define where and how the data will be exported.
When executing the option the Excel document that works as template will be copied on a directory and
name specified by the user, and the information will be exported on this document copy. By default, the
name will be the one of the current job. If the file already exists in this directory of the system, the system
will ask whether the user wants to overwrite it or not.
 Information related to all the parts and nestings or just the one related to the subjob or the current
sheet can be exported.
At the end of the option execution, an Excel program will be displayed to visualize or modify the
generated document.
Figure 294: Export Data dialog box
440
Figure 295: Excel document example
Figure 296: Excel document example 2
441
5.7.5.2.1 Templates Creation
Apart from the templates defined in the installation (Directory Reports\Export), it is possible to create
customized templates by the user.
In order to do that, the user has to carry out the following steps:
1. Create an Excel file where the design, the format and the formulas the user wants to apply when
exporting information are specified.
2. Create a XML file (cfgx extension) where the information the user wants to export, the spreadsheet
and the cell where each data will be exported are defined.
The information that can be exported is the same as the data used by the user when it is defined the
workshop sheet in the nesting printing (Technical documentation: Printing parts and nestings in
boxes).
3. To be able to use the new template it is required to include the references in the following XML
where the template, ExpExcel.cfgx. This new template is placed in the installation folder in
Reports/Export.
5.7.5.3 Access to Points
Access to Points ( ) menu helps the user selecting the particular point required. When selected the
system will display the following drop-down list providing the options detailed below:
442
Figure 297: Points options
443
 Default snap mode: Go back to the previous snap mode.
5.7.5.4 View Geometry
View Geometry ( ) option visualizes the measurements of the geometry. The system will display
Selection options toolbar in order to select the required geometry. Once selected click Accept button and
View geometry dialog box will be displayed as shown below:
Figure 298: View geometry dialog box
The dialog box provides the Type of geometry, Point o-ordinates, Number of segments, Number of
circles, Number of arcs, Number of lines, Number of points and Total of segments all of them together
with their Perimeter value. The user will also be able to print all these data by means of Print button.
5.7.5.5 Distances & Angle
Distances & Angle ( ) button allows visualizing the distance and angle measurements between two
selected points as follows:
1. Click Distances and Angles button and then mark the first point.
444
2. Move the cursor till the desired point and mark the second point. The system will display
Distance and Angle dialog box:
Figure 299: Distance and angle dialog box
o D: The distance between the two marked points. It is not possible to edit this field.
o X: The horizontal distance between the two marked points. It is not possible to edit this field.
o Y: The vertical distance between the two marked points. It is not possible to edit this field.
o W: The angle at which the second point is marked with respect to the X. It is not possible to
edit this field.
4. Click OK to close the dialog box.
5.7.5.6 Angle Between Three Points
Angle between three points ( ) button allows the user to view the angles of three points as
follows:
1. Click Angle between three points button and then mark the first point.
2. Move the cursor till the desired points and mark the second and third points. The system will
display Angle between three points dialog box as shown below:
445
Figure 300: Angle between three points dialog box
3. It is possible to view the interior angle of the three points in ‘a1’ field and the exterior angle of
the three points in ‘a2’ field.
4. Select Cancel button in order to close the dialog box.
5.7.6 Orthogonal
5.7.6.1 Orthogonal
Orthogonal ( ) option draws vertical and horizontal geometries by means of the Dragging toolbar.
This application is active until clicking this again to disable it.
 Press F2 button in order to enable or disable this option.
5.7.7 Macros
Macros ( ) option enables the creation, deletion and execution of application macros. A macro is an
option that enables the sequential execution of several options of the system. This option is available in
Drawing and Nesting and Machining modules. The created macros will only be useful for the module in
which they have been created. Macros option contains a drop-down list that displays the existing macros
of the system plus the following two options:
446
 Macro creation: Click Record a macro and all the options clicked afterwards will form part of the
macro. The order will be defined during the options selection. To stop recording click Stop recording
or press Escape.
 Macro edition: Click Macro and the system will display a window that shows the existing list of
macros with the options corresponding to each. A macro can be created, deleted or executed from
this window.
 Macro execution: In order to execute a Macro lick Macro drop-down list and select Macro or execute
from edition window. It is possible to add buttons to the options ribbon or quick access bars. When
executing a macro:
o By pressing ESC, the option in execution will stop and the next will be executed.
o By executing another option macro execution will stop.
o By pressing Return when the macro finishes, it will be executed again.
5.8 TECHNOLOGY
5.8.1.1 Automatic
Automatic ( ) option places a Lead-in/Lead-out automatically in the part.
Figure 301: Automatic Lead-in/lead-outs example
447
5.8.1.2 Delete
Delete ( ) option deletes the Lead-in/Lead-outs by selection. In order to do it perform the following
steps:
1. Click Delete option and the system will display Selection Toolbar.
2. Select the required lead-in/lead-out to delete by means of the options provided and click
3. The selected lead-in/lead-out will be deleted.
Semi-automatic ( ) option places a Lead-in/Lead-out semiautomatically in the part. When selected the
system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 302: Semi-automatic Lead-in/Lead-out
Select the required option and click OK button in order to place the lead-in/lead-outs in the selected parts.
Configure automatic ( ) option configures the parameters of the automatic Lead-in/Lead-outs. The
system will show Automatic Lead-in/Lead-out values dialog box:
448
Figure 303: Automatic Lead-in/Lead-out values dialog box
The position of the lead, the type of leads to use depending on the different contours and all the
distances must be configured. Find the different fields provided in the previous dialog box briefly
described below:
different values for the lead-in/lead-out when using the automatic assignation. If enabled, the window
will show twelve tabs which are related to each of the twelve available cutting qualities.
 Zone: When using automatic leads, the user can choose the place where the system will try first for
placing the lead. It is possible to select different position for exterior contours of parts and for holes.
449
There are different kinds of contours which system can distinguish. In the following table, there are
two examples for each contour type. All the geometries on red color are those on which the selected
lead-in/out type will be applied:
Figure 304: Contour types
450
 Modify: By means of this option the user can assign a different lead-in/lead-out for each contour type.
The first type will not assign any lead-in/lead-out to the contour. When selected the system will
display Lead-in/lead-out values dialog box as shown below, where the user will have to specify some
particular dimension values per each lead-in/lead-out.
 Piercing radius: This option allows the user to define the piercing radius depending on quality,
thickness, and material. The new radii will replace all the previous piercing radii. These values can be
defined depending on the default piercing radius, as a percentage of it, or as an absolute value.
When one of those values changes, the other value will be updated.
 Lead-in and lead-out minimum length: It is used when the Overlapping test parameter is enabled
with the Shorten option. It defines the minimum length that a lead-in or lead-out can have when one
of them is shortened due to the overlapping.
 Constraints: This describes about the basic parameters/constraints for all the elements of lead-in
and lead-out that are to be placed. When selected the system will display Automatic Lead-in/Lead-out
451
Figure 306: Automatic Lead-in/Lead-out dialog box
Introduce the required data and click OK button.
 Change position in sheet: This option allows the user to change the position of the lead-in or lead-
out in the sheet. There are three options: No, Along the cutting sequence, and Avoiding the oxycut
effect.
 Along the cutting sequence: The leads-in/leads-out is modified by selecting this option. They are
placed in the nearest hole in order to avoid them. At the same time it is also possible to select only for
inside or only for inside and outside option.
 Avoid the oxycut effect: It works as the interrogation mark option. This option places the lead-
ins/leads-out to avoid the warming heating of sheet.
 Overlapping test: It is possible to configure checking the overlaps in the automatic lead-ins. This test
will take into account if there will be a pre-punching or a cycle in order to know if the lead-in is
overlapped or not. In case of overlapping, the system will perform the action previously selected
between the following:
o Shorten: The lead-in/lead-out geometry will be shorten trying to avoid the overlapping. The
value is the maximum shortening allowed.
o Change position: The lead-in/lead-out will be placed in other position, and system will try as
different positions as the number given on Number of attempts.
o Change position and shorten: This solution is a combination of the previous. The system will
try on each position to short the lead-in/lead-out geometries and if this not solved the
overlapping, will change the position.
452
o Change quality: In this case, system will try changing the cutting quality of the lead-in/lead-
out. With this, the configuration for lead-in/lead-out will change getting the values configured
of the new cutting quality.
o Change position and quality: On each position, the system is going to try to change the
cutting quality of the lead-in/lead-out, and if not, change position as many times as specified
attempts.
o Change position, quality and shorten: For each position, the system will try changing the
cutting quality, and shorten the lead-in/lead-out on each position, and if the problem persists,
change position as many times as the value given.
o Change quality and shorten: First, the quality will be changed and if still there are overlaps,
the lead-in/lead-out geometries will be shortened.
 Copy: Because there are 12 possible cutting qualities, the same parameters must be configured
many times. To make the data entry easier, system provides this button which permits to copy the
automatic lead-in/lead-out configuration from existing cutting quality values.
5.8.1.5 Lead-in/Lead-outs
By means of the following options the user can introduce different lead-in/lead-outs to the parts.
Depending on the Lead-in/lead-out type selected the user will have to introduce different data, given that
the dimensions of each type are different.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 1 ( ): Perpendicular Lead-in/Lead-outs.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 2 ( ): Perpendicular Lead-in and inclined Lead-out.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 3 ( ): Perpendicular Lead-in and tangential Lead-out.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 4 ( ): Inclined Lead-in and perpendicular Lead-out.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 5 ( ): Inclined Lead-in/Lead-outs.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 6 ( ): Inclined Lead-in and tangential Lead-out.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 7 ( ): Tangential Lead-in and perpendicular Lead-out.
453
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 8 ( ): Tangential Lead-in and inclined Lead-out.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 9 ( ): Tangential Lead-in and Lead-outs.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 10 ( ): Straight Lead-in/Lead-out on outer corner.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 11 ( ): Tangential Lead-in/Lead-out with beginning and end path.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 12 ( ): Tangential Lead-in/Lead-out with beginning and end parallel path.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 13 ( ): Straight Lead-in/Lead-out on inner corner.
 Lead-in/Lead-outs 14 ( ): Special Lead-in/Lead-outs for circular holes.
 Dynamic Lead-in/Lead-outs ( ): Lead-in/Lead-outs by rubber band.
 Put the Lead-in/Lead-outs in bisector ( ): It puts the Lead-in/Lead-outs in bisector.
 Configuration ( ): It configures the parameters of the Lead-in/lead-outs. The system will show
Lead-in/Lead-out values dialog box:
454
1. Here the user will be able to modify the provided parameters as per your requirements and set
them by means of OK button located at the bottom of the window.
 Move point of lead-in or lead-out ( ): It allows moving the point of a Lead-in or Lead-out.
 Put the lead-out like the lead-in ( ): It puts the Lead-out in the direction of the Lead-in.
 Modify tangent arc lead-in by 2 segments ( ): It modifies the tangent arc Lead-in by two
segments.
 Add element ( ): It adds an element to the Lead-in or Lead-out. The system will display Add
element to Lead-in/Lead-out dialog box as shown below:
Figure 308: Add element to Lead-in/Lead-out dialog box
Here the user will have to select which element or elements to include as well as the direction and
length. Introduce the required data and click OK button in order to save the changes and introduce
the new elements.
5.8.2 Micro-Joints
5.8.2.1 Automatic
Automatic ( ) option inserts micro-joints automatically in the nesting.
455
5.8.2.2 Delete
Delete ( ) option deletes the selected micro-joints from the nesting. In order to do it perform the
following steps:
1. Click Delete option and the system will display Selection Toolbar.
2. Select the required micro-joint(s) to delete by means of the options provided and click Accept
button located in the same toolbar.
3. The selected micro-joints will be deleted.
Semi-automatic ( ) option places micro-joints semiautomatically by selecting the required parts of the
nesting. In order to do it perform the following steps:
1. Select Semi-automatic option.
2. Select the required micro-joint.
3. Place manually with the mouse the required micro-joints in the parts.
Configure automatic ( ) option configures the parameters of the automatic micro-joints. The system
will display Automatic Micro-joints values dialog box as shown below:
456
Figure 309: Automatic micro-joint values dialog box
 Micro-joint types: These are all the micro-joints the system supports automatically. For each one,
there are some parameters to configure as shown on the graphs. Enter D, A, S, and Radius
parameters for lead-ins and lead-outs.
 Circles angle: This value is used for system to test positions for placing micro-joints. The meaning is
the angle step the system will use for placing the micro-joints near the clicked point. For example, if
the value is 90, the system will try first the clicked point for placing micro-joint, then 0, 90, 180, 270
degrees position from the first point.
 Distance between micro-joints: This is the minimum distance, the system will not allow to place one
micro-joint at a distance lower than this value.
 Minimum and maximum number of micro-joints for each contour: Using this option, if the
contour has a very big perimeter and the maximum number of micro-joints has been added, the
system will distribute the micro joints halfway (without taking care to the minimum separation).
457
If the contour is small and the micro joints are too close, the system will redefine them and will locate
them halfway on the contour. These parameters may affect to machine general configuration and
material-thickness dependent data.
5.8.2.5 Available Micro-joints
The available micro-joints are the following:
 Micro-Joints 1: It introduces an inclined micro-joint on corner.
 Micro-Joints 2: It introduces a perpendicular micro-joint on corner.
 Micro-Joints 3: It introduces a perpendicular micro-joint.
 Micro-Joints 4: It introduces an inclined micro-joint.
 Micro-Joints 5: It introduces an inclined micro-joint on the right side.
 Micro-Joints 6: It introduces an inclined micro-joint on the left side.
5.8.2.6 Move Point of Lead-in or Lead-out
Move point of lead-in or lead-out ( ) option allows moving the point of a micro joint. In order to do it
1. Click Move point of micro-joint button and select the lead-in/lead-out required to change.
2. Move the cursor till the desired point and mark it.
3. The new point of the lead-in/lead-out will be places at the selected point.
5.8.2.7 Transform to Geometry
Transform to geometry ( ) option converts the selected micro-joints to geometry by means of the
selection bar. Perform the following steps:
1. Click Transform to geometry button and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the required micro-joint to convert by means of the options provided and click Accept
button.
3. The selected micro-joints will be converted to geometry.

458
5.8.2.8 Configure
Configure ( ) option configures the parameters of the micro-joints. The system will display Micro-joints
Values dialog box:
Figure 310: Micro-joints values dialog box
Introduce the required values in the fields provided and click OK button to save the changes.
5.8.3 Loops
5.8.3.1 Delete
Delete ( ) option deletes loops by selection. The system will display Selection toolbar in order to
select the loop required to erase. Select it by means of the options provided and click Accept button so
that it is deleted.
Semi-automatic ( ) option introduces loops semiautomatically in the parts. Select the point(s) where
the loop is required and the system will display the following dialog box:
459
Figure 311: Semi-automatic loops
Select between the options given and click OK button, so that the system introduces the loop in the
selected points of the parts.
5.8.3.3 Loop 1
Loop 1 ( ) option introduces straight loops in the selected parts. Click this option and select a corner in
order to introduce loops to a closed geometry with sides.
5.8.3.4 Loop 2
Loop 2 ( ) option introduces circular loops in the selected parts. Click this option and then select a
corner in order to introduce a curved loop to a closed geometry with sides.
Configuration ( ) option configures the parameters of the loops. The system will display the following
window:
460
Figure 312: Loop values dialog box
Introduce the required value for each type of loop and click OK button to save the information.
5.8.4 Bridges
5.8.4.1 Automatic
Automatic ( ) option places bridges automatically on the nesting. Bridges will be of the previously
selected type. The parameters that will be used are configured on the Bridge values section of the
machine configuration.
5.8.4.2 Delete
Delete ( ) option deletes the selected bridges of the nesting. The system will display Selection
options in order to select the bridges required to erase. Once selected click Accept button located in the
same toolbar and the bridges will be deleted.
461
Semi-automatic ( ) option places bridges automatically on the selected parts of the nesting. It allows
connecting the selected parts on the sheet as follows:
1. Select Semi-automatic option and click the parts on the sheets required to join.
2. Right click on the selected parts to join them with a bridge.
5.8.4.4 Bridge 1
Bridge 1 ( ) option introduces a negative bridge. It defines a bridge in such a way that the machined
part is completely cut. The area of the part where the bridge is defined is machined twice which is a
drawback. Select this option and click the parts required to join, and the system will introduce the bridge.
5.8.4.5 Bridge 2
Bridge 2 ( ) option introduces a positive bridge, which keeps the two parts joined after the machining.
Select this option and click the parts required to join, and the system will introduce the bridge.
5.8.4.6 Configure
Configure ( ) configures the parameters of the bridges. The system will show Bridge Values dialog
box:
462
Figure 313: Bridge values dialog box
 a distance: This is the length of the bridge between parts.
 Maximum length: This value is the maximum distance allowed to create a bridge between contours.
 On corners: The bridges will be applied on the parts corners. In the example provided below there
are bridges on corners that allow making all the machining without raising the head:
463
Figure 314: Bridges on corners example
 Bridge type: There are two possibilities, free and orthogonal. The last one will force the bridge to be
always with straight lines although the clicked coordinates are not orthogonal between them:
Figure 315: Bridge types
Introduce the required values and click OK button in order to save the changes.
5.8.5 Cut Technology
5.8.5.1 Delete
This option deletes an assigned cut technology as follows:
1. Click Delete ( ) button and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the assigned cut technology required to delete by means of the options provided and
click Accept button provided in the same toolbar.
3. The cut technology assigned to the selected element will be erased.
464
5.8.5.2 Type of Cut
Type of cut ( ) option allows the user to introduce different technologies to cut a part. When pointed,
the system will display the following dialog box providing the different types of cut technologies that can
be assigned:
Figure 316: Type of cut
The user will be able to select between Oxicut, Plasma, High definition plasma, Laser and Water. Once
selected click OK button in order to apply it.
5.8.5.3 Marking
This option assigns marking technology to a part as follows:
1. Select Marking ( ) option and the system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 317: Marking technology
2. Click on the drop-down list provided in Technology field, select between Powder, Drill, Pen or
Cut and click OK button.
465
Figure 318: Marking technology, Make on
4. Select the required option and click OK button.
5. The selected marking technology will be assigned to the selected element(s).
5.8.5.4 Cutting
This option assigns cutting technology of a specified quality to a part as follows:
1. Select Cutting ( ) button and the system will display the following dialog box:
Figure 319: Cutting qualities
2. Select the required type of Cutting quality.
466
3. When selecting Modify button the system will display Tables of technology dialog box. Here
the user will be able to include, modify or delete the material, thickness and other details. Click
OK button in order to save the changes.
4. The system will display a dialog box where the user will have to select where to apply the
changes.
5. Select the required option and click OK button.
6. The cutting technology of the specified quality will be assigned to the selected geometry
extension.
5.8.5.5 No Cut
In order to assign No Cut technology to a required geometry, perform the following steps:
1. Click No Cut ( ) button and the system will display Selection options toolbar.
2. Select the extension to which the user wants to apply No cut by means of the options provided
and click Accept button in order to apply it.
3. Right double-click or select Finish option located in the same toolbar in order to finish the
execution of the option.
5.9 MACHINING
5.9.1 Machining
5.9.1.1 Machine All
5.9.1.1.1 Machine All
Machine all ( ) option allows machining automatically all the nested parts of all the sub-jobs as
follows:
1. Click Machine All option and the system will display the following dialog box:
467
Figure 320: Existent machining management
2. Select the required machining management type between the Existing machining management
options:
o Select Keep the machining to retain the machining for the existing machined parts and
machine only those parts that are not machined.
o Select Remake the machining to machine all the parts of all the subjobs including the existing
machined parts.
3. The system will display Machining initialization dialog box and set the required initialization
parameters and click Finish. The parts on all the sheets of all the subjobs will be machined.
5.9.1.1.2 Machine Active Subjob
Machine Active Subjob ( ) allows the user machining automatically all the nested parts on the sheets
of a selected subjob as follows:
1. Click Machine Active subjob option and the system will display Existent machining
management dialog box, as in the previous option.
2. Select the required machining management type between the Existing machining management
options:
o Select Keep the machining to retain the machining for the existing machined parts and
machine only those parts that are not machined.
o Select Remake the machining to machine all the parts of all the subjobs including the existing
machined parts.
468
3. The system will display Machining initialization dialog box and set the required initialization
parameters and click Finish. The parts on all the sheets of the active subjob will be machined.
5.9.1.2 Automatic
By means of Automatic ( ) option the part will be automatically machined. The machining will be
carried out depending of the options previously configured in Automatic Machining section of the Machine
configuration.
5.9.1.3 Copy Machining of a Part
 Insert label begin ( ): With this option the user can place a begin label in the desired machining
position.
 Insert label end ( ): With this option the user can place an end label in the desired machining
position.
 Copy machining of a part ( ): With this option the system will copy the machining of the selected
part (if any) to the desired parts. Select a part and the system will display Copy machining dialog box
as shown below:
Figure 321: Copy machining dialog box
o Make on: The selection of this parameter determines in which positions of the clicked part will
be copied the machining: on The selected part, Identical parts with the same angle, or All
identical parts (no matter if they are rotated or not).
469
o Retain the existing machining: Enabled, the system will leave already machined contours of
the parts. It will just copy the machining of the contours that were not machined when the
option has been selected.
 Copy machining of a set of parts ( ): This option will copy more than one part's machining. For
example, if there are two manually machined parts, the user can copy the machining of them into the
others parts:
Figure 322: Copy machining of a set of parts example
As with the previous option, the user can keep the existing machining if required.
5.9.1.4 Regenerate
Regenerate ( ) option erases all the machining of the parts including the technology geometries:
leads, microjoints, loops, bridges, etc. But the nesting will be kept allowing to start the machining from the
beginning again. The system will display the following warning message:
Figure 323: Regenerate warning message
Select Yes button in order to Regenerate and No button to cancel the operation.
470
5.9.1.5 Delete Instructions
In order to erase the desired machining instructions perform the following steps:
1. Select Delete Instructions ( ) button located in Machining menu.
2. Select between the following options:
o Current instruction
o Machining by selection
o Machining by selection of geometry
o Machining of selected parts
o From-to
o All machining
o Configuration
3. Select the required option and click OK in order to delete the instructions.
5.9.1.6 Initialize
Initialize ( ) option, as the name indicates, initializes the machining. This operation must always be
done before doing any machining operation. The system will perform several operations which make
possible starting the use of the machine:
 Apply the settings configured on machine´s startup configuration.
 Place the clamps as configured on machine´s sheet clamps configuration.
 Initialize the work zone as set up on machine´s work zone configuration.
 Initialize the from-point as configured on the from point configuration.
 The system will show the upload/download configuration if enabled on machine´s upload/download
sheets configuration.
 Apply the configured cutting parameters.
471
 Apply the general machining options.
5.9.1.7 Rapids
A Rapid movement is the displacement of the head without cutting. This option inserts a rapid movement
from the current machining coordinates to the desired point. In order to insert a rapid movement, perform
1. Select Rapids ( ) button and the system will initialize the rapid movement.
2. Select the Destination point and the rapid movement will be inserted between the initial point
and destination point. The user can select as many points as required to insert rapid
movements.
5.9.1.8 Go To
This option allows cutting between the desired points. In order to do it, perform the following steps:
1. Click Goto ( ) button and the system will initialize the machining.
2. Select the Destination point and the extension between the initial point and destination point
will be machined. The user can select as many points as required to continue the cut operation.
5.9.2 Contours
5.9.2.1 Manual Contours
In order to cut the selected elements of the contour perform the following steps:
1. Point Contour ( ) option located in Contour menu and the system will display the options
available.
2. Select Manual Contours ( ) option and the system will display Selection toolbar.
3. Select the first element of the contour by means of the options provided.
472
4. Select the remaining elements of the contour if required.
5. Click Accept button located in the same menu and the selected elements of the contour will be
machined.
5.9.2.2 Manual Contours by Means of Two Points
By means of this option, the user can machine a contour just giving the input and output points as follows:
1. Select Manual contours by means of two points ( ) option located in Contours menu.
2. Select the input point of the contour.
3. Select the output point of the contour and the system will display Manual contour by means of
two points dialog box as shown below:
Figure 324: Manual contour by means of two points dialog box
Find the fields provided in the previous window briefly described below:
o Lead-in/Lead-out lengths: Lead-ins and Lead-out can be inserted here and will be applied in
the clicked input and output points and set with the values here introduced.
473
o Cut sense: The system will make the machining from the input to the output points in the
sense here selected:
o Finish the contour: If enabled, the system will force to detect all the contour of the clicked
points and, if possible, it will machine it.
o Lead-ins on the same point: If selected, the lead-ins will be located in the same point.
o Delete auxiliary geometry: If enabled, as the name indicates, the auxiliary geometry will be
erased.
4. Introduce the required data and click OK button in order to save the changes.
5.9.2.3 Manual Contours between Micro-joints
Manual contours between micro-joints ( ) option is used to cut elements which are between micro-
joints. The user will have to select the geometry and the system will insert the machining in the contour
which is between the two micro-joints.
5.9.2.4 Automatic Contours
In order to cut the contours automatically, perform the following steps:
1. Point Contour option located in Contour menu and the select Automatic contours ( )
option.
2. Select the required contour to machine.
3. The system will automatically machine the contour.
5.9.2.5 Continuous Contours
This option allows executing the whole machining process by means of the mouse. The user will have to
select the required points. If one of these points belongs to the contour of a part, the system will
automatically introduce the machining orders for the part. If the contour does not have lead-in/lead-out
474
assigned, these will be automatically assigned. In order to assign continuous cut perform the following
steps:
1. Point Contour option located in Contour menu and the select Continuous contours ( )
option.
2. The system will display Continuous cut dialog box as shown below:
Figure 325: Continuous cut dialog box
3. Select whether deleting cycles on lead-ins is required or not and click OK button in order to
save the changes.
4. Select the required destination points by means of the mouse.
 If the button used is the right one, the system will execute the movements as rapid movements
with the head up at a higher speed.
5.9.2.6 Parts
In order to machine the entire part, perform the following steps:
1. Point Contour option located in Contour menu and select Parts ( ) option.
2. Select the part required to machine and the system will machine the whole part automatically.
5.9.2.7 Set of Selected Parts
This option will make the machining of a group of selected parts by performing the following steps:
1. Point Contour option located in Contour menu and select Set of selected parts ( ) option.
475
Figure 326: Set of selected parts
3. Introduce the required data and click OK button in order to save the changes.
4. Select the required set of parts and the system will machine them.
5.9.2.8 All Drill Cycles
Select All Drill Cycles ( ) option located in Contour menu in order to drill all the points on the contour.
5.9.2.9 All Marks
Select All Marks ( ) option located in Contour menu in order to machine the contours with mark
technology.
5.9.2.10 All Holes
Select All Holes ( ) option so that all the holes are machined. This option is usually used before
Continuous contour machinings.
476
5.9.2.11 All Cut
Select All Cut ( ) option located in Contour menu in order to cut all the contours.
5.9.2.12 All Contours One Quality
This option will machine all the contours of a specified cutting quality. In order to do it perform the
following steps:
1. Point Contour option located in Contour menu and select All Contours one Quality ( )
option and the system will display a dialog box displaying the available Cutting qualities.
2. Select the required cutting quality and the system will machine all the contours of the selected
Cutting quality.
5.9.2.13 Remnant Line
Remnant line ( ) option will machine the remnant contour, given that a remnant has been previously
created.
5.9.2.14 Remnant Line Manually
Remnant line manually ( ) option allows cutting the selected contour of the remnant line. The user
will have to select a specific point of the cutting line of the remnant and the system will start cutting from
the nearest point to the clicked point.
5.9.2.15 Compensated Movement
By means of Compensated movement ( ) option the system will show Compensated movement
dialog box asking for the Cutter radius value as shown below:
477
Figure 327: Compensated movement dialog box
The system will place the head in the correct point depending of the Cutter radius. It will machine taking
into account the compensated trajectory for every selected point. Select Make the offset dry-run
parameter in order to machine continuously without rapid movement.
5.9.2.16 The Sheet Framework (Automatic)
The sheet framework (Automatic) ( ) option makes the machine cut the sheet framework in
horizontal and vertical cuts. The system will display Cut the sheet framework dialog box as shown below:
478
Figure 328: Cut the Sheet framework dialog box
o Only when the remnant line is cut: If enabled, it will force the script to be cut always after the
remnants have been cut.
o Maximum length in X and Y: It determines the maximum rectangle that will be generated as
scrap.
o Offset in the parts: Minimum distance between the cut and the parts.
o Offset in the edge of the sheet: It configures the distance between the cut and the edge of the
sheet
o Cut in holes: This checkbox will determine if the holes are going to be cut or not.
be cut from the middle to one side, then it will go to the center again and to the other side. It
is possible to make a lead-in/lead-out in the middle of other types of cutting segments which
479
belong to a sheet framework such as In any cut, Cuts between parts, In cuts outside parts
and In all cuts.
o Order: Using this parameter the user can define the sheet skeleton (frame). The user will
have to select between the following three options:
 By Proximity
 Horizontal + Vertical
 Vertical + Horizontal
5.9.2.17 The Sheet Framework (Manual)
The sheet framework (Manual) option makes the machine cut the scraps in horizontal and vertical cuts.
The instructions will be inserted in the clicked points. When selected, the system will Destroy the sheet
framework dialog box as shown below:
Figure 329: Destroy the Sheet framework dialog box
 Offset in the parts: It is the minimum distance between the cut and the parts.
 Offset in the edge of the sheet: It configures the distance between the cut and the edge of the
sheet.
 Cut in holes: This checkbox will determine if the holes are going to be cut or not. For example, in the
figure if the clicked point:
480
 Start in the middle: Instead of cutting the framework lines from up to down, the segments will be cut
from the middle to one side, then it will go to the center again and to the other side.
 Direction: Depending on the selection, i.e. Horizontal or Vertical the system will include sheet
framework destroying hits in the clicked points.
 Order: Using this parameter the user can define the sheet skeleton (frame). The user can configure
the three options they are:
o By Proximity
o Left + Right and Right + Left: For horizontal cut
o Up to down and Down to up: for vertical cut
5.9.2.18 Destroy Sheet Holes
This option is for cutting or combined machines with grid. The system will execute a process in order to
destroy the holes on the sheet. The sheet is placed over the table´s grid. Depending on the distance of
the grid´s lines, sometimes when cutting a hole, it may keep on the table instead of falling down the table.
If it keeps in horizontal position there is no problem, but if the sheet inclines between two grid lines, it
should stand out and the head can collide with it resulting in head damage. In order to prevent this, the
system provides this option so that the holes are cut in small parts to be sure they always fall down the
grid. When selected the system will display Destroy sheet holes dialog box as shown below:
481
Figure 330: Destroy Sheet holes dialog box
Introduce the required data and click OK button in order to save the data.
5.9.2.19 Common Cut between Two Parts
The user will have to click on a part’s segment that is of common cut, and the system will execute the
common cut between the two parts. Once the segment has been selected the system will display
Common cutting parameters dialog box as displayed below:
482
Figure 331: Common cutting parameters dialog box
 Common cut between two parts: This navigation button configures how the common cut will be
executed.
will leave without cutting when using common cut.
 Continuous cut: If the lead-out of the first part does not coincide with the lead-in of the second part,
then this option allows making that movement cutting or with a rapid depending on the selected
option.
o No: In this case, the movement will always be rapid ones.
o Yes: In this case, the movement will be cutting always.
 If the distance is small: If the distance is the same or lower than the given one, then the movement
will be made cutting, if higher, with a rapid.
 Execution mode: This option allows selecting the common-cut order that the machine will follow.
483
5.9.2.20 Common Cut of a Grid
By means of this option, the user can cut a grid of parts with common cut. First, the common cut elements
will be cut, while the external contour of the whole set is cut later. Once this option is selected the system
will display Selection options toolbar in order to select the parts to machine. Select them through the
options provided and click Accept button located in the same toolbar. The system will display Common
cut of a grid dialog box:
Figure 332: Common cut of a grid dialog box
 Common cut: The user can select between Horizontal + Vertical and Vertical + Horizontal.
484
 Islands: The user will be able to select between the following options:
o Show an error if islands are generated
o Cut islands before common cut
o Cut islands during the first stage of common cut
o Cut islands during the second stage of common cut
o Cut islands after common cut
 Outside: The user will also be able to configure how to start the common cut.
5.9.2.21 Linear Cut of Parts
This option allows cutting the parts in a linear way. It is used to cut the semiautomatic contours of a group
of parts. During the cutting process, the vertical contours of the part will be cut first, followed by the
horizontal ones. After each vertical cutting, the sheet between the parts cut will be evacuated. The system
will display Selection options toolbar in order to select the parts to machine. Select the ones required by
means of the options provided and click Accept button located in the same toolbar. The system will
display Linear cut of parts dialog box as shown below:
485
Figure 333: Linear cut of parts dialog box
 Vertical: It is possible to choose from which corner of the sheet the machine starts to cut to the sense
of the cuts.
 Horizontal: It allows choosing where the cut starts and the sense of them.
 Inside: The cutting of segments takes place in three ways: first, it cuts the holes inside the parts and
then it cuts the external contours. The machining of the cutting parts is done both in vertical and
horizontal way. In horizontal direction, the cut takes place part by part and inside the cut takes place
line by line.
 Only cut the parts: By selecting this option, the sheet framework will not be cut but the system will
cut the vertical elements from the sheet's edge or from one part to another one. This option will only
cut the parts and evacuate them separately.
486
 Lengthen elements from the cutting radio: This option allows avoiding lengthening of elements so
that some elements will not be cut and so they will be jointed to the sheet.
 Avoid piercing on common cut: If this option is selected, the system tries to avoid the piercings in
those places where the elements have been already cut and they are not vertex of other cut
elements. This option tries to prevent the notches from the piercings. The system does two passes for
that element and avoids those marks.
 Maximum longitude of horizontal cut among several parts: If the system finds several segments
from different parts which are on the same level, it will try to cut one after another and the number of
segment cut will be defined by this parameter.
5.9.3 Cycles
Cycle menu contains the following options:
5.9.3.1 Simple Cycle
This option allows machining with a center punch the machining points by inserting rapid movements
between the selected points. In order insert simple cycles perform the following steps:
1. Select Simple Cycle button and the system will initialize the machining.
2. Select the Destination point. A rapid movement will be inserted between the initial point and the
selected point. The user will be able to insert as many points as required by selecting more
points.
5.9.3.2 Linear Cycle
This option allows the user to machine the part by inserting punching machining points in a sequence.
When selected, the system will display the following options:
Figure 334: Linear cycle options
487
 Beginning point and distance: Select this option in order to machine a part by inserting the
punching machining points in a sequence at a specified angle and distance as follows:
1. Select Beginning point and distance button and then mark the first punching machining
point.
Figure 335: Beginning point and distance
o n: The number of machining points.
o a: The angle at which the punching machining points are to be placed.
o d: The distance between the punching machining points.
3. Introduce the required values and click OK button. The machining will be carried out by
inserting machining points at the specified angle and distance.
 Ends and number of points: Select this option in order to machine the part by inserting punching
machining points in a sequence between specified initial and end points as follows:
1. Select Ends and number of points option and select the initial and end points.
488
Figure 336: Ends and number of points
3. Introduce the number of punching machining points required in n field.
4. Click OK and the part will be machined inserting the specified number of punching machining
points between initial and end points.
 Distance between two points: Select this option in order to machine the part by inserting three
punching machining points in a sequence as follows:
1. Select Distance between two points option and mark the first machining point.
2. Mark the second and destination points and the part will be machined along the selected
machining points.
5.9.3.3 Circular Cycle
Circular cycle option allows the user to machine a part by inserting a circular punching machining
sequence. When selected the system will display the following options:
Figure 337: Circular cycle options
 Centre and angles: Select this option in order to machine by inserting a circular sequence of
punching machining points at a specified angle as follows:
1. Select Centre and angles option and mark the center point.

489
Figure 338: Centre and angles
o r: Distance value from the center point.
o n: Number of machining points.
o a: Angle value between the machining points.
o ai: Initial angle value of the first machining point in the circular sequence.
3. Introduce the required values and click OK button. The part will be machined by inserting a
circular sequence of punching machining points.
 Centre and beginning point: Select this option in order to machine a part by inserting a circular
sequence of punching machining points form a specified initial point as follows:
1. Select Centre and beginning point and mark the centre and initial points.
490
Figure 339: Centre and beginning point
3. Introduce the required values in “n” (number of punching machining points) and “a” (angle
between machining points) fields and click OK button
4. The part will be machined by inserting a circular sequence of the machining points with an
initial point and at a specified angle.
 Distance between two points: Select this option in order to machine a part by inserting the initial
and end punching machining points as follows:
1. Select Distance between two points option and mark the Initial point.
2. Mark the second and end points.
3. The part will be machined from the initial point to the end point.
 Arc: Select this option in order to machine an arc by inserting a specified number of punching
machining points as follows:
1. Select Arc button and select the art required to machine.
491
Figure 340: Arc
3. Introduce the number of machining points required in “n” field and click OK button.
4. The arc will be machined with the specified number of machining points.
5.9.3.4 Grid Cycle
This option allows machining a part by inserting punching machining points in two different directions if
the form of a grid.
Figure 341: Grid cycle options
 Corner and number: Select this option in order to machine a part in the form of a grid at a specified
angle and distance as follows:
1. Click Corner and number button and then mark the initial point from where the user wants to
machine the part.
492
Figure 342: Corner and number
o n1: Number of machining points in the first direction.
o n2: Number of machining points in the second direction.
o a: Angle value in which the machining is done.
o d1: Distance value between the consecutive machining points in the first direction.
o d2: The distance value between the consecutive machining points in the second direction.
3. Introduce the required values and click OK button. The part will be machined in the form of a
grid.
 Corner and distances: Select this option in order to machine a part in the form of a grid with five
points at a specified distance as follows:
1. Select Corner and distances option and select or mark an origin point.
2. Select or mark initial and end points in X axis. The end point must be at a distance that is an
exact multiple of the initial point in X axis.
3. Select or mark initial and end points in Y axis. The end point must be at a distance that is an
exact multiple of the initial point in Y axis.
4. The part will be machined with the five points at the specified distances.
493
5.9.3.5 Irregular Cycle
This option allows machining a part by inserting a cycle on a lead-in/lead-out or on the points of different
selected elements. When selected the system will display the following options:
Figure 343: Irregular cycle options
 Cycles on Lead-in/Lead-out: Select this option in order to machine a part by inserting a cycle on the
existing lead-in or lead-out as follows:
1. Select Cycles on Lead-in/Lead-out button and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the required lead-in/lead-out by means of the options provided and click Accept button
located in the same toolbar.
3. The cycle will be created in the selected lead-in/lead-out.
 Cycles on points: Select this option in order to machine a part by inserting a cycle on selected points
of existing elements as follows:
1. Select Cycles on points option and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the required points of the existing elements by means of the options provided and click
3. The cycle will be created within the selected points.
5.9.4 Modify
5.9.4.1 Micro-Joints
Micro-joints ( ) option allows introducing micro-joints in the parts after the machining process has
been done. When selected the system will display Micro-joints dialog box as shown below:
494
Introduce the Width value of micro-joint, which is the distance that will be left as micro-joint in the clicked
parts. Depending on the clicked point and the option selected here, the micro-joint can be inserted in
different sections of the contour which comprehend Middle, End and Picked point. This change can be
executed in more than just the clicked part depending on the option selected in Make on section. The
user will be able to select between The selected part, Identical parts with the same angle and All identical
parts.
5.9.4.2 Automatic Micro-joints at End of Contour
Automatic micro-joints at the end of contour ( ) option allows placing automatic micro-joints at the
end of the contour. When selected, the system will display Automatic micro-joints at the end of the
contour dialog box as shown below.
495
Figure 345: Automatic micro-joints at the end of the contour dialog box
1. Select By quality checkbox in order to base the micro-joints on cut quality. If it is not selected,
the system will display Width value of micro-joint field to be filled by the user with the required
value.
2. In Apply in contours section, select the required size of inside and outside contours to introduce
the micro-joints.
3. Introduce the Maximum length and Maximum width of small contours, as well as the Minimum
length and Minimum width of big contours.
4. After introducing the required data, click OK button in order to introduce the micro joints at the
end of the contour automatically.
5.9.4.3 Delete Micro-joints
Delete micro-joints ( ) option allows deleting the selected micro-joints without erasing the rest of the
machining of the part. In order to do it, perform the following steps:
1. Select Delete micro-joints option and the system will display Selection toolbar.
2. Select the required micro-joint(s) by means of the options provided and click Accept button so
that the system will automatically deletes it.
496
3. Click Finish button in order to disable this option.
5.9.4.4 Order Machining
Once the machining has been executed, Order machining ( ) option allows modifying the order in
which the parts will be machined. When this option is selected the system will display Order cut sequence
the following four options:
Figure 346: Order Machining options
The dialog box displayed will vary depending on the selected option as shown below:
 Order Cut Sequence: By means of a sequential selection the system orders a set of
machining instructions.
Figure 347: Order cut sequence dialog box
 Order Cut Sequence by Window: Using the selection by window the system orders a set of
machining instructions.
497
Figure 348: Order cut sequence by window dialog box
 Order the Cut of the Parts: By means of a sequential selection, the system orders a set of
parts.
Figure 349: Order the cut of the parts dialog box
 Order the Cut of the Parts by Window: Using the selection by window the system orders a
set of parts.
Figure 350: Order the cut of the parts by window dialog box
498
5.9.4.5 Move Special Text
Move special text ( ) option allows moving the written text in the different parts of the nesting. When
selected, the system will display INKJET dialog box as shown below:
Figure 351: INKJET dialog box
 If Automatic checkbox is not enabled, the system will do it manually. On the other hand, if
enabled, new fields will be displayed in the dialog box.
 The user will have to introduce the Correct position of the Offset and Search step in X and Y
dimensions (mm).
 Delete the text if it does not fit in the part parameter, as the name indicates, deletes the text that
does not fit in the part.
 Once all parameters have been set as required, click OK button in order to move the selected
text.
5.9.4.6 Real References of the Remnant
Real references of the remnant ( ) option provides a solution to the differences between references
when a remnant is generated. The system will display Real references of the remnant dialog box as
shown below:
499
Figure 352: Real references of the remnant dialog box
5.9.4.7 Modify Initialization
This option allows modifying the following initialization parameters of the machine:
 Start up ( ) option enables the configuration of parameters of the Initialization section of a

machine.
 Place the clamps with the keyboard ( ) option allows modifying the amount of clamps, as well as
the distance between them, all of it by means of the keyboard.
 Place the clamps with the mouse ( ) option allows modifying the position of the clamps using the
mouse. The user must select the points where the clamps will be located. The same number of points
must be entered as the number of clamps the machine contains.
 From point ( ) option enables the configuration of the parameters of the From points section of a
machine. The From point defines the default values of the initial coordinates relative to the position of
the cutting head.
 Move the from point interactively ( ) option allows changing the from point of the machining by
means of the mouse.
 Sheet parameters ( ) option enables the user to configure the Sheets parameters for a machine.
 Upload/download sheets ( ) option enables the user to configure the Sheet loading/unloading
parameters of a machine.
500
 Cutting parameters ( ) option allows configuring the general cutting parameters together with the
auxiliar parameters, contour attributes and compensations by quality.
 Postprocessor data ( ) option allows configuring the system to ask for some values which will be
used by the postprocessor in order to generate the CNC code. By means of this option, the user can
change the data of these parameters before the postprocessor is executed.
5.9.4.8 Do not pass over the clamps
Do not pass tool over the sheet clamps ( ) option makes sure that no process will exceed the
clamps at any moment during the machining process.
5.9.4.9 Labels Treatment
Labels treatment ( ) option allows modifying the labels. The user can also create labels to generate
subprograms, which is useful l to define them with the needed instructions.
 Insert label begin ( ): With this option the user can place a begin label in the desired machining
position.
 Insert label end ( ): With this option the user can place an end label in the desired position.
 Create label ( ): With this option the user can create labels to generate subprograms.
 Delete labels by selection ( ): With this option the user can delete the selected labels.
 Delete inner labels ( ): With this option the user can delete only the inner labels.
 Delete outer labels ( ): With this option the user can delete only the outer labels.
 Delete all labels ( ): With this option the user can delete all labels.
5.9.4.10 Subprogram Treatment
When the machining is repetitive and involves a considerable number of parts, performing the calculation
automatically can take a long time. With Subprogram treatment ( ) options, machining is defined for
only one part and then the information is copied for the rest of the parts.
501
5.9.4.10.1 Rectangular Subprogram
Rectangular subprogram ( ) option allows to execute a part in a subprogram. It will prompt for the
number of executions, and if the user wants to order the machining or to execute it part by part.
5.9.4.10.2 Delete All Subprograms
Delete all subprograms ( ) option enables the cancellation of all the definitions and performances of
the subprograms that have already been machined. This option deletes all the generated subprograms.
5.9.4.11 Modify Extraction
Modify Extraction ( ) option enables the user modifying the chute cycles by means of Selection
toolbar.
5.9.4.12 Delete Extraction
Delete Extraction ( ) option allows deleting the required chute cycles by means of the options
provided in Selection toolbar.
5.9.4.13 Modify Lead-in/Lead-outs
Modify lead-in/lead-outs ( ) option allows setting the required lead-in/lead-outs for your parts. The
user will be able to modify their position and data, as well as applying a gap and offset.
5.9.4.14 Avoid Any Holes Already Cut
Avoid any holes already cut ( ) option helps the user avoiding the collision of the head with the holes
that have been already cut.
5.9.4.15 Modify the Head Management
Modify the head management ( ) option allows the user adjusting the head management manually.
5.9.4.16 Delete Every Head Up/Down Instruction
Delete every head-up/down instruction ( ) option cancels and deletes every head-up/down
instructions that have been previously generated.
502
5.9.4.17 Modify Head Management of Rapids
Modify head management of rapids ( ) option allows introducing head-up/down instructions in rapid
movements of the machining.
5.9.4.18 Continuous Cut Automatically
Continuous cut automatically ( ) option will change the rapid movements into cutting movements. In
other words, the displacements will be executed cutting.
5.9.4.19 Continuous Cut Semiautomatically
Continuous cut semiautomatically ( ) option, as the previous option, converts the rapid movements
to continuous cutting. The difference consists in the fact that it is executed semiautomatically.
5.9.4.20 Modify Movements
Modify movements ( ) option, as the name indicates, allows modifying the movements of the
machining. This option is very useful to avoid the turrets that pass over a dangerous zone.
5.9.4.21 Modify Compensation
Modify compensation ( ) option allows the user defining the compensation type that will be used for
all the machining process and which is located in the Automatic machining section of the machine
configuration. It allows modifying applied compensation parameters for the contours of all the parts that
have been nested on the sheet.
5.9.4.22 Modify Compensation of a Contour
Modify compensation of a contour ( ) option allows modifying the existing compensation parameters
of a contour taking into account both System compensation and CN compensation.
5.9.4.23 Quality Dependent Compensations
Quality dependent compensations ( ) option allows applying system compensation and control
corrections depending on the cutting quality of the parts and the type of cut. This option enables defining
a different compensation for each one of the twelve cutting qualities.
503
5.9.4.24 Copy Machining of a Part
Copy machining of a part ( ) option allows copying the machining of a parts that has been already
executed to equal parts in the sheet. It is very useful when the user makes the machining of a part in a
very specific way and wants to make the rest of the parts following the same process.
5.9.4.25 Delete Machining of Selected Parts
Delete machining of selected parts ( ) option will automatically delete all the machining of the parts
selected by means of Selection options.
5.9.4.26 Modify the Reposition Point
Modify the reposition point ( ) option makes the system ask for the reposition point once the
machining has been executed. It is used for changing the place where the head or the pistons have been
lower for reposition.
5.9.4.27 Modify the Zero Point of the Sheet
Modify the zero point of the sheet ( ) option modifies the reference point of the sheet by placing a
point on the required place.
5.9.4.28 Replace Torch with Another
Replace torch with another ( ) option allows the user giving in just one instruction a set of
instructions.
5.9.4.29 Group Cycles on Lead-ins

Group cycles on lead-ins ( ) option allows the user grouping cycles on lead-ins. This helps to
optimize and reorder and allows the user setting he maximum distance between cycles, among other
options.
504
Figure 353: Group cycles on lead-ins window
 Generation of labels: This parameter indicates if the user is going to generate labels and of
which type. It is possible to generate labels By parts or By group.
 Orthogonality tolerance: It indicates the maximum tolerance (respecting the X or Y axis)

between two parts.
5.9.5 Options
5.9.5.1 Optimize
5.9.5.1.1 Optimize Corrector Changes
Refer to section 4.8.5.1 Optimize corrector changes.
5.9.5.2 Speed Rates
Refer to section 4.8.5.2 Speed Rates.
5.9.5.3 Postprocessor Words
Refer to section 4.8.5.3 Postprocessor Words.
5.9.5.4 Contour Attributes
Refer to section 4.8.5.4 Contour Attributes.
5.9.5.5 CN Compensation
Refer to section 4.8.5.5 CN Compensation.
505
5.9.5.6 System Compensation
Refer to section 4.8.5.6 System Compensation.
5.9.5.7 Change Cutting Direction
Refer to section 4.8.5.12 Change Cutting Direction.
5.9.5.8 Contour Ordering
Refer to section 4.8.5.13 Contour Ordering.
5.9.6.1 Part Extraction
Refer to section 4.8.6.1 Part Extraction.
5.9.6.2 Assign Extractions
Refer to section 4.8.6.2 Assign Extractions.
5.9.6.3 Assign Boxes
Refer to section 4.8.6.3 Assign Boxes.
5.9.7 View
5.9.7.1 View CNC
View CNC ( ) option shows the CNC code of the sheet. The nesting has to be saved in order to
generate the CNC code.
5.9.7.2 Current Status
Refer to section 4.8.7.1 Current Status.
506
5.9.7.3 System Efficiency
System Efficiency ( ) option displays System efficiency dialog box as shown below:
Figure 354: System efficiency dialog box
The previous dialog box provides information about the use of sheets for the performed task and the
number of machined sheets.
5.9.7.4 Clamps and Work Zone
Clamps and Work zone ( ) option will display Clamps and work zone dialog box. This dialog box
provides the following information:
 Clamps: Locations and zone, and whether the fixed position of the clamps will be shown or not.
 Work Zone: Length and Width, Minimum and Maximum X and Y coordinates in the current part
reposition, ant the added reposition which is the sheet´s cutting point of origin.
5.9.7.5 Verify the Machining
Refer to section 4.8.7.2 Verify the machining.
5.9.7.6 Verify Unstable Contours
As the name indicates, Verify unstable contours ( ) option checks whether the contours are stable
or not. The system will display Verify unstable contours dialog box as shown below:
507
Figure 355: Verify unstable contours dialog box
 Do only with cut parts: It verifies unstable contours only with cut parts.
 Apply micro-joints in machined unstable contours: This option applies the micro-joint to parts that
fall or may fall off the grid. It is possible to apply it by quality or to introduce a determined width value
for the micro-joint.
 Display parts with unstable contours: This option allows the visualization of the parts situation
whether it may fall or not. The image represents the shape in which the part is going to be scratched
taking into account the color used. If special visualization is selected, it will not appear when applying
this option, as it would be useless (the scratching will not be seen). For some reason if the parts have
to be moved on the sheet, this option should be re-selected to update the scratch type. This is a
temporary option, and will no longer be visualized once the sheet has been changed.
5.9.7.7 Multitorch
Multitorch ( ) option displays the list of torches along with the capabilities and distances of each one.
The system will display Multitorch data dialog box as shown below:
508
Figure 356: Multitorch data dialog box
The capabilities of
each torch are
shown with the
following icons:
5.9.8 Sheet
5.9.8.1 Reposition
Reposition ( ) option allows the user carrying out hand-operated repositions. The user must select
the positioning point of the pistons, headstock or shear as well as a positioning point for the operation
area.
509
5.9.8.2 Move Clamps
Move clamps ( ) option allows fixing the sheet with the turret head or with the piston while moving
clamps.
5.9.8.3 Sheet Turn Over
Sheet turn over ( ) option enables the configuration of the parameters located in Sheet turn over
section of the machine. The system will display Sheet turn over dialog box as shown below:
Figure 357: Sheet turn over dialog box
 Turn over type: The user will be able to select between the following three options:
o Manual rotation of 180º
o Manual rotation of 90º
o Manual symmetry
 Cancel reposition when executing the turn over: Using this option the user can cancel reposition.
If there were any reposition before the turnover of a sheet, after making the turnover, all the reposition
will be cancelled keeping the working zone as it was at the beginning.
 Offset of the work zone after the turn over: With this option, after the turnover of the sheet, the
system will apply an offset to the working zone, which means that the working zone will be a little bit
displaced from its position before the turnover.
This parameter is only useful if the contact point of the sheet and the machine pin are not coincident
with the initial sheet border. In this case the sheet will be separates in X from its initial position.
510
5.10 VIEW
5.10.1 Display
5.10.1.1 Nesting Explorer
Nesting explorer ( ) button allows visualizing a tree structure by subjobs, nestings and nested parts
of a job. When selected, the system will display Nesting explorer window at the left hand side.
This window visualizes the active job, the nesting and the most important information related to them, as
well as all the nested parts in each nesting. It displays the name of the sheet, dimensions of the sheet,
quantity of parts and number of equal sheets in the bracket.
Information related to subjobs, nestings and parts is displayed in three different ways attending to their
position in the tree, their icons or the text each element shows. They are as follows:
1. Position: Elements in level 1 of the tree are always subjobs, those in level 2 are nestings and
those in level 3 are parts:
2. Icons: The list of icons that are included here divided into three parts, such as:
 Subjobs: This includes both active and non-active jobs. The subjobs show information about the
active jobs, available machine, material and its thickness. To make changes in the sheet, right-click
on the sheet of the subjob that allows the user to delete, block, open, automatic nesting/machining,
and view the properties of the sheet part.
 Nestings: Those parts that are displayed under nesting are: In design, Available, In workshop,
Finished and Multiprogram and so on.
5.10.1.2 Nesting Viewer
Nesting viewer ( ) option shows the subjob part in thumbnails mode. It is possible to view or hide a
part that has to be nested and machined. When selected the system will display or hide Nesting viewer
window next to Nesting explorer on the left hand side of the window.
The user is provided with nested parts, reference, quantity, dimensions, use percentage, CNC, sheet and
weight of the nested sheet.
511
5.10.1.3 Machining Window
Machining window ( ) option visualizes information about the Machining instructions and the Parts.
Machining instruction section provides data such as type of contour, compensation, length and corrector.
On the other hand, Part section provides the length, width and angle, as well as the part parameters.
5.10.1.4 Modules Viewer

Modules viewer ( ) option allows the user to add, delete, insert and block the desired modules in a
very handy way. This panel can be activated and deactivated from the View tab located in the Ribbon
(Ribbon controls). The user will find the option Modules viewer between the options Machining window
and Part viewer.
When right-clicking on Modules viewer, the following options are displayed:
Figure 358: Modules viewer options
 New: Through this option the user will be able to create customized modules selecting the parts or
the modules given in a sheet. Once the parts that will form the new module are selected, the selection
will be accepted and the module will be displayed in the panel. It is located in the contextual menu
and is always visible.
 Create modules: Through this option the user will be able to create modules based on the ones
already created. It is possible to have modules with different geometry.
 Semi-automatic: This option will select the module that better suits the sheet and will introduce it,
without giving the option to select it or position it. It is located in the contextual menu and is always
visible.
 Explode: Once the modules are introduced in a sheet they work as a single entity, which is not
always the most convenient option. By means of this option a complete module becomes a group of
independent parts. This option only takes effect in the module placed in the sheet, having no impact
on the modules created in the panel. It is located in the contextual menu and is always visible.
512
5.10.1.5 Part Viewer
Part Viewer ( ) option shows the list of parts of a subjob in thumbnails mode. It is possible to view or
hide a part that has to be nested and machined. The system will display or hide Part Viewer window at
the bottom of Nesting and Machining window.
It indicates the nested parts, blocked parts, selected parts with available quantity, nested quantity and
blocked quantity between other details.
Whenever the cursor is hovered over the image of any element of the view or the list, the system will
display an enlarged image along with a number of textual information. This way, the identification process
of elements becomes much easier.
The enlarged image can be enabled or disabled and the position of the screen in which it should appear
can be set by the user. In addition, it is also possible to configure the visualization time as well as the
image to display.
The existing statuses of the parts are the following:
 Part not completely nested
513
 Part completely nested
 Blocked part
 Invalid part: there are not punches or dies for machining it
 Open part
 More parts than the existing had been nested
5.10.1.6 Part List
Part List ( ) option shows the list of parts to be machined in a job. The user will visualize the
Reference of the part together with the Labor ticket, Pending quantity, Nested quantity and Dimensions.
514
When the user drags the mouse on any part in the part list window as shown above, the part name and
part dimensions will be displayed in the tool tip. If the system is in mm, the system will display 3 decimal
positions and if the system is in inches, the system will display 5 decimal positions.
The user can access to the contextual menu clicking with the right button of the mouse over the part list.
The available options are:
 New: The system will open the drawing module allowing to create a new part which will be
automatically inserted into the job.
 Open: The selected part will be edited in the drawing module
 Block: The part will appear blocked and will not be used for the nesting until is unblocked again.
 Delete: The part will be deleted from the job, but not from the database.
 Import: The user will be able to import pending parts of manufacturing orders list, import parts from
database and import DXF files.
 Quantity: The user can increase the quantity of available parts from this part list.
 Priority: When doing automatic nesting process, the system will try to place first the parts with higher
priority.
 Properties: From the part list it is possible to edit the part properties using this option.
 Group/Block: The user can BLOCK or UNBLOCK several parts together. By activating this option
the selected part will change their status.
 View: With this option the user will be able to select Large icon (existent mode) and List. Using this
list mode, the parts will be displayed on a grid with the part reference and an icon showing the status
of the part. The possible statuses are the following:
Pending quantity > 0< Blocked part
Pending quantity = 0 Closed part
Pending quantity < 0 Wrong part
 Order: The order the parts are shown in the part list can be changed from here
 Size: In the part list there is a bitmap representation of each part, the size of this small draw can be
changed here.
515
5.10.1.7 Filler Parts Viewer
The Nesting and Machining module has two different panels in order to differentiate whether the part is a
filler part or a normal one. This treatment intents to transform those filler parts available in the database
into normal parts, due to the fact that the manufacturing of a certain number of those parts is required.
Filler parts have an unlimited number by default, which can be modified at any time. This treatment allows
having the same part twice in a same job, both as normal and as a filler part which is very useful in those
cases in which only a particular number of parts is necessary, but would be useful to have more if
possible.
5.10.1.8 Filler Parts Viewer List

It is possible to visualize the filler part in the form of a list. There are the following details:
 Reference: It shows the reference of the associated part.
 Labor ticket: This is a part numbering system for database identification.
 Pending quantity: Number of parts which have not been nested.
 Nested quantity: It shows the parts which are already nested.
 Dimensions: It indicates the minimum rectangular dimension to nest the parts.
5.10.1.9 Simulation Window
Simulation Window ( ) option shows the Simulation window of the machined part where the user
can set the speed and view the cutter radius between other options:
516
Find the different sections provided in the previous window briefly described below:
 In the first section it is possible to set the Speed percentage.
 Operation section displays the cutting quality, cutting operation with respect to X axis, Y axis, and the
cutter radius.
 The next section provides information on torches used and their positions, compensation system and
control.
 Use the arrow buttons to view the required simulation process.
 Use the other buttons at the bottom of the window to pause, stop the operation, fast forward the
simulation, move to the previous operation, current operation, and so on.
 This window provides information regarding the cutting quality only when the machining operation
is executed.
5.10.1.10 Multitorch Window
Multitorch Window ( ) option shows the Number of torches (up to 20 torches at the same time. of the
active machine and the Distance between them in millimeters. Here you will be able to apply Automatic
distances or modify the previous data and save it.
There is an option related to the way parts corresponding to multitorch are placed together. The user will
be able to indicate whether the distance between the torches is free or automatically established. In case
of being free type, the distance is established in the window. On the contrary, in case of being automatic,
the distance between them is minimized. Apart from these two options, it is also possible to adjust the
parts to the sheet.
By means of the second option, the user can indicate the system to make use of the current configuration
in Multitorch window of Automatic nesting. Thanks to this it is possible to introduce some parts manually
to a determined distance and complete the sheet maintaining that distance regardless of what has been
previously configured in Multitorch data window. If this option is enabled, the user will be able to activate
Work with fixed number of torches parameter, which will use the number set in the window. The number
of torches can also be variable; therefore, it is possible to make use of the configured number of torches
or less.
517
5.10.1.11 Sheet Simulation
Sheet Simulation ( ) option simulates the sheet of the part. This application will be active until the
user clicks it again to disable it.
 It is also possible to press F12 key on the keyboard to use this application.
5.10.1.12 Special Display
Special Display ( ) option allows visualizing parts with filling colors to facilitate associating the parts
nested on the sheet with those on the part viewer.
Figure 360: Special display
 In order to visualize the parts with filling in the Part Viewer it is possible to activate Special
Display option located in View tab of the Nesting and Machining Module.
It is also possible to modify the size property in the Part Viewer by right clicking on it and selecting Size
option.
518
The existing statuses of the parts are the following:
 Part not completely nested
 Part completely nested
 Blocked part
 Invalid part: there are not punches or dies for machining it
 Open part
519
 More parts than the existing had been nested
5.10.1.13 Redraw
Select Redraw ( ) option in order to visualize the drawing of the machined part.
 It is also possible to press the F9 key on the keyboard to use this application.
5.10.2 Zoom
5.10.2.1 Zoom All
Select Zoom all ( ) option to zoom the part to the maximum size of the screen
 It is also possible to press F8 key on the keyboard to use this application.
5.10.2.2 Zoom Window
Select Zoom window ( ) option in order to zoom the selected part as follows:
1. Select Zoom window button and mark the first point of the window to select the part that has
to be enlarged.
2. Move the cursor till the desired end point and mark the end point of the window.
3. The selected part will be enlarged.
520
 It is also possible to press F4 key on the keyboard in order to use this application.
5.10.2.3 Zoom Previous
Select Zoom previous ( ) option to go back to the previous screen.
 It is also possible to press F7 key on the keyboard in order to use this application.
5.10.2.4 Zoom Dynamic
Select Zoom Dynamic ( ) option to zoom the part to a required size as follows:
1. Select Zoom dynamic button and the system will display a window on the part.
2. Click and move the cursor until getting the desired window size and click.
3. Repeat the previous steps until the desired size is reached and right click. The part will be
enlarged to view based on the window size.
5.10.2.5 Zoom Scale
Select Zoom Scale ( ) option in order to zoom the part based on proportionate values as follows:
1. Select Zoom Scale button and the system will display the following dialog box:
521
Figure 361: Zoom scale values
2. Introduce the required proportionate values and click OK button.
3. The part will be enlarged based on the proportionate values previously specified.
5.10.2.6 Full Screen
Full screen ( ) option allows visualizing the full drawing screen without the toolbars. The system will
display Full screen button on the drawing window, which the user will have to select in order to return to
normal screen.
5.11 SIMULATION
Refer to section 4.10.1 Simulate.
5.11.1 Program
Refer to section 4.10.1.1 Program.
5.11.2 ISN Position
Refer to section 4.10.1.2 ISN Position.
5.11.3 Mouse Positioning
Refer to section 4.10.1.3 Mouse Positioning.
522
5.11.4 Begin
Refer to section 4.10.1.4 Begin.
5.11.5 Previous
Refer to section 4.10.1.5 Previous.
5.11.6 Next
Refer to section 4.10.1.6 Next.
5.11.7 End
Refer to section 4.10.1.7 End.
5.11.8 Run
Refer to section 4.10.1.8 Run.
5.11.9 Previous Tool
Refer to section 4.10.1.9 Previous Tool.
5.11.10 Next Tool
Refer to section 4.10.1.10 Next Tool.
5.11.11 Previous Reposition
Previous reposition ( ) option allows navigating in the simulation program to the previous reposition.
523
5.11.12 Next Reposition
Next reposition ( ) option allows navigating in the simulation program to the next reposition.
5.11.13 Previous Multitorch
Previous multitorch ( ) option the user can go back to the last change of torch in the machining
program.
5.11.14 Next Multitorch
Next multitorch ( ) option the user can go back to the next change of torch in the machining
program.
5.11.15 Previous Chute
By means of Previous chute ( ) option the simulation program will be placed just after the previous
extraction or chute movement.
5.11.16 Next Chute
By means of Next chute ( ) option the simulation program will be placed just after the next chute or
extraction movement.
5.11.17 Simulate CNC
CNC Simulation ( ) option carries out a 3D CNC simulation of the active job.
524
5.12 APPLICATIONS
5.12.1 Assign Palletization Suction Cups
Assign Palletization suction cups ( ) option enables the user assigning suction cups to parts to
be palletized. This application is managed by the following four commands:
 Automatic ( ): Automatic assignment of suction cups.
 Delete ( ): Deletes all the suction cups assigned by Automatic and Modify options.
 Modify ( ): Allows modifying the assignment manually.
 Configure ( ): Allows defining the configurations to use while executing Automatic option.
5.12.2 Assign Download Point to Pallet
Assign download point to pallet ( ) option allows the user fixing a predefined stacking position to a
part option protected-pallet information. It will assign to sheared parts or remnants the download point to
pallet. It will display the position, stacking position and information to recognize if it is symmetry of the
original part.
5.12.3 Machining of a Part with 2 Torches
Machining of a part with 2 torches ( ) protected option determines whether the contours that can
be cut with one single torch are going to be cut using multiple torches, in other words, whether the
contours will be cut simultaneously or not. This option is
525
5.12.4 Machining of the Out of a Part with Multitorch
Machining of the out of a part with multitorch ( ) option allows the user defining the order of
cutting. Select the part to machine and the system will display Machining of the out of a part with
multitorch dialog box as shown below:
Figure 362: Machining of the out of a part with multitorch dialog box
 Contours machining order: Select the desired contour direction.
 Left & right cut direction: Select the required cut direction.
 Horizontal cut direction: Select the required cut direction.
 Use system compensation in generated open contours: Select this checkbox in order to use the
system compensation in generated open contour.
5.12.5 Common Cut with Multitorch
Common cut with multitorch ( ) option allows machining different lines of rectangular parts of
different width and length nested in common cut with multitorch. By means of this option, all the horizontal
cuts of the parts will be machined with multitorch using all the torches needed to cut them in one go.
Vertical cuts will be carried out with only one torch.
526
Select the part to machine and the system will display Common cut with multitorch dialog box as shown
below, which provides the same information as in the previous option:
Figure 363: Common cut with multitorch dialog box
5.12.6 Linear Common Cut with Multitorch
Linear common cut with multitorch ( ) option allows common cutting of linear elements of different
parts with multitorch. All the necessary cuts will be machined with multitorch using the required torches. In
order to activate this option, the common cut with several parts has to be activated with the parts nested.
5.12.7 Parts Evacuation by Lift after Machining
Parts evacuation by lift after machining ( ) option allows evacuating parts by lift on cutting
machines after performing the machining. This option is protected and Lift option will have to be disabled
in the machine configuration in order to be able to run it. When selected the system will display a drop-
down list providing the following options:
 Automatic ( ): The system will perform the evacuations automatically, testing all the available
pressing points defined by the testing grid. The system will decide the best evacuation point for each
part depending on the best gravity center, the maximum number of active suction cups…etc.
527
 Delete ( ): Deletes the evacuation previously defined. In order to select the evacuation, the user
must select the Lift point. Select the chute cycle to delete by means of the options provided in
Selection toolbar provided by the system.
 Configure ( ): This option displays the configuration window in order to define the suction cups
carriage, suction cups, stripes… and all the headed parameters to evacuate. The most important
difference to the Standard lift is the pressing point.
Figure 364: Configure parts evacuation
If More button is selected, the system will display Lift dialog box as shown below:
528
Figure 365: Lift dialog box
If the Navigation ( ) button is selected the system will display Suction cups carriage data dialog
box:
Figure 366: Suction cups carriage data dialog box

529
Introduce the required data and click OK button in order to save it.
 Manual ( ): The user can define the evacuations interactively, selecting the part to be evacuated,
the strip positions and the active suction cups by means of the options provided in Selection toolbar.
 Move ( ): This option allows moving interactively a previously defined evacuation. In order to select
the evacuation to modify, the user must select the required Lift point.
 Modify ( ): This option allows modifying interactively a previously defined evacuation. In order to
select to evacuation to modify, the user must select the required Lift point.
 Copy ( ): This option allows copying all the data of a previously defined evacuation to any other
equal part. In this case, to user must also select the required Lift point.
 Display ( ): The system will display the parts that have already been evacuated, which will help
the user identify the ones not evacuated.
5.12.8 Evacuation of All the Parts by Lift after Machining
Evacuation of all the parts by lift after machining ( ) option enables the assignation of joint
download of all machined parts. This option is protected and will only enabled once sheet machining has
been done. In order to use this application, the evacuator suction cups must be previously defined in a
file. These are defined by indicating the number of suction cup grids the lift has, where the grids have a
defined number of rows and columns. The point where the lift must be placed also requires definition. All
this is configured in LiftSCups.cfg file.
When selected the system will display a drop-down list with the following options:
 Automatic ( ): This option performs evacuations automatically, testing all the available pressing
points defined by testing the grid. The system will decide which is the best evacuation point for each
part, taking into account the best gravity center and the maximum number of active suction cups.
 Modify ( ): Thanks to this option the user can define the evacuations interactively, selecting the
part to evacuate, the strip positions and the active suction cups.
530
 Visualize ( ): This option allows visualizing all the suction cups.
5.12.9 Remnant to Part
Remnant to part ( ) option is very useful for a better sheet usage and efficient material waste
management. Once all parts have been placed on the sheet, automatic nesting has been carried out and
the user has been left with unused material portion, this option is a powerful solution to avoid material
waste and achieve profit. This option will convert the remnant into a part.
5.13 UTILITIES
5.13.1 Open Drafting
Open drafting ( ) option will open the drafting module without closing the drawing/nesting ones. If
the system detects changes in the machining when selecting this option it will prompt the user to save
them. If the user performs changes in the drafting module, the system will ask to save them before going
back to the drawing/nesting module. The system will return to the previous state when returning to the
drawing module.
5.14 DRAGGING OPTIONS

Refer to section 4.13 Dragging Options.
5.15 SELECTION OPTIONS

Refer to section 4.14 Selection Options.
531
CHAPTER
6
6 HOME
6.1 MODULES
From this section, the user will be able to access to Duct Parts, Drawing and Nesting and Machining
modules.
6.2 IMPORT
6.2.1 Parts from Database
Parts from database ( ) option enables the user to import required parts from the existing list or Part
List to your current manufacturing order section. The system will display Part selection dialog box as
shown below:
532
Figure 367: Part selection dialog box
 Criteria: Using this option, any parts can be imported, created and modified priority wise with a given
reference number, quantity, machine, material and thickness. Click on any cell of the row to change
the required parameters.
 Select the Navigation ( ) button next to Criteria to redefine or create of a new part in the Part
selection dialog box by assigning a unique reference code.
533
Figure 368: Part selection dialog box 2
 In addition, in User data the existing data list can be navigated and selected as per the required
element or by entering a new element. The new element will be added in the data list for future use. It
is possible to search information about a part by entering the From and To date along with the
specification of Thickness, Priority and Length and Width of the part.
 Database: In this, a database can be imported from the existing databases, where the corresponding
database parts can be viewed and imported to the current manufacturing order list. If the Navigation
( ) button attached to this field is selected, the system will display Database selection dialog box
providing a list of the available databases.
534
 Group: Using this option, the selected parts can be linked to a specified group. By clicking on the
selected section, it is even possible to modify Use the part material and thickness and Use the part
machine as required.
 Parameters: When selected the system will display Parameters dialog box.
The parameters here set related to Machine and Material, thickness, quantity and priority of the parts
can be modified.
 Use the part material and thickness: Select this checkbox to use the selected part material and
thickness.
 Use the part machine: Select this checkbox to use the selected part machine. This parameter will
only be enabled once Use the part material and thickness is activated.
 Use the part filler property: Select this checkbox so the system uses filler parts when it is not
possible to include more normal parts.
6.2.2 Duct Figures from Database
Duct figures from database ( ) option allows importing the required duct figures from the
available list to your current manufacturing order section. The system will display Figure selection
535
Figure 369: Figure selection dialog box
 Criteria: Any duct figures can be imported, created and modified priority wise with a given reference
number, quantity, machine, material and thickness. Select the box of any row to change the required
parameters.
Select the arrow icon next to Criteria to redefine or creating of a new duct part in the Figure selection
dialog box by assigning a unique reference code. In addition, to search information about a duct
figure you can enter the From and To date along with the specification of Thickness, DIN and Code
of the part.
 Database: Once selected the system will display Database selection dialog box displaying all the
available databases. In this, a database can be imported from the existing databases, where the
corresponding database duct parts/figures can be viewed and imported to the current manufacturing
order list.
 Group: Using this option, the selected duct figures can be linked to a specified group.
 Parameters: In this, the parameters of chosen Machine and Material thickness, quantity and priority
of the duct parts can be modified, as in the previous option.
536
 Use the part material and thickness: Select this checkbox to use the selected duct part material
and thickness.
 Use the part machine: Select this checkbox to use the selected duct part machine. This parameter
will only be enabled once Use the part material and thickness is activated.
6.2.3 Kits from Database
Kits from database ( ) option allows importing the required kits from the available list to your current
manufacturing order section. The system will display Kit selection dialog box as shown below:
Figure 370: Kit selection dialog box
Here the user will be able to introduce the required quantity of the selected kit, as well as activating
Import the nestings associated to the kit, Use the part material and thickness and Use the part machine
parameters.
537
6.2.4 Rectangles
Rectangles ( ) option allows creating rectangular parts for the current job. In order to create a
rectangular part, perform the following steps:
1. Select Rectangles option and the system will display Rectangular parts dialog box as shown
below:
Figure 371: Rectangular parts dialog box
2. Introduce the length, width and quantity.
3. The system will automatically assign the Reference based on the length and width values.
4. The user can configure Reference field by clicking Configure button. The system will display
the following dialog box:
538
Figure 372: Configure dialog box
 Insert in the job: It indicates whether the rectangular part is created in the current job or not. If not
enabled, the rectangular part will be created in the database.
 Automatic: It indicates whether the reference of the rectangular part is generated automatically or
not.
 Request: It indicates whether the reference of the rectangular parts has to be edited or not.
 Reference: Unique reference code to be included to the reference of the rectangular part.
1. If Parameters button is selected the system will display Part saving dialog box, where the user
will have to introduce the required details and click OK in order to save them.
2. The system will direct you back to Rectangular parts window. Click Add button so that the
rectangular part is included in the window.
3. Click OK button and the rectangular part will be created.
6.2.5 Import DXF Files
Import DXF files ( ) option allows importing the geometry of a DXF file. In order to import it,
1. Select Import DXF files option and the system will display Open dialog box as shown below:
539
Figure 373: Open dialog box (Import DXF Files)
 Name: Name of the DXF file.
 Type: Type of file.
 Drawing simulation: It indicates whether to preview the drawing of the geometry or not.
 Configure: Select this button so that the system displays Import configuration dialog box as shown
below:
540
Figure 374: Import configuration dialog box
Select the required values and click Apply button in order to save them and OK to come back to Open
dialog box.
2. Select the required DXF file and click Open button so that the selected geometry is imported to
the current job.
6.2.6 Import DWG Files
Import DWG files ( ) option allows importing the geometry of a DWG file. In order to import it,
1. Select Import DWG files option and the system will display Open dialog box as shown in the
previous section listing all the available DWG files.
541
Figure 375: Open dialog box (Import DWG Files)
 Name: Name of the DWG file.
 Drawing simulation: It indicates whether to preview the drawing of the geometry or not.
 Configure: Select this button so that the system displays Import configuration dialog box as detailed
in the previous section. Select the required values and click Apply button in order to save them and
OK to come back to Open dialog box.
2. Select the required DWG file and click Open button so that the selected geometry is imported
to the current job.
542
6.2.7 Import Parametric Parts
Import Parametric parts ( ) option allows importing parametric geometries. In order to do it

1. Select Import parametric parts option and the system will display Parametric parts dialog box
as shown below:
Figure 376: Parametric parts dialog box
 Directory: Path of the directory where the parametric parts are located. Click on the Navigation ( )
button attached to this field in order to select the required directory.
543
 Parameters: When selected the system will display Part Saving dialog box, where the user will be
able to introduce the required Machine, Material, Thickness, Date, Quantity, Priority, Name, User
data, Labor ticket, Order and Product.
 Configure: When selected the system will display Configure dialog box as shown below:
Figure 377: Configure dialog box
Configure the linear and angular tolerance as well as the required parameters and click OK button
in order to save the changes in the configuration.
 Close: Select this button in order to exit from Parametric parts dialog box.
544
6.2.8 Import MEC Files
Import MEC files ( ) option allows importing the geometry of a MEC file. In order to import it,
1. Select Import MEC files option and the system will display Open dialog box as shown in the
previous section listing all the available MEC files.
 Name: Name of the MEC file.
 Drawing simulation: Indicates whether to preview the drawing of the geometry or not.
 Configure: Select this button so that the system displays Import configuration dialog box as detailed
in the previous section. Select the required values and click Apply button in order to save them and
OK to come back to Open dialog box.
2. Select the required MEC file and click Open button so that the selected geometry is imported
to the current job.
6.2.9 Importers Configuration

It is possible to work with several configurations for importers. This option is valid for:
 Standard importers of Expert (DFX, DWGs, MEC, DSTVs, ASCII, ISO CUT, etc.)
 Application importers (Mazak, Tribon, TOPS GEO files, etc.)
The following importers are excluded:
 Parametric parts importer

 Parametric geometry parts importer
 Images vectorization importer
 Database importers (parts, figures, kits)
 Rectangular parts importers
For example, for the case of the DXF importer the following window will appear:
545
Figure 378: Open window (Import DXF Files)
Once the user has selected the part to import, Configure… option has to be selected and the following
window will appear.
546
Figure 379: Import configuration window
Now, the button Configurations must be clicked to show the following window:
547
Figure 380: Configurations dialog box
In this window it is possible to choose one of the following options:
 New: It allows creating a new configuration based on the original configuration of the importer. For
example, if we work with the DXF importer, the original configuration file is DXFASYSW.CFG. When
creating a new configuration and applying the changes (with OK button) a new copy of this
configuration file will be created with the name of the file defined. Apart from defining this name, it is
also possible to give a name to this configuration to make easier its description.
Figure 381: New configuration dialog box
 The extension of this file will always be CFG or CF? (being “?” any character) If not, OK button
will not be enabled as shown below:
548
 Modify: It allows modifying the name of the customized configuration, but not the file. The reason is
that the file can be in use by another user in the system, so once that it has been created with a name
it will remain in the system unless a user decides to delete it.
 Delete: It allows deleting an existing or newly created configuration.
 Cancel: The user can cancel the actions executed and exit the window without saving the new
configurations or changes made.
 OK: The user validates the changes made and the new configurations are saved in the system.
For each created file a line will be generated, where the following fields will be saved:
o Type: importer type
o Name: configuration name
o File: configuration file name
o AppName: importer name (just for application importers)
Given the case the configurations per user do not exist, this file will not exist. It will be created
whenever a configuration is defined for the first time.
 All the information generated when creating the configurations will be saved in the network, in the
directory where the database is located:\\LANTEK\Database$\DatabaseName\FilesCfg\Importers. This
includes Importers.cfgx file and the files .cfg y .cf?. This way, any user will have access to these
defined configurations.
Once that the different configurations have been created and saved, it will be possible to select the
configuration when importing the parts using the drop-drown list that appears in the lower part of
Configuration… window.
Once selected, this file can be defined and modified applying the changes on the selected file of the drop-
drown list.
549
 If the selection is modified and another file is selected from the drop-drown list, the changes will
be applied in the previously selected file. That means that changing the selection works equally as
apply button or OK button.
This drop-down list is also shown in the window where the parts to import are displayed:
Figure 382: Drop-down list (DXF files) 2
In this case, the file is selected and it is possible to add parts to import with this configuration.
Finally, when the user exits the importer, the information will be saved in the original file of the importer. In
case of DXF files, it will be saved in DXFASYSW.CFG file, with the following information that the user has
previously selected:
 Path of files to be imported.

 Configuration file that will be loaded when importing.
550
6.3 EDIT
6.3.1 Search
Search ( ) option allows the user searching elements. Once this option is selected the system will
display Element search window attached at the bottom as shown below:
Figure 383: Element search window
Here the user will be able to filter the jobs from the database based on their priority. The job search can
be carried out specifying the job Name, Path and State.
It is possible to search the required information by selecting the Machine, Material, Thickness and CNC,
which will be displayed if the user selects Containing option.
In addition, the user can filter by Date, Order options, Advanced options, Quotation jobs and Multiprogram
jobs.
6.3.2 Delete
Delete ( ) option allows erasing the selected parts and sheet of the current job. Once this option is
selected, the system will display a warning message to make sure if the user wants to delete the selected
part or sheet.
551
6.3.3 Select All
Select all ( ) option selects all the elements of the window, which can be parts, figures or sheets,
depending on the selected mode.
6.3.4 Invert Selection
Invert selection ( ) option inverts the selection of elements of the window. These elements can be
parts, figures or sheets, depending on the selected mode. During the selection, this option allows
unselecting all the previously selected geometry.
6.4 PROGRAMS
From this section, the user will be able to access to Flex3d Unfolding, Flex 3d SolidWorks, Flex 3d Solid
Edge, Flex 3d Inventor, Flex 3d CATIA and Flex 3d ProE.
6.5 QUOTATION
6.5.1 Accept Quotation
Accept quotation ( ) option, as the name indicates, allows accepting quotations. It is necessary to
indicate the specific sheets of the warehouse to make each nesting. Once a quotation has been
accepted, the sheets used are discounted from the warehouse.
6.6 CONTEXTUAL MENU
6.6.1 Open
Open ( ) option allows opening the selected job.
552
6.6.2 Export
Export ( ) option exporting the selected job. When selected, Directory dialog box will be displayed.
6.6.3 Cut
Cut ( ) option allows cutting the selected job.
6.6.4 Copy
Copy ( ) option allows copying the selected job.
6.6.5 Delete
Delete ( ) option allows deleting the selected job. When selected, a warning message will be
displayed asking if the user wants to delete associated elements, parametric elements only or the
manufacturing order associated to the job.
6.6.6 Change name
Change name ( ) option allows chaning the name of the selected job.
6.6.7 Refresh
Refresh ( ) option allows refreshing the selected job.
6.6.8 Properties
When clicking Properties ( ) option, the system will display Job dialog box.
553
CHAPTER
7
7 MANAGE
7.1 COMPONENTS
7.1.1 Machines
Refer to section 2. Configure Cutting Machines.
7.1.2 Parts
Parts ( ) option enables accessing various parts. The parameters of any selected parts can be
modified and customised as required. The modification of a machined part is done by selecting the
machine type, material and its thickness. The system will display Parts dialog box, as shown below, which
provides a list of the parts available in the database:
554
Figure 384: Parts dialog box
In order to customize the parts, it is necessary to configure the table parameters from available and
ordered columns. In addition to this, select Criteria or Modify options which give the user preference to
check and modify different parameters of a machined part. If Customize button is selected, the system
will display Configure: Tables dialog box, where the user will be able to set an order between the
available columns required.
555
Figure 385: Configure: Tables dialog box
7.1.3 Figures
Figures ( ) option enables the user to search, modify and delete figures from the main module of
Expert. The system will display Figures dialog box, as shown below, which provides the following options:
556
Figure 386: Figures window
 Criteria: It is possible to filter the figures in the list through criteria window, where a set of criterions
can be established to filter the list of figures.
 Group: It is possible to filter the figures in the list selecting a group in particular.
 Modify: This option allows updating the reference, position, name and comments of a determined
figure.
 Customize: This button allows the user to select the columns to be displayed as well as their order in
the list.
 Delete: When selecting this button, the system shows the following warning window before deleting
the figure from the database:
557
Figure 387: Warning message
If the user confirms the action and the figure is used in any job or kit, the system will show a window that
displays a list with these jobs and kits:
Figure 388: Figure deletion confirmation window
Finally, if the user confirms the action, the system will delete the figure from the database.
 Close: This option allows closing the window.
558
7.1.4 Sheets
Sheets ( ) option gives the user information about various kinds of sheets that are used in the
manufacturing order. The sheets can be created, modified and customized as required during the
machined process by means of Create, Modify and Customize options respectively. Besides the
previous options, a given sheets reference, material, thickness, dimensions and quantity can be imported,
blocked or deleted through Import, Blocking and Delete options. Moreover, the sheets list allows the
user to print a report containing all the sheets that are available in the system.
It is also possible to filter sheets by dimensions. By selecting Criteria option, filtering will be done taking
into account both the newly defined dimensions, and those of the machine configuration window. The
most restrictive values, as the highest minimum and lowest maximum values are taken into account.
Figure 389: Sheets dialog box
In addition, the user can also update sheet costs whenever the price of a sheet has been modified
through Modify and Costs buttons.
559
7.1.5 Materials
Materials ( ) option, enables the user to Add, Edit, Delete and view Details as the name, density,
thickness and price of a material in the available Database materials list. Any Standard material can be
selected and transferred to the Database materials list. In the Database material, a new material can be
created with a given name, density, thickness and price. The database materials can be edited and
deleted from the existing list.
Figure 390: Materials dialog box
7.1.5.1 Edit Materials

If the user selects Edit button, the system will display Edit Material window:
560
Figure 391: Edit material window
In this window, the user can modify the Name, Density, Strength and Price as well as introduce Prices by
thickness ranges. The different ranges of thicknesses cannot overlap or be included into different ranges.
7.1.6 Consumables
Consumables ( ) option provides the list of consumables consisting abrasives and raw materials
defined by the system. When selected, the system will display Consumables dialog box as shown below:
561
Figure 392: Consumables dialog box
Here the user will be able to Create, Modify and Delete the parameters of consumables for the
corresponding machines.
 Create: If selected, the system will display Consumable definition dialog box as shown below:
Figure 393: Consumable definition dialog box
Here the user will have to select between Abrasive and Raw material and introduce the Name, Factor and
Price required. Clicking on Calculate button calculates the abrasive factor based on the following
parameters:
 Pressure
 Orifice diameter
562
 Mixing nozzle diameter
 Abrasive flow
 Material
 Machinability
 Thickness
 Speed
 Abrasive factor
 Modify: If selected, the system will display Modification of the consumable dialog box as shown
below:
Figure 394: Modification of the consumable dialog box
The user will be able to modify the Name, Unit and Price of the consumable.
 Delete: This option will delete the selected consumable of the list. The system will display a warning
message in order to make sure if the user wants to erase the selected consumable. Click Yes to
continue or No to cancel the operation.
563
7.2 DRILLS
7.2.1 Drills
Drills ( ) option enables executing cycles, if the cutting machine has any kind of tools which execute
cycles. When selected, the system will display Tools dialog box as shown below:
Figure 395: Tools dialog box
 Criteria: When selected, the system will display Tools selection dialog box as shown below:
564
Figure 396: Tools selection dialog box
Through this window, the user will be able to modify the list of Tools displayed in Tools dialog box
shown previously.
 Create: This button will create a new tool of any of the four available types. The system will display
Tools definition dialog box as shown below:
Figure 397: Tools definition dialog box
565
Each type of cycle contains specific parameters as displayed in the following dialog boxes:
 DRILL CYCLE:
Figure 398: Drill cycle dialog box
566
 TAP CYCLE:
Figure 399: Tap cycle dialog box
567
 REAM CYCLE:
Figure 400: Ream cycle dialog box
568
 C. SINK CYCLE:
Figure 401: C. Sink cycle dialog box
569
 MILLING CYCLE:
Figure 402: Milling cycle dialog box
 Modify: If selected, the system will display the dialog box that corresponds to the cycle type required
to modify, where the user will be able to change the parameters and click OK in order to save them.
 Delete: Select the required cycle from the list provided in Tools dialog box and click Delete button to
erase it. The system will display a warning message in order to make sure if the user wants to delete
the cycle. Select Yes to proceed with the deletion and No to cancel the operation.
 Close: Select this option in order to exit from Tools dialog box and come back to Home display.
570
7.2.2 Assign Drills
Once all tools have been defined on the system, the user can assign which tools will use each machine
by means of this option.
1. Select Assign drills ( ) option and the system will display Machine select dialog box
which lists all the machines available.
Figure 403: Machine select dialog box
2. Select the required machine and click OK button so that the system displays Assign tools
dialog box of the selected machine as shown below:
571
Figure 404: Assign tools dialog box
3. This dialog box is composed of two lists. The one in the left will show all the Defined tools that
have not been assigned to any machine, while the one in the right will show all the Tools
assigned to the current machine.
4. In order to add or remove any tool to the selected machine, make use of the arrow buttons and
click OK button in order to save the tool assignations.
7.2.3 Turrets
Turrets ( ) option manages drill turrets. If selected, the system will display Turrets dialog box as
shown below:
572
Figure 405: Turrets dialog box
Through this dialog box the user can manipulate turrets, assign them to a specific machine and
define the default active turret.
 <Change/Modify>: When selected, the system will display dialog box as shown below:
Figure 406: Turrets dialog box 2
From this window the user can create different types of turrets with different number of stations.
Each new turret must have a reference for the system, and a drawing can be assigned in order to
make easier the turret identification.
 Create: With this button, a new turret will be created with the selected type and with the
specified number of stations:
573
Figure 407: Selection of turret type dialog box
Select the required turret Type, introduce the Number of stations and click OK button so that the
system displays Turrets dialog box as shown below.
Figure 408: Turrets dialog box 3
Every turret needs a Reference, and the user can assign a Drawing by means of a BMP file which
will be shown in order to make the identification of the turret easier.
574
Here each station can be configured, just selecting it from the list and clicking on one of the options
provided. The user will be able to create a new station in the specified position, as well as modifying
or deleting an existing one.
 Modify: Every station has to be configured properly, with this button the properties of the selected
station will appear and the user will be able to modify them. When this option is selected the system
will display Stations dialog box as shown below:
Figure 409: Stations dialog box
o Station: Number of stations in the turret.
o Type: Type of the station.
o Minimum & Maximum diameter: If the station is not a Multitool one, the system must know the
minimum and maximum diameter of the tools that fix into the station.
 Parameters: By means of this option the user will be able to visualize all the parameters related to
the turret.
 Delete: Select the required turret to delete and click this button in order to erase it.
 Copy: This option copies all the parameters of the selected turret.
 Close: Select this option in order to exit from this dialog box.
 <Assign turret-machine>: Make use of this option in order to assign a turret to the current machine.
The system will display a list of the machines available so that the user selects the required one. If a
turret has been previously assigned to the selected machine, the system will display Confirm
assignation warning message.
575
 <Active turret>: Through this option the user can visualize the configuration of the current machine
with the punches and dies that have already been assigned. The test will verify it they have been
correctly loaded into the turret.
576
CHAPTER
8
8 UTILITIES
8.1 EXPORT
Export menu allows the user to export different types of installation files of a machine type that are
available in the default list.
In order to export the parts from the database to the required file format, perform the following steps:
1. Click DXF/DWG/MEC files button from the export section and the system displays the
corresponding file dialog box listing the different file formats.
2. Select the required part from the Part List and move it to the right section.
3. Select the Group in the right section to include the selected file format to a group.
 Select the Directory where the user wants to export and include the part in a group.
 The Criteria checkbox indicates whether or not the listed parts are based on specified criteria (refer
criteria). Select this check box to specify the criteria and view only those parts in the list that fulfill the
specified criteria.
4. Click OK and the files will be exported from the database.
577
 Parts exported to a DXF file can be exported together with their dimensions.
8.2 NESTINGS
8.2.1 Import
This option allows importing nestings to a file. In order to do it perform the following steps:
1. Select Import ( ) option and the system will display Open dialog box so that the user
searches the required nesting.
2. Once selected the system will display Import dialog box as shown below.
Figure 410: Import dialog box
3. Find the fields provided in the previous dialog box briefly described below:
 Job reference: Unique reference code assigned to the job. The system will assign it automatically.
578
 Job name: The user will have to introduce the required name for the job in this field.
 Configuration files and machine tools: This option allows importing the files and machine tools
from the database to a specified .bck (backup) file of your local directory. This operation will be
carried out automatically once it is selected.
 Relationship among the materials to import and material to use: This table contains the following
parameters: Materials to import, Materials to use and New reference.
 Create new reference for all the imported products in the case that they exist in the database:
Select this option in order to create a new reference code for all the imported products existing in the
database.
 Prompt for the reference on each part: The system will automatically generate a reference for each
part. If it is enabled, the system will ask for the reference at the moment of generating a new part.
 Overwrite all: Select this option in order to overwrite the quantity of parts when importing existing
ones or when a part already exists in the database with a defined quantity and the user imports the
same part again. The system can be configured to add the quantity of the new part to the previous
one or to replace the old quantity by the new one.
4. Once all the parameters have been set as per the user’s requirements, click OK button in order
to save them.
5. The system will direct the user to Nesting and Machining module and will open the imported
nesting.
8.2.2 Export
This option allows exporting nestings to a file and the selected files can be exported from a database to
the local directory. It gives information about machines, materials, sheets, products and nestings in order
to carry out the import. In order to export a nesting perform the following steps:
1. Select Export ( ) option and the system will display Export nestings dialog box as shown
below:
579
Figure 411: Export nestings dialog box
2. Find the fields provided in the previous dialog box briefly described below:
 Configuration files and machine tools: This option allows the user to export the files and machine
tools from the database to a specified .bck (backup) file to your local directory. It is carried out
automatically when this option is selected.
 Every sheet of the job: Select this option to export all the sheets of the job to the file.
 Every sheet of the database: Select this option to view all the sheets of the database. If there is no
active order when exporting, Every sheet of the database option will only appear, while Every sheet of
the job option will be disabled.
 Display drawing: If selected, the user will be able to visualize either the sheet of the job or every
sheet of the database. Therefore, when selecting a nesting to be exported, the user can select
nestings from another job other than the active job.
 Criteria: By means of this option the user will be able to visualize the parts that compose the nestings
together with their Machine, Material, Thickness, Reference, Date, Length, Width, Jobs and Parts.
3. Once all the parameters have been set as per the user’s requirements choose the required
nesting from the list located on the left side
580
4. Make use of the Arrow buttons to select it by moving it to the list on the right and click OK in
order to export it.
5. The system will display Directory dialog box so that the user selects the folder where the
nesting will be kept.
6. Click Select button and the nesting will be exported.
8.3 DATABASES
8.3.1 New
New ( ) option allows creating a new database by selecting the required directory. In addition, it is
also possible to create a database from a backup of other database. In order to create one, perform the
following steps:
1. When selected, the system will display Database dialog box as shown below:
2. Introduce the required Name and select the required Directory.
3. If Import checkbox is selected, Select file navigation field and Select machines to import dialog
box will become activated.
4. Once all parameters are as required click OK button and the new database will be created.
581
8.3.2 Connect
By means of Connect ( ) option, the user can connect to an existing database and server. When
selected, the system will display Connection dialog box as shown below:
Figure 413: Connection dialog box
The user will have to introduce the User name, Password, Server and Database. Introduce the Database
name directly or select any of the existing ones available in your local directory by means of the
Navigation ( ) button.
8.3.3 Delete
Delete ( ) option allows deleting any Expert database not in use. Several databases may be selected
simultaneously. In the deletion process, confirmation will be requested for each database since
associated files may also be deleted.
When this option is selected, the system will display Database selection window which lists all the
databases available. Enable Delete associated files parameter in order to delete the selected databases
with their associated files.
582
Once modified, click Refresh ( ) button so that the new server databases can be visualized.
8.3.4 Information
By means of Information ( ) option, the user can select a specific group to get the required data
from an existing database. By default, the database will remain deactivated. The system will display
Database dialog box as shown below:
This dialog box provides the Name of the database together with the Directory and Group. The directory
containing database documents can be modified via this window. The system will display a warning
message informing of the effects this action would have in case database documents of the directory are
modified.
583
CHAPTER
9
9 VIEW
9.1 JOB EXPLORER
Job explorer ( ) option provides information about the list of jobs that have been created. Any new
jobs created will be organized in folders in a tree structure on the left side of the drawing window.
In Job explorer panel, jobs have two identifiers: name and references. Whenever a job is created, an
automatic reference is generated, which will be unique in the database. In addition, the user will have to
give a name for it. The same job name cannot be repeated in another folder.
If the user right clicks on a job, a contextual menu will be displayed providing the following options: Open,
Export, Cut, Copy, Delete, Change name, Refresh and Properties.
9.2 KIT EXPLORER
Kit explorer ( ) option provides information about the list of kits that have been created. Any new kits
created will be organized in folders in a tree structure on the left side of the drawing window.
If the user right clicks on a kit a contextual menu will be displayed providing the following options: Open,
Export, Cut, Copy, Delete, Change name, Refresh and Properties.
584
9.3 PRODUCT LIST
Product list ( ) option allows the visualization of all the parts along with details like Reference,
Machine, Material, Thickness, Quantity, Labor ticket, Priority, Pending quantity, Lost quantity, Name, User
data (1-2-3) and Dimensions.
If the user right clicks on a product, a contextual menu will be displayed providing the following options:
New, Open, Open parts, Delete, Masterlink, Print, Properties, Cancel and Customize.
9.4 PRODUCT VIEW
Product view ( ) option allows the visualization of all the drawing parts of the opened
manufacturing order.
9.5 SHEET LIST
Sheet list ( ) option allows the visualization of all the sheet parts in a list format and displays
information such as: Reference, Machine, Material, Thickness, CNC, Quantity, Sheet, Status,
Dimensions, Weight (kg), Use (%), X &Y dimensions and User data (1-2-3).
9.6 SHEET VIEW
Sheet view ( ) option allows the visualization of all sheets of the opened manufacturing order at
once.
CHAPTER
585
10
10 ADD-INS
10.1 PROCESSES
Processes ( ) option allows the user to carry out a complete manufacturing process.
Processes are used to carry out a series of actions that are repeated in our daily work. Through
Processes window it is possible to create sets of process instructions related to our Databases, System,
Jobs, Kits, Sheets, Import, Draw, Nesting and machining, Palletization, View, Print, Errors and Control. It
helps the user save time by means of the automatization of all these instructions that the user keeps
creating repeatedly.
Previously, the user must define this process, writing a file with a certain format with the manufacturing
order to be opened and the number of parts to be imported among others.
The window is divided into two sections. On the left side the user will visualize the whole Set of
instructions, listing all the possible operations:
586
Figure 415: Set of instructions (Processes)
On the right side, the user will be provided with the List of process instructions. The user will have to
double click on the desired operations in order to place them in the list of process instructions in the
desired order. Once the desired process has been created he will have to go to Processes tab, select
Save as option and save it after introducing the required name.
In order to obtain more information about Processes go to Technical information / Working with
processes section.
Figure 416: List of process instructions example
587
10.2 PARAMETRIC EDITOR
Parametric editor ( ) option allows the user to visualize the instructions tree along with all the
available instructions that can be included in the file.
It is possible to create an instruction either by double clicking on the desired instruction or by selecting it
and clicking Add option located in the contextual menu, which would display the Data request window for
the instruction creation.
Once the instruction has been selected and all the required data introduced, click OK button and the
instruction will be included in the list located in the center. The panel situated in the center consists in a
table and it shows the information per each of the instructions included, corresponding number by
insertion order, associated image, name of the element it represents, name of the instruction and the
parameters associated to it.
The right hand side of the window provides the Data request window and the Graphic display window.
When the application is started both windows will be almost empty, however, they will keep being
updated as the user adds the instructions.
By means of the ribbon, it is possible to execute diverse actions with the instructions. From Home tab it is
possible to access the Properties of an instruction in order to modify, delete, cut and paste it in another
point of the file or copy it. On the other hand, from the View tab the user can show or hide the Data
request and Graphic display windows. The window can be shown or hidden as per the requirements just
by selecting the corresponding icon located in the menu.
588
CHAPTER
11
11 CUTTING PROCESS
1. Home / Utilities / Databases / New
The user will visualize a Loading window. Once the Database has been created, the system will
direct the user to Home Jobs (CAM) window.
2. Jobs / Jobs / New
589
Figure 418: Job dialog box
The reference will be automatically generated by the system. Introduce the required Name. The user
can also introduce various User data and a Description if necessary. Click OK button in order to save
the changes.
Figure 419: Job explorer tree
3. Manage / Components / Machines / New
590
Figure 420: Machine definition dialog box
Install a new cutting machine as follows:
Figure 421: Install: Machines dialog box
The list on the left lists the Available machines while the one on the right provides the Installed ones.
Make use of the arrow ( , ) buttons in order to move the required machines from the available
list to the Installed one and click OK button.
591
The selected machine will appear on Machine definition dialog box, where the user can introduce the
required name.
Click OK button and the selected machine will be displayed in Configure: Machines dialog box.
Select close button to come back to Home module.
4. Manage / Materials
Figure 422: Materials dialog box
Select the required material from the list of the Standard Materials located on the left and make use
of the arrow ( , ) buttons in order to add them to the Database materials list, which is located on
the right side.
5. Home / Modules / Drawing module ( )
Lantek Expert Drawing window will be visualized.
6. Home / Draw / Rectangles 2 points ( )
Select the first and second points and a rectangle will be drawn based on the points selected.
592
Figure 423: Rectangles example
7. Home / Draw / Circles – Centre and radius ( )
Create a full circle defined by its centre and radius.
Select the circle center and input the circle radius in Value field provided in the dialog box displayed.
Figure 424: Circles example
8. Home / Modify / Fillets ( )
Fillet a corner by selecting the first and second elements and input the Radius value in the dialog box
displayed by the system. Execute the same action twice.
593
Figure 425: Fillets example
9. Home / Modify / Chamfer ( )
Chamfer a corner by introducing d1 and d2 values in the dialog box displayed. Afterwards, select the
first and second elements and the system will chamfer them.
Figure 426: Chamfer example
10. Home / Transform / Copy ( )
Select the required geometry to copy by means of the options provided in Selection toolbar. In this
case select the whole geometry and rotate it 180º by means of the Dragging options. Place it next to
the initial geometry symmetrically and click Finish in order to exit from this application.
594
Figure 427: Copy example
11. Home / Transform / Union ( )
Select base contour and the second contour, the system will unify the selected elements.
Figure 428: Union example
12. Save the part ( ).
595
Figure 429: Part saving dialog box
Introduce the required data and click OK button in order to save the part.
The system will direct the user back to Jobs (CAM) window.
13. Home / Modules / Nesting and machining
14. Home / Sheets / New
The system will display Sheet selection dialog box as shown below:
596
Select the required sheet from the list and click OK button in order to open it.
15. Home / Nesting / One sheet
Figure 431: One Sheet example
597
The system will automatically nest on the current sheet, always looking for the best part
combination and sheet usage.
16. Home / Remnants / Configure ( )
The system will display Sheet remnants dialog box as shown below:
Figure 432: Sheet Remnants dialog box
Select the required type of remnant and introduce the required data. If Create the cutting line of the
remnant automatically parameter is enabled, the system will create the remnant automatically when
One sheet option is executed. Click OK button in order to save the information and create the
remnant.
17. Home / Remnants / Create remnants ( )
598
The system will generate the remnant automatically, based on the data previously introduced in
Sheet remnants dialog box.
The user will visualize the nesting as follows:
Figure 433: Automatic remnant creation example
18. Technology / Lead-in/Lead-out / Automatic
The system will place the Lead-in/Lead-outs automatically on the parts as it is possible to see in the
following image:
599
Figure 434: Automatic Lead-in/Lead-outs example
19. Machining / Machining / Automatic
20. The system will display Machining initialization window as shown below:
600
Figure 435: Machining initialization window
Introduce the required data in the different sections provided and click Finish button in order to
execute the machining.
Figure 436: Machining example
601
21. Machining / View / Verify the Machining ( )
By means of this option the system will test if the machining process has been done properly looking
if:
o All the parts and contours are machined
o There is no overlapping between parts
o There are no leads, micro-joints, loops, etc. that overlap with other elements
If any of the previous situations is given, the system will display the following completion message:
“All machining on the sheet has been executed”.
Figure 437: Verify the machining completion message
The dark grey color in the contours means that the test has been successful:
Figure 438: Verified machining example
602
22. Start menu / Save
Save the nesting in order to generate the CNC code.
23. Machining / View / View CNC
View CNC ( ) option shows the CNC code of the sheet:
Figure 439: CNC code example
603
Conclusion
This short tutorial has covered all the basic and important features, concepts, and modules of Lantek
Expert, which is required to manage your organization processes easily. Now the user has an idea of
what is Expert Software and how to use it proficiently.
If the user desires to know more techniques and additional information about the modules that compose
Expert, they are available through the following documents:
 Lantek Expert User Manual
 Online Help
604
www.lanteksms.com

Expert Cut Reference Manual

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Expert Cut Reference Manual

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

CUT

Table of Contents .......................................................................................................................................... 3

Table of Figures .......................................................................................................................................... 15

LANTEK EXPERT ................................................................................................................................... 25

What is Expert? ........................................................................................................................................... 25

Documentation Conventions ....................................................................................................................... 26

1 SYSTEM UNITS .................................................................................................................................. 27

1.1 Metric System.............................................................................................................................. 27

2 CONFIGURE CUTTING MACHINES & TOOLS ................................................................................. 29

2.1 Multitorch Data ............................................................................................................................ 29

2.3.1 Position ................................................................................................................................ 35

2.3.2 Clamp Zone ......................................................................................................................... 38

2.3.3 Auxiliar ................................................................................................................................. 39

2.4 Fixtures ........................................................................................................................................ 40

2.10.1 General ................................................................................................................................ 47

2.10.2 Advanced ............................................................................................................................ 48

2.10.3 Device ................................................................................................................................. 49

2.11 Sheet Parameters ....................................................................................................................... 50

2.13.1 Head Data ........................................................................................................................... 52

2.13.2 Chamfers Management ....................................................................................................... 53

2.14 General ........................................................................................................................................ 55

2.14.2 Part Changes ...................................................................................................................... 55

2.14.3 Auxiliar ................................................................................................................................. 56

2.14.4 Cut ....................................................................................................................................... 57

2.15 Startup ......................................................................................................................................... 57

2.15.1 General ................................................................................................................................ 57

2.15.2 Pre-initialization ................................................................................................................... 58

2.15.3 Feed Rates .......................................................................................................................... 58

2.16 CNC ............................................................................................................................................. 59

2.18.1 General ................................................................................................................................ 61

2.18.2 Subprograms ....................................................................................................................... 62

2.18.3 Part Saving .......................................................................................................................... 63

2.18.4 Execution Nesting Module .................................................................................................. 63

2.19 Material/Thickness Dependent Data ........................................................................................... 64

2.19.1 Cutting Parameters ............................................................................................................. 64

2.19.2 Sheets Parameters.............................................................................................................. 65

2.19.3 Automatic Technology ......................................................................................................... 66

2.19.4 Head Raising Test ............................................................................................................... 67

2.19.5 Machining Order .................................................................................................................. 67

2.19.6 Lead-in/Lead-out Values ..................................................................................................... 68

2.19.7 Automatic Lead-in/Lead-out Values .................................................................................... 69

2.19.9 Automatic Micro-joint Values ............................................................................................... 71

2.19.10 Loop Values .................................................................................................................... 72

2.19.11 Chamfer Values............................................................................................................... 73

2.19.12 Bridge Values .................................................................................................................. 74

2.19.13 Chamfers Management ................................................................................................... 74

2.19.14 Sheet Remnants.............................................................................................................. 74

2.20 Cutting Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 75

2.20.1 General ................................................................................................................................ 75

2.20.2 Auxiliar Parameters ............................................................................................................. 76

2.20.3 Contour Attributes ............................................................................................................... 77

2.20.4 Compensations by Quality .................................................................................................. 77

2.21 Common Cutting Parameters...................................................................................................... 78

2.22.1 Lead-in/Lead-out Values ..................................................................................................... 80

2.22.2 Automatic Lead-in/Lead-out Values .................................................................................... 81

2.22.3 Micro-joint Values ................................................................................................................ 85

2.22.4 Automatic Micro-joint Values ............................................................................................... 85

2.22.5 Loop Values ........................................................................................................................ 86

2.22.6 Chamfer Values................................................................................................................... 87

2.22.7 Bridge Values ...................................................................................................................... 87

2.22.8 Tables of Technology .......................................................................................................... 88

2.23 Automatic Nesting ....................................................................................................................... 90

2.23.1 General ................................................................................................................................ 90

2.23.2 Advanced ............................................................................................................................ 98